Sony PM-0020 Mobile phone with Bluetooth, WLAN 802.11abgn, GPS/A-GPS, RFID and FM Rx User Manual 08 user guide

Sony Mobile Communications Inc Mobile phone with Bluetooth, WLAN 802.11abgn, GPS/A-GPS, RFID and FM Rx 08 user guide

UserManual.wiki >

Sony >

PM 0020 User Manual HTML Version

08 user guide

’12.2

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Introduction

Thank you for your purchase of "SO-05D".

For proper use of the SO-05D, read this manual carefully before and while you use the SO-05D.

Before using the terminal

●

SO-05D supports W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS and Wireless LAN Systems.

●

Because a terminal operates using radio frequencies, it cannot be used inside a tunnel, underground, in a

building or other locations where radio waves do not reach the terminal, in locations with weak radio wave

condition, or outside of the FOMA's service area. The services may not be available on high upper floors of

high-rise apartments or buildings, even if you can see no obstructions around you. On occasion, your calls

may become disconnected even in areas with strong radio wave condition, even if you are not moving, or

even if there are 4-antenna marks in the terminal's display.

●

Note that because the terminal operates on radio frequencies, your calls are at risk of being intercepted by

the third party. However, the W-CDMA, GSM/GPRS system automatically scrambles all calls through a

private call feature. Therefore, even if third party successfully intercepts your call, they will only hear noise.

●

The terminal operates on radio frequencies by converting voice into digital signals. If the caller moves into

an area of adverse radio wave condition, the digital signal may not be restored accurately, and the voice

received in the call may differ slightly from the actual voice.

●

Note down the information saved in the terminal in a separate note and keep it safely. Even if the data

may be lost as a result of malfunction, repair, change, or other handling of the terminal, under no

condition will DOCOMO be held liable for any lost data saved in the terminal.

●

You are recommended to save important data to microSD card.

●

As with PCs, some user-installed applications may disrupt the stability of the terminal performance, or

unexpectedly transmit information via the Internet causing improper use of your location information as

well as personal information recorded on the terminal. Therefore, verify the supplier and operating

conditions of the applications to be used before using them.

●

This terminal has FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area support.

●

Descriptions in this manual are fore the terminal with a DOCOMO's UIM inserted.

SIM unlock

This terminal supports SIM unlock. If you release SIM lock, you can use SIM by a carrier other than NTT

DOCOMO.

●

The SIM unlock service is provided at a docomo Shop.

●

A SIM unlock charge is separately required.

●

If you use a SIM other than by DOCOMO, available services and functions will be limited. DOCOMO is not

liable to any failures or malfunctions.

●

For details of SIM unlock, refer to NTT DOCOMO website.

･

SO-05D (with warranty)

･

クイックスタートガイド

(Quick Start Guide)

(In Japanese only)

･

SO-05D

のご利用にあたっての注意事項

安全上／取り扱い上のご注意

(Notes on usage Safety/Handling

precautions) (In Japanese only)

･

AC Adapter Cable SO04 (with warranty)

･

1Seg antenna cable SO01 (with manual)

･

microSD card (2GB)

(Sample)

(with manual)

* Inserted in the terminal when purchased.

･

Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample)

(with manual)

For details on optional devices, see "Optional

and related devices" (P.243).

Supplied accessories

クイック

スタート

ガイド

In addition to this manual, the operations of

SO-05D are described in "

クイックスタートガ

イド

(Quick Start Guide)" (in Japanese only)

and "Instruction Manual" application of the

terminal.

The initial operations and settings after

purchasing the terminal, screen view

contents and operations of main function are

explained. (In Japanese only)

Similarly to this manual, operations and

settings of each function are explained.

To use "Instruction Manual" application, from

the Home screen,

Tap [Instruction

Manual]. For the first time using, download

and install it according to the onscreen

instructions. You can use the application as

an electronic book. You can also shift to

actual operations by tapping the description

in the contents or view reference contents.

❖

Note

･

For downloading or updating the application, a high

packet communication charge will be applied

because of a large amount data communication. For

this reason, subscription of packet flat-rate service is

highly recommended.

* If you use Wi-Fi function to download, packet

communication charges are not applied.

Operations and settings of each function are

explained.

It can be downloaded from NTT DOCOMO

website.

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/

support/trouble/manual/download/

index.html

* You can download the latest information of

クイックスタートガイド

(Quick Start Guide)"

(in Japanese only). The URL and contents are

subject to change without prior notice.

❖

Note

･

Reproduction or reprint of all or part of this manual

without prior permission is prohibited.

･

Important information for SO-05D is posted in the

following website. Be sure to check before using.

http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/support/use_support/

product/so-05d/

About manuals of SO-05D

クイックスタートガイド

(Quick

Start Guide)" (Supplied

accessories)

"Instruction Manual"

(Application of the terminal)

"Instruction Manual" (PDF file)

In this manual, each key operation is

described with

. And selection operations of

the icons or function items on the touch

panel are described as follows.

❖

Information

･

In this manual, the instructions are described with

the default Home screen. If you set the other

application to the home screen, the operations may

differ from the descriptions.

･

Display examples and illustrations used in this

manual are just images for explanations and may be

different from actual ones.

･

In this manual, the easier procedure is described for

the functions and settings which have multiple

operating procedures.

･

Please note that "SO-05D" is called "the terminal" in

this manual.

･

In this manual, explanations for "docomo" as Home

application are provided. To switch the Home

applications, see "Learning Home screen" (P.66).

Operation descriptions

Description Operation

From the Home

screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

From the Home screen, tap

(Menu) key and tap

"Settings" on the screen.

Tap

[Settings]

[Date

& time]

[Set

date].

Tap "Settings" displayed on the

screen, and then tap "Date &

time" on the next screen and

"Set date" on the following

screen in order.

Tap to zoom

in or out on a map.

Tap displayed on the

screen to zoom in or out the

map.

Touch and hold

icon.

Keep touching the icon longer

(1-2 seconds).

Contents/Precautions

Contents/Pre cautions

Supplied accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

About manuals of SO-05D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Notes on usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety Precautions (Always follow these directions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Handling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Contents

Before Using the Terminal

→

P. 2 9

・

Part names and functions ................................................................... 29

・

UIM .............................................................................................................. 30

・

microSD card ........................................................................................... 31

・

Charging.................................................................................................... 33

・

Turning power on/off ........................................................................... 37

・

Initial settings (Setup guide).............................................................. 39

・

Status bar .................................................................................................. 41

・

Notification panel .................................................................................. 42

・

Notification LED...................................................................................... 43

・

Basic operations ..................................................................................... 44

・

Searching information in the terminal and web pages ........... 46

・

Character entry ....................................................................................... 47

・

Setting character entry ........................................................................ 60

・

Setting Japanese keyboard................................................................ 60

docomo Palette UI

→

P. 6 6

・

Home screen............................................................................................ 66

・

Applications screen............................................................................... 71

Calling/Network Services

→

P. 8 1

・

Making/Receiving a call....................................................................... 81

・

Call history ................................................................................................ 85

・

Phonebook............................................................................................... 87

・

Network Services.................................................................................... 96

Contents/Precautions

Settings

→

P.107

・

Viewing the setting menu ................................................................107

・

docomo service ....................................................................................107

・

Xperia

™ ...............................................................................

108

・

Wireless & networks ............................................................................109

・

Call settings............................................................................................119

・

Sound .......................................................................................................119

・

Display......................................................................................................122

・

Location & security ..............................................................................124

・

Applications ...........................................................................................129

・

Accounts & sync....................................................................................132

・

Privacy......................................................................................................135

・

Storage.....................................................................................................136

・

Language & keyboard ........................................................................138

・

Voice input & output...........................................................................138

・

Accessibility............................................................................................139

・

Date & time.............................................................................................139

・

About phone .........................................................................................140

Mail/Internet

→

P.141

・

sp-mode mail.........................................................................................141

・

Message (SMS) ......................................................................................141

・

Email .........................................................................................................144

・

Using Gmail............................................................................................151

・

Google Talk.............................................................................................151

・

Early Warning "AreaMail"...................................................................152

・

Using Browser........................................................................................153

File management

→

P.158

・

Handling a file .......................................................................................158

・

Transferring and moving data.........................................................158

・

Using Infrared communication.......................................................163

・

Using Bluetooth function..................................................................166

・

Sharing files with DLNA devices via Connected devices (Media

server).......................................................................................................170

Contents/Precautions

Applications

→

P.172

・

Shooting with the camera ................................................................172

・

Capturing the screenshot .................................................................191

・

Playing multimedia content.............................................................192

・

Viewing photos/videos......................................................................193

・

Playing YouTube video.......................................................................198

・

Connecting the terminal to TV to watch photos and videos

....................................................................................................................199

・

Music player...........................................................................................200

・

Using Android Market ........................................................................204

・

Timescape

™ ........................................................................

205

・

About location services .....................................................................209

・

1Seg ..........................................................................................................215

・

FM radio...................................................................................................222

・

Osaifu-Keitai...........................................................................................223

・

Calendar ..................................................................................................227

・

Alarm and Clock ...................................................................................229

・

OfficeSuite ..............................................................................................233

・

Other applications ...............................................................................233

International roaming

→

P.234

・

Overview of International roaming (WORLD WING)...............234

・

Available Services.................................................................................234

・

Before using...........................................................................................235

・

Making/Receiving calls in the country you stay .......................238

・

International roaming settings .......................................................240

Appendix/Index

→

P.243

・

Optional and related devices...........................................................243

・

Troubleshooting...................................................................................243

・

Warranty and After Sales Services..................................................249

・

Updating software...............................................................................252

・

Main specification................................................................................255

・

Authorization and Compliance.......................................................257

・

Specific Absorption Rate of Mobile Phone, etc.........................258

・

End User Licence Agreement...........................................................270

・

About Open Source Software..........................................................271

・

Export Controls and Regulations ...................................................272

・

Intellectual Property Right................................................................272

・

Index .........................................................................................................272

Contents/Precautions

Contents/Pre cautions

･

The terminal does not support i-mode sites

(programs) or i-

ppli.

･

The terminal automatically performs

communication for synchronizing data,

checking the latest software version, maintain

connection with the server, etc. If you

transmit a large amount of data such as

downloading applications or watching

movie, a packet communication charge

becomes high. Subscription of packet flat-

rate service is highly recommended.

･

Public mode (Driving mode) is not supported.

･

Setting the phone to silent mode does not

mute playback sound of video or music,

alarm, etc.

･

The names of the operators are displayed on

key lock canceling screen (P.39).

･

Your phone number (own number) can be

checked as follows:

From the Home screen, tap

and tap

[Settings]

[About phone]

[Status].

･

The software version of your terminal can be

checked as follows:

From the Home screen, tap

and tap

[Settings]

[About phone].

･

You can perform software update by

downloading an update file with a PC via

Internet and connecting the PC to the

terminal. For details, see "Connecting to a PC

and updating" (P.254).

･

By some software updates, the operating

system (OS) may be version-upgraded for

improving the terminal quality. For this

reason, you always need to use the latest OS

version. And some applications that used in

the previous OS version may not be available

or some unintended bugs may occur.

･

When using the terminal inserting some UIM

(FOMA card) (green), voice calls and packet

communication may not be available in some

overseas networks. For using overseas, please

visit a docomo Shop near you. DOCOMO

exchanges UIM (FOMA card) (green) for UIM

free of charge.

･

Set the screen lock to ensure the security of

your terminal for its loss. For details, see

"Screen lock" (P.127).

･

If your terminal is lost, change your each

account password to invalidate

authentication using a PC to prevent other

persons from using Google services such as

Google Talk, Gmail, Android Market, etc.,

Facebook, Twitter and mixi.

･

The terminal supports only sp-mode, mopera

U and Business mopera Internet. Other

providers are not supported.

Notes on usage

Contents/Precautions

･

Battery is built into the terminal and cannot

be replaced by yourself.

･

To use tethering, subscription of sp-mode is

required.

･

Packet communication charge when using

tethering varies depending on the charging

plan you use. Subscription of packet flat-rate

service is highly recommended.

･

For details on usage charge, etc., refer to http:/

/www.nttdocomo.co.jp/ .

Notice:

Pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law (電波法)

and the Japanese Telecommunications

Business Law (電気通信事業法), this device

has been granted a designation number

according to the

"Ordinance concerning the Technical

Regulations Conformity Certification etc. of

Specified Radio Equipment (特定無線設備の

技術基準適合証明等に関する規則)"

R-(W-CDMA)/Article 2-1-11-3,

R-(W-CDMA)/Article 2-1-11-7,

IEEE802.11bgn (2.4GHz)/Article 2-1-19,

IEEE802.11an (5GHz)/Article 2-1-19-3,

IEEE802.11an (5GHz)/Article 2-1-19-3-2,

LTE/Article 2-1-11-19,

BT/Article 2-1-19:

202-SMA019

and "Ordinance Concerning Technical

Conditions Compliance Approval etc. of

Terminal Equipment ( 端末機器の技術基準適

合認定等に関する規則)"

T-(W-CDMA): AD 12-0015 202

Contents/Precautions

■

For safe and proper use of the terminal, please

read the "Safety Precautions" prior to use.

Keep the Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

■

ALWAYS observe the safety precautions since

they intend to prevent personal injury or

property damage.

■

The following symbols indicate the different

levels of injury or damage that may result if

the guidelines are not observed and the

terminal is used improperly.

■

The following symbols indicate specific

directions.

■

"Safety Precautions" are described in the

following categories:

1. Handling the terminal, AC Adapter cable,

Desktop Holder and UIM (general) . . . . . . . . . 10

2. Handling the terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3. Handling the adapter and desktop holder. . . 15

4. Handling the UIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

5. Handling the terminal near electronic medical

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

6. Material list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Safety Precautions (Always

follow these directions)

Failure to

observe these

guidelines may

immediately

result in death

or serious

injury.

Failure to

observe these

guidelines may

result in death

or serious

injury.

Failure to

observe these

guidelines may

result in injury

and property

damage.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates prohibited actions.

Indicates not to disassemble.

Indicates not to handle with wet

hands.

Indicates not to use where it could

get wet.

Indicates compulsory actions in

accordance with instructions.

Indicates to remove the power plug

from the outlet.

Don’t

No disassembly

No wet hands

No liquids

Unplug

Contents/Precautions

1. Handling the terminal, AC Adapter

cable, Desktop Holder and UIM

(general)

DANGER

Do not use, store or leave the equipment in

hot places (e.g. by the fire, near a heater,

under a kotatsu, in direct sunlight, in a car in

the hot sun). (including the event that you

ware the equipment in the pocket of your

clothes, etc.)

Doing so may cause fire, burns or injury.

Do not place equipment inside cooking

appliance such as a microwave oven or high-

pressure containers.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

Do not disassemble or modify the

equipment.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

Do not let the equipment get wet with

water, drinking water, urine of pet animals,

etc.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

Use the AC adapter cable for the terminal

specified by DOCOMO.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

WARNING

Do not subject the equipment to excessive

force or throw it.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

Do not allow the microUSB connecting jack,

headset connecting jack or HDMI

connecting jack to come in contact with

conducting foreign substances (a piece of

metal, pencil lead, etc.). Never allow these

objects to get into the connecting jack.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

Do not cover or wrap the equipment with a

cloth or bedding in use or while charging.

Doing so may cause fire or burns.

Power off the terminal before you step into a

place where flammable gas can leak, such as

gas stations. Stop charging if you charge the

battery.

Gas may catch fire.

When using Osaifu-Keitai in a place such as a

gas station, turn OFF the terminal before using

it.

(When Osaifu-Keitai lock is activated,

deactivate it before turning OFF the terminal.)

Don’t

No disassembly

No liquids

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

If you notice anything unusual about the

equipment such as an unusual odor,

overheating, discoloration or deformation

during operation, charging or storage,

immediately perform the following

measures.

・

Remove the power plug from the power

outlet.

・

Power off the terminal.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

CAUTION

Do not place on an unstable or inclined

platform.

Doing so may cause the device to fall and

cause injury.

Do not keep in a place that is very humid,

dusty, or subject to high temperature.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

If children use the terminal, parents or

guardians should give them the proper

instructions for use. Make sure that they use

the terminal as instructed.

Failure to do so may cause injury.

Keep the equipment out of the reach of

babies and infants.

Failure to do so may cause accidental

swallowing or injury.

Be careful especially when you use the

terminal while it has been continuously

connected to the AC adapter cable for a long

period of time.

If you play a game or watch 1Seg for a long

time while charging, the temperature of the

terminal and AC adapter cable may rise.

If you are directly in contact with hot parts for

a long period of time, it may cause your skin to

become red, itchy, or develop a rash

depending on your physical condition and

also it may cause low-temperature burn.

Observe the followings for 3D image

function.

・

Do not view 3D images shot by the terminal

with a 3D compatible monitor for a long

time. Doing so may cause unpleasant

symptom such as eyestrain, fatigue, feeling

ill, etc.

・

For viewing 3D images, you are

recommended to take a proper break.

Necessary break length or frequency varies

by individual. Judge for yourself.

・

When you experience unpleasant symptom,

stop viewing 3D images until you get healed

up and seek the advice of a doctor if

necessary. Also refer to the manuals come

with the device for connecting to the

terminal or software.

・

Vision of child (especially younger than 7

years) is during development. Before a child

views 3D images, seek the advise of a doctor

such as pediatrics or ophthalmologist. Adults

should supervise a child for the above

precautions.

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

2. Handling the terminal

■

The internal battery for the terminal is as

follows.

DANGER

Do not throw the terminal into fire.

Doing so may cause internal battery to ignite,

explode, overheat or leak.

Do not stick a nail into the terminal, hit it

with a hammer, or step on it.

Doing so may cause internal battery to ignite,

explode, overheat or leak.

If the internal battery fluid gets into your

eyes, do not rub, rinse with clean running

water, and get medical treatment

immediately.

Failure to do so may cause blindness.

WARNING

Do not direct the infrared data port toward

your eye and transmit signals.

Doing so may cause harmful effect your eyes.

Do not direct the infrared data port toward

home electric appliances etc. equipped with

infrared device when using infrared

communication.

Doing so may cause an accident because of

malfunction of infrared device.

Do not turn on the light with the lighting

luminescence part close to the eyes.

Especially to shoot infants or young

children, step away from them 1 m or more.

Doing so may cause blurred vision. Or injury

by dazzling eyes or surprising may occur.

Do not allow a foreign substance such as

water and other liquids, metal parts, or

flammables to get in the UIM or microSD

card insertion slot on the terminal.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

Do not turn on the light toward a driver of a

car etc.

Doing so may disturb driving and cause an

accident.

Display Type of Battery

Li-ion 00 Lithium Ion Battery

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

Power off the terminal in a place where the

use is prohibited such as in airplane or

hospital.

Failure to do so may affect electronic

equipment and electronic medical

equipment. If you set the automatic power-on

function, cancel it before powering off the

terminal.

Follow the instructions of each medical facility

for the use of mobile phones on their

premises.

Prohibited acts such as mobile phone usage

on board an airplane may be punished by law.

If usage of mobile phones in an aircraft is

admitted by setting airplane mode, etc., use

the terminal under the direction of the airline.

If the microUSB cable is connected into the

USB connecting jack for charging etc, the

terminal is automatically powered on

although the operations are not available. Be

careful not to connect the microUSB cable in a

place where the use is prohibited such as in

airplane or hospital.

Always keep the terminal away from your

ear when you talk setting the hands-free

function.

Also, when you play game, play back music,

etc. connecting the Earphone/Microphone,

etc. to the terminal, adjust the volume

adequately.

If the volume is too loud, it may cause

difficulty in hearing.

Moreover, if you barely hear the surrounding

sounds, it may cause an accident.

If you have a weak heart, set the vibrator or

ringtone volume carefully.

Failure to do so may affect your heart.

If you are wearing any electronic medical

equipment, check with the relevant medical

electronic equipment manufacturer or

vendor whether the operation may be

affected by radio waves.

The radio waves from the terminal may affect

electronic medical equipment.

Power off the terminal near electronic

devices or equipment operating on high

precision control or weak signals.

Failure to do so may interfere with the

operation of electronic devices or equipment.

* The followings are some electronic devices

or equipment that you should be careful of:

Hearing aids, implantable cardiac

pacemaker, implantable cardioverter

defibrillator, other electronic medical

equipment, fire detector, automatic door,

and other automatically controlled devices

or equipment.

If you use an implantable cardiac

pacemaker, implantable cardioverter

defibrillator, or other electronic medical

equipment, check with the relevant medical

electronic equipment manufacturer or

vendor whether the operation can be

affected by radio waves.

Be careful about broken glasses or exposed

internal from the terminal if the display or

the camera lens is broken.

Shatterproof film-applied hardened glass is

used on the display surface and the acrylic

resin is applied on camera lens so as not to be

shattered when broken. But they may cause

injury if you touch a cut surface or exposed

portion mistakenly.

Contents/Precautions

If the internal battery leaks or hears an

unusual odor, immediately stop using and

move it away from fire.

The leaking liquid may ignite fire, catch fire, or

explode.

CAUTION

Do not swing the terminal around by

holding the antenna or strap.

The terminal may hit you or others and cause

accident such as injury.

Do not use damaged terminal.

Doing so may cause fire, burns, injury or

electric shock.

If the display is mistakenly damaged and

when the liquid crystal runs out, do not get

it on your skin such as face, hands, etc.

Doing so may cause blindness or injury on

your skin.

If the liquid crystal gets in your eye or mouth,

rinse with clean running water, and get

medical treatment immediately.

Also, if it gets on your skin or clothes, use

something such as alcohol to wipe off and

wash it with soap in clear water.

Do not discard the battery pack together

with other garbage.

The terminal may become the source of fire or

environmental destruction. Take the used

terminal to our service counter (docomo

Shop, etc.) or follow the instructions of the

local authorities in charge of collecting used

terminals.

To use the terminal in car, check with

automobile manufacturer or dealer to

determine how the device is affected by

radio waves before using.

In rare cases, using the phone in some vehicle

models can cause the vehicle's electronic

equipment to malfunction. In that case, stop

using the terminal immediately.

The use of the terminal may cause itching,

rashes, eczema, or other symptoms

depending on the user's physical condition.

Immediately stop using and get medical

treatment in such a case.

For material of each part

→

P. 17 " M a te r i a l l i st "

When watching the display, take a certain

distance from the display in a fully bright

place.

Failure to do so may reduce visual acuity.

If fluid etc. leaks out from the internal

battery, do not make the fluid contact with

your skin of face or hands.

Doing so may cause blindness or injury on

your skin.

If the fluid etc. gets into your eyes or mouth, or

contacts skin or clothes, immediately flush the

contacted area with clean running water.

If the fluid gets into the eyes or mouth,

immediately see a doctor after flushing.

Don’t

Contents/Precautions

3. Handling the adapter and desktop

holder

WARNING

Do not use the microUSB cable if it is

damaged.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

Do not use the AC adapter cable or the

desktop holder in a very humid or steamy

place such as bathroom.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

DC adapter is only for a negative ground

vehicle. Do not use DC adapter for a positive

ground vehicle.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

Do not touch the AC adapter cable if you

hear thunder.

Doing so may cause electric shock.

Do not short-circuit the microUSB plug

while it is connected to the power outlet. Do

not touch the microUSB plug with your

hands, fingers, or any part of your body.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

Do not place any heavy objects on the

microUSB cable.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

When you insert and remove AC adapter

from power outlet, do not contact a metal

strap or other metal objects with the jack.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

Do not touch the cord of the AC adapter

cable, the desktop holder or the power

outlet with wet hands.

Doing so may cause fire, burns or electric

shock.

Use the adapter only on the specified power

supply and voltage.

Use the AC adapter cable available overseas

when you charge the battery overseas.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

AC adapter : AC 100 V to 240 V (Make sure to

connect the adapter to a household AC power

outlet.)

DC adapter : DC 12 V or 24 V (only for a

negative-ground vehicle)

When the fuse in a DC adapter is blown,

make sure to use the specified fuse.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock. For the specified fuse, see the

users manuals that supplied with a DC

adapter.

Clean dust from the power plug.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

When you connect the AC adapter to the

power outlet, insert it firmly.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

Don’t

No wet hands

Contents/Precautions

Hold the AC adapter, not the microUSB

cable, when you remove the power plug

from the power outlet.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

Remove the power plug from the power

outlet when not used for a long period of

time.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

If liquid such as water gets into the adapter,

immediately remove it from the power

outlet.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

Before cleaning, remove the power plug

from the power outlet.

Failure to do so may cause fire, burns or

electric shock.

4. Handling the UIM

CAUTION

Please be careful not to touch a cut surface

when you remove the UIM.

Failure to do so may cause injury.

5. Handling the terminal near

electronic medical equipment

■

The following instructions observe the

guidelines of the Electromagnetic

Compatibility Conference, Japan to protect

electronic medical equipment from radio

waves from mobile phones.

WARNING

Please observe the following guidelines in

medical facilities.

・

Do not take the terminal into the operating

rooms, ICU (Intensive Care Unit), or CCU

(Coronary Care Unit).

・

Power off the terminal inside hospital wards.

・

Power off the terminal in the lobby and

other places if there are any electronic

medical equipment operating in the vicinity.

・

Follow the instructions of each medical

facility when they specify areas forbidding to

use and carrying a mobile phone.

・

If you set the automatic power-on function,

cancel it before powering off the terminal.

Power off the terminal in crowded places

such as rush-hour trains. There may be a

person with an implantable cardiac

pacemaker or implantable cardioverter

defibrillator near you.

The radio waves from the terminal may affect

the operation of implantable cardiac

pacemaker or implantable cardioverter

defibrillator.

If you use an implantable cardiac pacemaker

or implantable cardioverter defibrillator,

keep the terminal 22 cm or more away from

the implant at all times.

The radio waves from the terminal may affect

the performance of electronic medical

equipment.

Unplug

Contents/Precautions

If you need to use electronic medical

equipment other than implantable cardiac

pacemaker or implantable cardioverter

defibrillator outside medical facilities such

as treating at home, check with the relevant

medical electronic equipment manufacturer

whether the operation may be affected by

radio waves.

The radio waves from the terminal may affect

the performance of electronic medical

equipment.

6. Material list

Part Material Surface

treatment

Exterior case

(cover front)

(terminal color :

Black)

PC resin

(with glass) +

SUS plate

Urethan coating

Exterior case

(cover front)

(terminal color :

Aqua/Sakura/

Ceramic)

PC resin

(with glass) +

SUS plate

UV coating

Exterior case

(rear frame)

PC resin

(with glass)

Discontinuous

evaporation

coating (tin) +

UV coating

Exterior case

(cover back)

(terminal color :

Black)

PC resin

(with glass)

Urethan coating

Exterior case

(cover back)

(terminal color :

Aqua/Sakura/

Ceramic)

PC resin

(with glass)

UV coating

Exterior case (HDMI/

headset/microUSB

connecting jack

cover)

PC resin Discontinuous

evaporation

coating (tin) +

UV coating

Exterior case

(microSD card slot/

UIM card slot cover)

(terminal color :

Black)

PC resin

(with glass)

Discontinuous

evaporation

coating (tin) +

urethane

coating

Exterior case

(microSD card slot/

UIM card slot cover)

(terminal color :

Aqua/Sakura/

Ceramic)

PC resin

(with glass)

Discontinuous

evaporation

coating (tin) +

UV coating

Transparent plate

(camera)

PC resin +

PMMA resin

AR treatment

Transparent plate

(flash)

PC resin

ー

Transparent plate

(display)

Glass + PET

resin

Hard coating

Side keys (power

key, volume key,

camera key)

PC resin UV coating

Whip antenna cap PC/ABS resin

ー

Part Material Surface

treatment

Contents/Precautions

■

Common precautions

･

Clean the terminal with a dry soft cloth

(such as used for cleaning eyeglasses).

- Do not rub it roughly with a dry cloth. The

display may be damaged.

- Drops of water or dirt left on the display may

cause stains.

- Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzine, cleaning

detergent, etc. to clean the terminal. These

chemicals may erase the printing on the

terminal or cause discoloration.

･

Clean the terminals occasionally with a

dry cotton swab.

If the jack is soiled, connection gets worse and it

may cause power to be turned off or insufficient

battery charge, so clean the jack with a dry

cotton swab etc. When cleaning, be careful not

to damage the terminals.

･

Do not leave the terminal near the air

conditioning vent.

Extreme temperature changes may produce

condensation and corrode the internal parts of

the terminal, causing it to malfunction.

･

Make sure to use the terminal etc. without

excessive force.

If you put the terminal in a bag full of items or sit

down with the terminal in the pocket of your

cloth, it may damage the display and internal

circuit board, and cause the terminal to

malfunction.

Also, while the external device is connected to

the microUSB connecting jack, headset

connecting jack or HDMI connecting jack, it may

damage the connector and cause malfunction.

･

Do not rub or scratch the display with

metal.

The display may get scratched and it may cause

malfunction or damage.

･

Make sure to see the user's manuals

supplied with the AC adapter cable.

Handling precautions

Contents/Precautions

■

The terminal precautions

･

Do not press touch panel surface forcibly,

or not operate with a sharp-pointed

objects such as nail, ballpoint pen, pin,

etc.

Doing so may cause damage of touch panel.

･

Do not use the terminal in extremely hot

or cold places.

Use the terminal where the temperature ranges

between 5

℃

and 40

℃

(limited to the temporary

use in a bathroom etc. when temperature is 36

℃

or more) and humidity ranges between 45% and

85%.

･

Using the terminal near ordinary phone,

television or radio may cause interference

in these electric appliances. Make sure to

move far away from them when using the

terminal.

･

Note down the information saved in the

terminal in a separate note and keep it

safely.

Under no condition will DOCOMO be held liable

for any damaged or lost data saved in the

terminal.

･

Do not drop or give a strong impact to the

terminal.

Doing so may cause malfunction or damage.

･

Do not plug the connector of the external

device into the microUSB connecting jack,

headset connecting jack or HDMI

connecting jack at the slant or pull it while

connecting.

Doing so may cause malfunction or damage.

･

The terminal could become warm while

in use and charging. This condition is not

abnormal. You can continue using the

terminal.

･

Do not leave the camera under direct

sunlight.

If you do so, some of the elements may melt or

become faded.

･

Usually use the terminal with the

connecting jack covers for microUSB/

headset/HDMI and covers for UIM card

slot and microSD card slot closed.

Failure to do so may get dust or water inside and

cause malfunction.

･

Do not remove the microSD card or

power off the terminal while using the

microSD card.

Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.

･

Do not let magnetic cards, etc. close to

the terminal.

The magnetic data in cash cards, credit cards,

telephone cards, floppy disks, etc. may be erased.

･

Do not bring strong magnetic objects

close to the terminal.

Strong magnetic objects may cause

misoperation.

Contents/Precautions

･

The internal battery is a consumable

accessory.

Even if the operating time of the terminal varies

depending on the operating conditions and

other factors, when the length of time you can

use the terminal with a fully charged battery

becomes unusually short, it is time to replace the

internal battery. For replacement of internal

battery, contact "General Inquiries" on the last

page of this manual or the DOCOMO-specified

repair office.

･

Charge the battery pack in an

environment with the proper ambient

temperature (5

℃

to 35

℃

･

The operating time of the internal battery

varies depending on the operating

environment and the secular degradation

of the internal battery.

･

Do not store the internal battery in the

following cases:

- The battery is fully charged (immediately after

the charging is complete)

- The battery has run out (the phone cannot

power on)

The performance and life of the internal battery

may deteriorate.

It is recommended that you store the internal

battery with the remaining battery level of about

40 percent as a guide.

■

The adapter precautions

･

Charge the battery pack in an

environment with the proper ambient

temperature (5

℃

to 35

℃

･

Do not charge in the following places.

- Places that are very humid, dusty or exposed to

strong vibrations.

- Near ordinary phone or TV/radio.

･

The AC adapter cable could become

warm while charging. This condition is

not abnormal. You can continue using the

terminal.

･

When using the DC adapter for charging,

do not turn off the vehicle engine.

Doing so may cause the vehicle battery run out.

･

When you use the power outlet with a

mechanism to prevent the plug from

being removed, follow the instructions on

the outlet's user's manual.

･

Do not give a strong impact to the

adapter. Also, do not bend or deform the

microUSB plug.

Doing so may cause malfunction.

■

UIM precautions

･

Do not use unnecessary force to insert/

remove the UIM.

･

Note that DOCOMO assumes no

responsibility for malfunctions occurring

as the result of inserting and using UIM

with another IC card reader/writer.

･

Always keep the IC portion clean when

you use the card.

･

Clean the terminal with a dry soft cloth

(such as used for cleaning eyeglasses).

Contents/Precautions

･

Note down the information saved in the

UIM in a separate note and keep it safely.

Under no condition will DOCOMO be held liable

for any damaged or lost data saved in the

terminal.

･

Take an expended UIM to sales outlet

such as docomo Shop for proper disposal

in order to protect the environment.

･

Do not carelessly damage, contact, or

short-circuit an IC.

Doing so may cause data loss or malfunction.

･

Do not drop a UIM or subject it to impact.

Doing so may cause malfunction.

･

Do not bend a UIM or place a heavy

object on it.

Doing so may cause malfunction.

･

Do not insert the UIM on which any label

or seal is stuck into the terminal.

Doing so may cause malfunction.

■

Bluetooth function precautions

･

To secure the Bluetooth communication

security, the terminal supports the

security function compliant with

Bluetooth standards, but the security may

not be sufficient depending on the

setting. Concern about the

communication using the Bluetooth

function.

･

Please be aware that DOCOMO is not

responsible for data leak when making

data communications using Bluetooth.

･

Frequency band

The frequency band used by the terminal's

Bluetooth/wireless LAN function is as follows.

2.4 : This radio equipment uses the 2400 MHz

band.

FH/XX/DS/OF

：

Modulation scheme is the

FH-SS, other system, DS-SS,

or OFDM system.

1 : The estimated interference distance is 10

m or less.

4 : The estimated interference distance is 40

m or less.

8 : The estimated interference distance is 80

m or less.

: The full band between 2400 MHz

and 2483.5 MHz is used and the

band of the mobile identification

device can be avoided.

Available channels vary depending on the

country.

For use in an aircraft, contact the airline

beforehand.

Contents/Precautions

･

Bluetooth cautions

The operating frequency band of the terminal is

used by industrial, scientific, consumer and

medical equipment including microwave ovens,

premises radio stations for identifying mobile

units used in the manufacturing lines of plants

(radio stations requiring a license), specified low

power radio stations (radio stations requiring no

license) and amateur radio stations (hereinafter

referred to as "another station").

- Before using this equipment, confirm that

"another station" is not being operated nearby.

- In the event of the terminal causing harmful

radio wave interference with "another station",

promptly change the operating frequency or

stop radio wave emission by turning off the

power, etc.

- If you have further questions, contact "General

Inquiries" on the last page of this manual.

■

Wireless LAN (WLAN) precautions

･

Wireless LAN (WLAN) exchanges

information using radio waves, and allows

you to freely establish LAN connection if

you are within an area where radio wave

reaches. On the other side, if you

communicate without appropriate

security settings, communications may

be intercepted or hacked by malicious

parties. It is recommended to make

necessary security settings on your

responsibility and expense.

･

Wireless LAN

Do not use wireless LAN near magnetic devices

such as electrical appliances or AV/OA devices, or

in radio waves.

- Magnetism or radio waves may increase noises

or disable communications (especially when

using a microwave oven).

- When used near TV, radio, etc., reception

interference may occur, or channels on the TV

screen may be disturbed.

- If there are multiple wireless LAN access points

nearby and the same channel is used, search

may not work correctly.

･

2.4 GHz device cautions

The operating frequency band of the WLAN

device is used by industrial, scientific, consumer

and medical equipment including home electric

appliances such as microwave ovens, premises

radio stations for identifying mobile units used in

the manufacturing lines of plants (radio stations

requiring a license), specified low power radio

stations (radio stations requiring no license) and

amateur radio stations (radio stations requiring a

license).

- Before using the device, confirm that premises

radio stations for identifying mobile units,

specified low power radio stations and amateur

radio stations are not being operated nearby.

- If the device causes harmful radio interference

to premises radio stations for identifying

mobile units, immediately change the

frequency band or stop use, and contact

"General Inquiries" on the last page of this

manual for crosstalk avoidance, etc. (e.g.

partition setup).

Contents/Precautions

- If the device causes radio interference to

specified low power radio stations or amateur

radio stations, contact "General Inquiries" on

the last page of this manual.

･

5 GHz device cautions

Outdoor use of 5GHz wireless LAN device

is prohibited by law.

■

FeliCa reader/writer function

precautions

･

FeliCa reader/writer function of the

terminal uses weak waves requiring no

licenses for radio stations.

･

It uses 13.56 MHz frequency band. When

using other reader/writers in your

surroundings, keep the terminal away

sufficiently from them. Before using the

FeliCa reader/writer, confirm that there

are no radio stations using the same

frequency band nearby.

■

Note

･

Do not use altered terminal. Using an

altered device is a violation of the Radio Law.

A "Technical Conformity Mark " affixed on the

manufacturer's specification sticker certifies that

the terminal meets technical regulations for

specified radio equipment that are based on the

Radio Law.

If you remove the screws and alter the inside of

the terminal, the technical regulations

conformity certification becomes invalid.

Do not use the terminal with the certification

invalid, as it is a violation of the Radio Law.

･

Be careful when using the terminal while

driving.

Using a handheld mobile phone while driving

will result in a penalty.

However, absolutely necessary cases such as

rescue of a sick person or maintaining public's

safety are exempted.

･

Use the FeliCa reader/writer function only

in Japan.

FeliCa reader/writer function of the terminal

conforms to Japanese radio standards. If you use

this function overseas, you may be punished.

･

Do not alter the basic software illegally.

It is regarded as the software modification and

Repairs may be refused.

Before Using the Terminal

Front camera lens

Infrared data port

Ear speaker

Notification LED

Proximity sensor : Turns on or off the touch screen

to prevent misoperation during a call.

Light sensor : Used for auto controlling of the screen

brightness.

Touch screen

Camera lens

Photo light

mark

Speaker

Xi/GPS/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna section*

Second microphone : Reduce noise to make easy to

listen.

Back cover

Xi antenna section*

Connector for microUSB cable

Power key/Screen lock key

Volume key/Zoom key

Strap hole

Headset connector

Microphone

* The antenna is built into the main body. Covering around

the antenna with your hand may affect the quality.

❖

Note

･

Do not put stickers etc. on each sensors.

Part names and functions

p q

ab c edf

Before Using the Terminal

The UIM is an IC card recorded user

information such as your phone number etc.

If the UIM is not inserted to the terminal, you

cannot use some functions (phone function,

etc.) of the terminal.

･

In this terminal, the UIM (blue) is not available.

If you have a UIM (blue), bring it to the nearest

docomo Shop to replace.

･

Do not use docomo mini UIM card attaching

with conversion adapter. Doing so may cause

malfunction.

･

When inserting/removing the UIM, make sure

to power off the terminal. Do not connect the

AC Adapter cable.

❖

Information

･

Please be careful not to touch or scratch a metal part

(IC) when you handle the UIM. Doing so may cause

malfunction or damage.

■

Security codes of the UIM

The UIM has a Security code, namely PIN. It

is set "0000" at the subscription. They can be

changed by yourself. (P.127)

Open the UIM card slot cover, hook

your fingernail by the projection

part ( ) on the edge of the tray to

pull the tray straight out, and then

insert it straight along with the

tray with metal part (IC) of the UIM

down.

･

Check the orientation of UIM corner

cut.

Push the tray straight to the end,

close the UIM card slot cover, and

then confirm there is no gap

between the body and cover ( ).

UIM

Inserting UIM

Corner cut

Tray

miniUIM

Before Using the Terminal

Open the UIM card slot cover, hook

your fingernail by the projection

part on the edge of the tray to pull

the tray straight out, and then

remove the UIM.

Push the tray straight to the end,

close the UIM card slot cover, and

then confirm there is no gap

between the body and cover.

You can use microSD card for any other

compatible devices.

･

The terminal supports microSD card of up to

2GB, and microSDHC card of up to 32GB (As of

February, 2012).

･

For compatible microSD cards, contact

manufacturers of microSD cards.

Open the microSD card slot cover,

check the orientation of microSD

card to insert it slowly straight into

the terminal until it clicks.

･

Insert the microSD card with metal

contacts side up.

･

" Preparing SD card" appears on the

status bar to notify that reading or

writing from/onto microSD card

becomes enabled.

Removing UIM

microSD card

Inserting microSD card

Before Using the Terminal

Close the microSD card slot cover

and confirm there is no gap

between the body and cover ( ).

Make sure to unmount (disable reading and

writing) microSD card before removing.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap

[Settings]

[Storage]

[Unmount

SD card].

･

When unmounting microSD card, "

SD card safe to remove" appears in the

status bar to notify that reading or

writing from/onto microSD card

becomes disabled.

Open the microSD card slot cover

and insert the microSD card

straight into the slot all the way

until it clicks.

Pull out microSD card slowly.

･

" Removed SD card" appears on the

status bar to notify that microSD card is

removed.

Removing microSD card

Before Using the Terminal

Close the microSD card slot cover

and confirm there is no gap

between the body and cover.

❖

Information

･

If you remove the microSD card without

unmounting, " SD card unexpectedly removed"

appears in the status bar and files may be damaged

or data may be lost.

The battery pack is not full charged when you

purchased the terminal.

Charging time is an estimate of the time

required to charge a completely empty

internal battery. Charging under low

temperature requires longer time.

The following time varies by the internal

battery condition or operating environment.

For details, see (P.256).

･

The internal battery is a consumable

accessory. The usage duration of the battery

per one charge decreases gradually each time

the battery is recharged.

･

When the usage duration per one charge

becomes about half of a new battery pack,

the life of the internal battery is assumed to be

almost over. It is recommended that you

replace the battery pack ahead of time.

Charging

Charging time

AC Adapter Cable SO03

(supplied accessory)

Approx. 190 min.

DC adapter 03 (Optional) Approx. 190 min.

Operation time on full charge

(estimate)

Continuous

stand-by time

FOMA/3G Approx. 410 hours

(stationary)

GSM Approx. 290 hours

(stationary)

Continuous

call time

FOMA/3G Approx. 430 min.

GSM Approx. 400 min.

Internal battery life

Before Using the Terminal

･

The supplied AC adapter's power plug is

compatible with AC 100 V to 240 V. For using

the terminal overseas, a plug adapter that fits

the electrical outlets in the country you stay is

needed. Do not use an electrical transformer

for overseas use to charge the terminal.

･

Use the supplied AC Adapter cable for

charging.

･

When charging starts, the notification LED

turns on in red/orange/green. Green means

the remaining battery level reaches 90% or

more. To check the battery level, tap

from the Home screen, then tap

[Settings]

[About phone]

[Status] and

check "Battery level". When charging is

completed, "100%" is displayed in the battery

level.

･

When you start charging the battery with the

terminal powered off, the power turns on.

However, you cannot operate the terminal.

Do not charge the battery in a place where

the use is prohibited such as in airplane or

hospital.

Do not charge the battery pack for a

long time (several days)

･

If you remain charging the terminal for a long

time, the power supply starts from the

internal battery after completion of charging.

The usage time duration may be short. In that

case, please charge it again correctly. For

recharging, remove the terminal from the AC

Adapter cable and reconnect it again.

For charging, attach the backside cover to the

terminal. For the backside cover, see "Part

names and functions" (P.29).

Insert the supplied microUSB

cable with the microUSB plug

engraved side facing up into the

connecting jack of the supplied

desktop holder ( ).

Insert the microUSB cable

horizontally with the USB plug

engraved side facing up into the

USB connecting jack of the

supplied AC Adapter, and insert

the AC Adapter plug to the power

outlet.

Charging

Charging with the desktop

holder

Before Using the Terminal

Insert the terminal to the desktop

holder.

After charging is finished, remove

the terminal from the desktop

holder, and then remove the AC

adapter from the power outlet.

❖

Note

･

The battery cannot be charged by connecting the

desktop holder and a PC.

･

If the microUSB cable is connected into the

connecting jack of the desktop holder for charging

using the desktop holder, the terminal is

automatically powered on although the operations

are not available. Be careful not to connect the

microUSB cable in a place where the use is

prohibited such as in airplane or hospital.

･

Check the connecting direction to connect correctly.

Wrong connection may cause damage.

Before Using the Terminal

Open the microUSB connecting

jack cover, and insert the

microUSB cable horizontally with

the microUSB plug engraved

side facing down into the

microUSB connecting jack of the

terminal.

Insert the microUSB cable

horizontally with the USB plug

engraved side facing up into the

USB connecting jack of the

supplied AC Adapter, and insert

the AC Adapter plug to the power

outlet.

When the charging is completed,

remove the microUSB plug of the

microUSB cable from the terminal.

Remove the AC Adapter from the

power outlet.

❖

Note

･

If the microUSB cable is connected into the USB

connecting jack for charging etc., the terminal is

automatically powered on although the operations

are not available. Be careful not to connect the

microUSB cable in a place where the use is

prohibited such as in airplane or hospital.

Open the microUSB connecting

jack cover, and insert the

microUSB cable horizontally with

the microUSB plug engraved

side facing down into the

microUSB connecting jack of the

terminal.

Insert the USB plug of the

microUSB cable horizontally into

the USB port of a PC.

･

When "PC Companion software" screen

appears on the terminal, tap [Skip].

･

When a screen for new hardware

detection etc. appears on the PC, select

[Cancel].

When the charging is completed,

remove the microUSB plug of the

microUSB cable from the terminal.

Remove the USB plug of the

microUSB cable from the USB port

of the PC.

❖

Note

･

If the microUSB cable is connected into the USB

connecting jack for charging etc., the terminal is

automatically powered on although the operations

are not available. Be careful not to connect the

microUSB cable in a place where the use is

prohibited such as in airplane or hospital.

Charging with AC adapter Charging with a PC

Before Using the Terminal

･

Check the connecting direction to connect correctly.

Wrong connection may cause damage.

Press and hold

for over a

second.

･

The key unlock screen appears.

Deactivate the key lock.

･

For deactivating the key lock, see

"Unlocking the keys" (P.39).

❖

Information

･

The first time you turn on, "Setup guide" (P.39)

appears.

･

If you activate the screen lock (P.127) or SIM card lock

(P.126), a canceling the screen lock/PIN code entry

screen appears when turning power on and

canceling the key lock. For canceling the screen lock,

see "Unlocking the screen" (P.128), and for canceling

SIM card lock, see "Entering the PIN code when

powered on" (P.126).

Turning power on/off

Turning power on

Before Using the Terminal

Press and hold

for over a

second.

･

Phone options menu appears.

Tap [Power off ].

Tap [OK].

You can force the terminal quit if the screen

does not respond or the power cannot be

turned off.

Press and hold

and upper of

at the same time for

approximately 10 seconds.

Lift up your finger after the

terminal vibrates 3 times.

･

The terminal is forced quit and the

power turns off.

❖

Information

･

To restart the terminal, press

and upper of

at the same time for approximately 5

seconds, and release your fingers after the terminal

vibrates once.

When the key lock is set, the screen light

turns off. You can avoid the touch screen or

button from false operations.

･

The terminal keys are locked with turning the

screen light off after the specified time

duration.

Press

❖

Information

･

For details on settings for turning the backlight off

and the duration of time before the key lock

activation, see "Adjusting the idle time before the

screen turns off" (P.123).

･

There is no function to deactivate the key lock.

･

You can check the notifications or activate

application even if you do not unlock the keys. For

details, refer to "Setting information displayed on the

key unlock screen" (P.123).

･

If you set the screen lock, entering the pattern, PIN or

password is needed when the key lock is canceled.

For setting the screen lock, see "Screen lock" (P.127).

Turning power off

Performing force-quit Setting key lock

Before Using the Terminal

A key unlocking screen appears when

turning the power on or the backlight on by

pressing

Touch and drag to until

it laps over.

❖

Information

･

appears on the right until you touch . Touch

and drag left to switch the manner mode on

and off without unlocking the keys or screen lock.

When you turn on the terminal for the first

time, Setup guide appears to set up the

display language, wireless network, online

services, etc. and to import contacts.

❖

Information

･

You can set or change the items later as required.

To change the settings later, from the Home screen,

tap , then tap [Settings] or [Setup guide] to set up

from the menu.

Press and hold

for over a

second.

･

A screen for selecting language

appears.

Tap [English (United

States)]

[Done].

･

"Welcome!" screen appears and you

can learn how to use the function and

make initial settings.

Tap .

･

The Internet connection screen

appears. Tap [Mobile network and Wi-

Fi] or [Wi-Fi only] to select.

Unlocking the keys

Key lock

Initial settings (Setup

guide)

Before Using the Terminal

Tap .

･

The wireless network screen appears.

Tap [Search for networks] to add Wi-Fi

network.

Tap .

･

A service screen appears. Make settings

of "Google (P.132)", "Facebook (P.133)",

"Exchange ActiveSync (P.144)".

Tap .

･

Automatic renewal screen appears. Tap

[Synchronize automatically] or [No

thank you] to select.

Tap .

･

The import contacts screen appears.

For information on import contacts, see

"Using PhoneBookCopy" (P.94).

Tap .

･

Preferred applications screen appears.

Tap either [doocmo applications] or

[Xperia

™

applications] to select.

Tap

[Finish].

･

Initial settings (Setup guide) end and an

initial setting screen for docomo service

appears.

Tap .

･

Application batch installation screen

appears. Tap [Install] or [Not install] to

select.

Tap .

･

Osaifu-Keitai screen appears. Tap [Set]

or [Not set] to select. If you select [Set],

the initial setting screen for Osaifu-

Keitai appears. Follow the onscreen

instructions.

Tap .

･

A setting screen for docomo

application password appears. Tap [Set]

and enter a password.

Tap .

･

A setting screen for location provision

appears. Tap any of [Location providing

ON]/[Location providing OFF]/

[Unknown blocking] to select.

Tap

[OK].

･

A home screen appears.

❖

Information

･

Make sure to check if the data connection is available

(3G/GPRS) before setup online services. For checking

the data connection status, see "Status icon" (P.41).

Before Using the Terminal

A status bar appears at the top of the screen.

In the status bar, the terminal status and

notification are displayed. Notification icons

appear on the left side, and the terminal

status icons appear on the right side of the

status bar.

❖

Note

･

If you cancel the "status bar" of applications forcibly

(P.130), operations may not be performed correctly.

The main status icons displayed on the

screen are as follows.

The main notification icons displayed on the

screen are as follows.

Status bar

Status icon

Signal strength

During International roaming

No signal

HSDPA available

Communicating in HSDPA

GPRS available

Communicating in GPRS

3G (packet) available

Communication in 3G (packet)

Status bar

Connecting to Wi-Fi

Connecting to Wi-Fi using AutoIP function

Bluetooth function is ON

Connecting to Bluetooth device

Positioning with GPS

During Data synchronization

Airplane mode activated

Silent mode (vibration) ON

Sound OFF (Ringtone volume 0)

Speakerphone ON

Microphone set to mute

Alarm is set

Battery status

The battery is charging

UIM is locked or not inserted

Notification icon

New email message

New Gmail message

New message (SMS)

Problem with message (SMS) delivery

New instant message

New Area Mail

New Facebook message

Uploading data to Facebook

Uploading data to Facebook completed

Before Using the Terminal

Notification icons are displayed in the

Notification panel. You can open

notifications, such as messages, remainders,

or event notifications directly from the

Notification panel.

Facebook setting request notification

Receiving/Downloading data

Sending/Uploading data

Bluetooth connection request notification

Unmount microSD card to remove (reading/

writing unavailable)

microSD card is removed

Preparing microSD card/internal storage

Installation is completed (when installing

applications from Android Market, etc.)

Update notification (when update of the

installed market application is notified)

Software update notification or updating

software

Osaifu-Keitai lock is activated

Making or receiving a call, during a call

Calling with Bluetooth device

Call on hold

Missed call

New voice mail

Upcoming calendar event

Stopwatch is running

Timer is set

Playing a track

Activating 1Seg

FM radio in use

USB connected

HDMI connected

Available to activate TV launcher

Accessory connected

Communicating via Infrared

Data communication invalid

Wi-Fi open network available

Connecting to a VPN

Not connected to a VPN

Media server executed in Connected Device

Media server connection request notification by

Connected devices

Red: Error messages

Yellow: Warning messages

Problem with sync

Setup guide unchecked

Personal area notification

More (undisplayed) notifications

Setting Wi-Fi tethering

Setting USB tethering

Setting Wi-Fi tethering and USB tethering

Backing up/restoring

AUTO-GPS is set

Green Heart energy saving icon (remove the AC

adapter from the power outlet)

Notification panel

Before Using the Terminal

Drag the status bar downwards.

･

Tap

to close the notification

panel.

On the Notification panel, tap

[Clear].

❖

Information

･

Some notifications cannot be cleared.

Notification LED provides information on the

terminal status, incoming/receiving, etc.

Opening/Closing the

Notification panel

Clearing contents on the

Notification panel

Notication panel

Notification LED

LED status

Status Indication

Red

The battery is charging when the

remaining battery level is 10% or

less.

Flashing red

The remaining battery level is

10% or less.

Green

The battery is charging when the

remaining battery level is 90% or

more.

Flashing green

Received Gmail mails while

backlight is off exist.

Flashing blue

While backlight is off, missed

calls/incoming messages (SMS)/

new email messages are notified.

Orange

The battery is charging when the

remaining battery level is 11% -

89%.

Flashing white

microSD card is mounted/

unmounted.

Before Using the Terminal

* In this manual, each key operation is described with

Precautions on using touch screen

･

Touch screen is designed for being touched

lightly with fingers. Do not push it forcibly

with a finger or press it with sharp objects

(nail, ballpoint pen, pin, etc.).

･

Touching the touch screen may not work in

the following cases. Note that it may cause

malfunction.

- Operation with gloved hands

- Operation with tip of fingernail

- Operation with foreign object on the screen

- Operation with protective sheet or seal on

the screen

Operations on the touch screen

■

Tap

Touch an item such as icon or menu with

your finger lightly and release it.

･

Double-tap means tapping twice quickly.

■

Touch

Touch and hold an icon or menu item long.

■

Drag

Touch the screen, drag to the desired

position and release the finger.

Basic operations

Basic key operation

Back

･

Go back to the previous screen. Or

close a dialog box, Option menu,

or the Notifications panel.

･

Close the software keyboard.

Home

･

Go to the Home screen.

･

Touch and hold down to open a list

of recently used applications.

･

Open a list of options available in

the Home screen or application.

･

Touching and holding down when

entering characters switches

display/not display the software

keyboard.

Using the touch screen

Before Using the Terminal

■

Flick

Stroke the screen with your finger lightly

and flick up/down/left/right. Flick operation

is used to switch or scroll the screen.

■

Pinch

Touch the screen with two fingers and

widen (pinch-out) or narrow (pinch-in) the

fingers' distance. On some screens, pinch-

out to zoom in and pinch-in to zoom out.

❖

Information

･

You can zoom in or out also by double-tapping or by

tapping the zoom control icons ( / ).

The zoom control icons may appear when you drag

in any direction on the screen.

Tap the right end of the screen to display

index characters with which you can search

by Japanese syllabary and alphabetic order.

･

Tap the index character to move on the list.

Selecting items quickly from a

list

Before Using the Terminal

You can switch on/off of the option settings

by marking or unmarking the checkboxes or

radio buttons.

･

To switch on/off of the option setting, tap the

checkbox or radio button.

■

Checkboxes

■

Radio button

Enter a word in the search box to browse the

information in the terminal or on the

Internet.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Google Search].

･

For the first time to join Latitude, a

message confirming whether to agree

to Google's privacy policy appears.

Select [Agree] or [Disagree].

･

The software keyboard appears.

Enter a search word.

･

Search suggestions appear as you enter

a character.

･

For character entry, see "Character

entry" (P.47).

･

To enter a new search word, tap .

Tap a search item or .

❖

Information

･

Tap on the right of the search box to input a

search word by voice to browse the Internet.

Marking or unmarking option

checkbox

Mark

Unmark

Mark

Unmark

Searching information in

the terminal and web

pages

Before Using the Terminal

You can set search engines to use for Quick

search box or set search objectives in the

terminal.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Google Search].

Tap

and then [Search

settings].

･

A search settings screen appears. You

can set the following items.

To enter characters, use the software

keyboard which appears when you tap the

character input box in a message,

phonebook, etc.

❖

Information

･

To return to the previous screen from the character

entry screen, tap

In this terminal, you can select Input method

(keyboard type) from "Xperia

™

Chinese

keyboard", "Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard" or

"Xperia

™

keyboard".

On a character entry screen, touch

and hold the text box.

Tap [Input method]

[Xperia

™

Chinese keyboard]/[Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard]/[Xperia

™

keyboard].

Search settings

Google

Set whether to display search options

when a search word is entered, or

whether to reflect the previous search

result in the search options. You can also

open the web search log settings page

by Browser.

･

You need to create your Google

account.

Searchable

items

Change the search range by marking/

unmarking data categories (Web, Apps,

Contacts, Email, Messaging, Music player,

OfficeSuite, Phonebook, Voice Search) in

the terminal.

Clear

shortcuts

Set not to display recently selected

search results.

Character entry

Selecting input method

Xperia

™

Chinese

keyboard

Select to enter Chinese.

Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard

Select to enter Japanese.

Xperia

™

keyboard

Select a language for text entry.

Select to enter language other

than Japanese.

Before Using the Terminal

❖

Information

･

You can change Input method (keyboard type)

during character entry.

For Japanese keyboard, there are 4 types of

software keyboards: phonepad, QWERTY,

Japanese syllabary and handwritten input.

❖

Information

･

The key display of software keyboard varies

depending on the entry screen, character mode or

settings.

■

Phonepad keyboard

Japanese characters can be entered in

"Kana input" mode.

■

QWERTY keyboard

Japanese characters can be entered in

"Romaji input" mode.

■

Japanese syllabary keyboard

You can use the software keys arranged

according to the Japanese syllabary to enter

Japanese characters in "Kana input" mode.

Software keyboard

Portrait

Landscape

Portrait

Landscape

Before Using the Terminal

■

Handwritten input

Japanese characters can be entered in

"Handwritten input" mode.

On a character entry screen, touch

and hold .

Tap / / / / / /

/ .

･

: The phonepad keyboard appears.

･

: The QWERTY keyboard appears.

･

: The Japanese syllabary keyboard

appears.

･

: The handwritten input appears.

･

Tap to display Japanese keyboard

settings screen and you can check/

change the settings.

･

Tap to display plug-in applications

list. Tap [Contact Picker 2.3] to quote

contacts to enter.

･

: Switch one-byte/two-byte

character.

･

: Hide the software keyboard.

❖

Information

･

The phonepad keyboard is set by default. Also, "Auto

capitalization", "Word suggestions", "Error correction"

and "Pop-up on key press" are set to on.

You can use the software keys arranged

according to the Japanese syllabary to enter

Japanese characters in "Kana input" mode.

The main functions of the touch-keys

･

To change character modes and other

entering operations, tap the following icons

on the phonepad keyboard.

Switching the keyboard

Portrait

Landscape

Entering characters on the

phonepad keyboard

Icon Function

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji"

→

"Alphanumeric" in order and a status

icon,

→

/ / appears in the

status bar.

Before Using the Terminal

*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the

desired position on the entered character string to

move the cursor.

Touch and

hold

Display a pop-up window.

/ / / : Keyboard switch

(two-byte)/ (one-byte) :

Character mode switch

: Display the setting screen for

Japanese keyboard

: Display plug-in applications list

: Hide the software keyboard

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"

→

"Number" in order and a status icon,

/ , etc.

→

/ appears in the

status bar.

Touch and

hold

Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list

to enter them. Switch tabs to display

smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram

tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed

when entering in sp-mode mail.)

Displayed before fixing character. Display

word predictions or alphanumeric

conversion candidates assigned to

tapped key.

Appears after conversion is fixed to

return to text before conversion.

Move the cursor

: To the left.

Touch and hold to move continuously.

Or change the range for conversion.

Move the cursor

: To the right.

Touch and hold to move continuously.

Or change the range for conversion.

When there is an unfixed character string

with the cursor at the right end, tap to

enter the same character as the one at

the end.

Icon Function

Fix entered or converted characters.

When characters are already fixed, enter

a line feed at the cursor position.

Delete the character before the cursor.

Touch and hold to delete continuously.

When any character is entered or after

entered character is fixed, a space can be

entered. Touch and hold to input spaces

continuously.

Enter characters by voice. A candidate

list appears. Tap the character string you

want to enter.

Display the previous character (opposite

order).

In Hiragana/Kanji input mode,

conversion candidates can be displayed

to enter.

Touch and

hold

Activate online dictionary.

You need to mark "Online dictionary"

checkbox in the Japanese keyboard

setting screen.

Appears when entering number. One-

byte/two-byte symbol list can be

displayed to enter them. Switch tabs to

display smiley list to enter them. (a

pictogram tab and deco-mail tab are

also displayed when entering in sp-

mode mail.)

Icon Function

Before Using the Terminal

*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "

確定

(Fix)" is

displayed. In some screens such as the search box

or mail account registration screen, "

(Next)", "

完

了

(Done)", "

実行

(Go)", etc. appear.

Settings of key entry

■

Flick input

Flick up/down/left/right to enter characters

in each column of kana syllabary.

･

Ex: Entering characters in "

な

" column

You can enter "

な

" only by tapping. Flick

left for "

に

", up for "

ぬ

", right for "

ね

" and

down for "

の

･

To switch upper/lower case or change to

voiced sound, flick or tap .

･

Flick input is available by default. You can

cancel by the following operation

beforehand.

From the Home screen, tap

and

tap [Settings].

Tap [Language & keyboard]

→

[Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard]

→

[On-

screen keyboard settings].

Unmark [Flick input] checkbox.

･

To change sensitivity of the flick input, on

the Japanese keyboard setting screen, tap

[On-screen keyboard settings]

[Select

sensitivity], then select "High"/"Medium

(default)"/"Low".

■

Toggle entry

Tap the same key continuously to enter the

assigned character.

To enter characters assigned to the same

key continuously, operate the followings.

･

Ex: To enter "

あお

Tap "

あ

" once.

Tap , and tap "

あ

" 5 times.

･

Ex: To enter "ca"

Tap "abc" 3 times.

Tap

Tap "abc" once.

※

In some applications, tap in Step

ぬ

ねに

の

な

Flick left

Flick up Tap

Flick right

Flick down

Before Using the Terminal

❖

Information

･

When a certain time is passed after the key tapped,

the tapped key's highlighter goes off and you can

enter a character assigned to the same key

consecutively without tapping .

･

To switch upper/lower case or change to

voiced/semi-voiced sound, tap .

･

Multitap text input is available by default.

You can cancel by the following

operation beforehand.

From the Home screen, tap

and

tap [Settings].

Tap [Language & keyboard]

→

[Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard]

→

[On-

screen keyboard settings].

Unmark [Multitap text input]

checkbox.

Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Japanese

characters in "Romaji input" mode.

The main functions of the touch-keys

･

To change character modes and other input

operations, tap the following icons on the

QWERTY keyboard.

Entering characters on the

QWERTY keyboard

Icon Function

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji"

→

"Alphanumeric" in order and a status

icon,

→

/ / / / /

appears in the status bar.

Touch and

hold

Display a pop-up window.

/ / / : Keyboard switch

(two-byte)/ (one-byte) :

Character mode switch

: Display the setting screen for

Japanese keyboard

: Display plug-in applications list

: Hide the software keyboard

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"

→

"Number/symbol" in order and a status

icon, / , etc.

→

/ appears

in the status bar.

Before Using the Terminal

*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the

desired position on the entered character string to

move the cursor.

*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "

確定

(Fix)" is

displayed. In some screens such as the search box

or mail account registration screen, "

(Next)", "

完

了

(Done)", "

実行

(Go)", etc. appear.

Selecting an assistant keyboard

When you enter in Hiragana/Kanji input

mode using the QWERTY keyboard, you can

change the assistant keyboard to make the

frequent using keys to be displayed widely

for easy tapping.

On a character entry screen, touch

and hold .

Tap .

Touch and

hold

Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list

to enter them. Switch tabs to display

smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram

tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed

when entering in sp-mode mail.)

Move the cursor

: To the left. Touch and

hold to move continuously. Or change

the range for conversion.

Move the cursor

: To the right. Touch

and hold to move continuously. Or

change the range for conversion.

When there is an unfixed character string

with the cursor at the right end, tap to

enter the same character as the one at

the end.

Fix entered or converted characters.

When characters are already fixed, enter

a line feed at the cursor position.

Delete the character before the cursor.

Touch and hold to delete continuously.

When any character is entered or after

entered character is fixed, a space can be

entered. Touch and hold to input spaces

continuously.

Enter characters by voice. A candidate

list appears. Tap the character string you

want to enter.

Appears before conversion is fixed. Tap

to switch conversion methods to "Direct

conversion".

/ /

In alphanumerics input mode, tap to

switch capitalization/upper case/lower

case.

Icon Function

In Hiragana/Kanji input mode,

conversion candidates can be displayed

to enter.

Touch and

hold

Activate online dictionary.

You need to mark "Online dictionary"

checkbox in the Japanese keyboard

setting screen.

Appears when entering number. One-

byte/two-byte symbol list can be

displayed to enter them. Switch tabs to

display smiley list to enter them. (a

pictogram tab and deco-mail tab are

also displayed when entering in sp-

mode mail.)

Icon Function

Before Using the Terminal

Tap [On-screen keyboard

settings]

[Choose key type].

Tap any of [Static key resizing]/

[Key highlight while typing]/

[Dynamic key resizing with

highlight]/[Off].

■

Static key resizing

Widen frequent using key for easy tapping.

■

Key highlight while typing

Widen frequent using key and highlight the

key that is predicted for the next entry.

■

Dynamic key resizing with highlight

Widen the key that is predicted for the next

entry much further and highlight it.

■

Off

Display equally the width of each key.

Changing display keys

･

For Japanese input, you can set not to display

less-frequent-used keys (Q, X, C, etc.) on the

QWERTY keyboard.

On a character entry screen, touch

and hold .

Tap .

Before Using the Terminal

Tap [On-screen keyboard

settings]

[Select display keys].

･

When the assist keyboard (P.53) is set to

"Off", [Select display keys] cannot be

selected and you cannot change a

displaying key.

Unmark the checkbox of the key

you want to hide.

Tap [OK].

Customizing keyboard

･

You can switch the position for symbols of the

keyboard displayed when entering numbers.

On a character entry screen, touch

and hold .

Tap .

Tap [On-screen keyboard

settings]

[Keyboard

customization].

Tap a symbol you want to change

and delete character previously

set, then enter a character to

display.

･

Only one character (two-byte or one-

byte character) can be entered.

Tap [OK]

[OK].

❖

Information

･

To return to the default status, in Step 3, tap

[Reset]

[OK].

Before Using the Terminal

You can use the software keys arranged

according to the Japanese syllabary to enter

Japanese characters in "Kana input" mode.

The main functions of the touch-keys

･

To change character modes and other input

operations, tap the following icons on the

Japanese syllabary keyboard.

Entering characters on the

Japanese syllabary keyboard

Icon Function

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji"

→

"Alphanumeric" in order and a status

icon,

→

/ / / / /

appears in the status bar.

Touch and

hold

Display a pop-up window.

/ / / : Keyboard switch

(two-byte)/ (one-byte) :

Character mode switch

: Display the setting screen for

Japanese keyboard

: Display plug-in applications list

: Hide the software keyboard

Appears in Hiragana/Kanji input mode.

Switch upper/lower case or add voiced

sound/semi-voiced sound.

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"

→

"Number" in order and a status icon,

/ , etc.

→

/ appears in the

status bar.

Touch and

hold

Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list

to enter them. Switch tabs to display

smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram

tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed

when entering in sp-mode mail.)

Move the cursor

: To the left.

Touch and hold to move continuously.

Or change the range for conversion.

Move the cursor

: To the right.

Touch and hold to move continuously.

Or change the range for conversion.

When there is an unfixed character string

with the cursor at the right end, tap to

enter the same character as the one at

the end.

Fix entered or converted characters.

When characters are already fixed, enter

a line feed at the cursor position.

Delete the character before the cursor.

Touch and hold to delete continuously.

When any character is entered or after

entered character is fixed, a space can be

entered. Touch and hold to input spaces

continuously.

Enter characters by voice. A candidate

list appears. Tap the character string you

want to enter.

In alphanumerics input mode, tap to

switch capitalization/upper case/lower

case or switch allocated symbols.

Icon Function

Before Using the Terminal

*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the

desired position on the entered character string to

move the cursor.

*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "

確定

(Fix)" is

displayed. In some screens such as the search box

or mail account registration screen, "

(Next)", "

完

了

(Done)", "

実行

(Go)", etc. appear.

You can use the handwritten input screen to

enter Japanese by "handwriting input".

The main functions of the touch-keys

･

To change character modes and other input

operations, tap the following icons on the

handwritten input.

Appears in landscape view. One-byte/

two-byte symbol list can be displayed to

enter them. Switch tabs to display smiley

list to enter them. (a pictogram tab and

deco-mail tab are also displayed when

entering in sp-mode mail.)

In Hiragana/Kanji input mode,

conversion candidates can be displayed

to enter.

Touch and

hold

Activate online dictionary.

You need to mark "Online dictionary"

checkbox in the Japanese keyboard

setting screen.

Icon Function

Entering characters on the

handwritten input

Icon Function

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji"

→

"Alphanumeric" in order and a status

icon,

→

/ / appears in the

status bar.

Touch and

hold

Display a pop-up window.

/ / / : Keyboard switch

(two-byte)/ (one-byte) :

Character mode switch

: Display the setting screen for

Japanese keyboard

: Display plug-in applications list

: Hide the software keyboard

Appears in Hiragana/Kanji input mode.

Switch upper/lower case or add voiced

sound/semi-voiced sound.

Appears in alphanumerics input mode,

tap to switch upper case and lower case.

Before Using the Terminal

*1 When any characters are entered, just tap the

desired position on the entered character string to

move the cursor.

*2 Before the conversion is fixed, "

確定

(Fix)" is

displayed. In some screens such as the search box

or mail account registration screen, "

(Next)", "

完

了

(Done)", "

実行

(Go)", etc. appear.

Each time you tap, the character mode

switches "Hiragana/Kanji/alphabets"

→

"Number" in order and a status icon,

/ , etc.

→

/ appears in the

status bar.

Touch and

hold

Display a one-byte/two-byte symbol list

to enter them. Switch tabs to display

smiley list to enter them. (a pictogram

tab and deco-mail tab are also displayed

when entering in sp-mode mail.)

Displayed before fixing character. Display

word predictions or alphanumeric

conversion candidates assigned to

entered letter.

Appears after conversion is fixed to

return to text before conversion.

Move the cursor

: To the left.

Touch and hold to move continuously.

Or change the range for conversion.

Move the cursor

: To the right.

Touch and hold to move continuously.

Or change the range for conversion.

When there is an unfixed character string

with the cursor at the right end, tap to

enter the same character as the one at

the end.

Fix entered or converted characters.

When characters are already fixed, enter

a line feed at the cursor position.

Delete the character before the cursor.

Touch and hold to delete continuously.

Icon Function

When any character is entered or after

entered character is fixed, a space can be

entered. Touch and hold to input spaces

continuously.

Enter characters by voice. A candidate

list appears. Tap the character string you

want to enter.

Touch and

hold

Handwritten input guide in the POBox

Touch User Guide (Japanese) activates

and you can view the detailed

explanations on the handwritten input.

In Hiragana/Kanji input mode,

conversion candidates can be displayed

to enter.

Touch and

hold

Activate online dictionary.

You need to mark "Online dictionary"

checkbox in the Japanese keyboard

setting screen.

Appears when entering number. One-

byte/two-byte symbol list can be

displayed to enter them. Switch tabs to

display smiley list to enter them. (a

pictogram tab and deco-mail tab are

also displayed when entering in sp-

mode mail.)

Icon Function

Before Using the Terminal

❖

Information

･

When you enter character by handwritten input for

the first time, a screen indicating how to input

appears. Tap [OK] or

･

In handwritten input, hiragana, alphabet, number,

some symbols can be entered.

･

You can enter a character continuously without

deleting entered character.

･

For voiced sound and semi voiced sound mark, enter

in the right upper part of the handwritten input

screen.

･

For punctuation mark and lower case, enter in the

lower part from the center of the handwritten input.

･

For entering alphabet, enter it with reference to

lower horizontal line of the handwritten input screen.

While entering characters, touch and hold

the text box to display the "Edit text" menu

and edit entered text.

Editing text

Select word

Drag the slider to select a part of

entered text.

Select all

Select all entered text.

Input method

P. 4 7

Add "xx" to

dictionary

Add the entered text to the User

dictionary.

Cut

Display when [Select word]/[Select

all] is selected. Cut the text selected

by [Select word]/[Select all].

Copy

Display when [Select word]/[Select

all] is selected. Copy the text selected

by [Select word]/[Select all].

Paste

Display when [Cut]/[Copy] is

selected. Paste the cut/copied text by

[Cut]/[Copy].

Before Using the Terminal

For each type of keyboard, you can make

settings related to character entry.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

keyboard]/[Xperia

™

Chinese keyboard]/[Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard].

･

The settings screen for each keyboard

appears. Tap an item displayed on the

screen to set.

❖

Information

･

The items vary depending on the keyboard type.

Make keyboard settings such as Key sound,

Vibrate, etc.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard]

[Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard].

･

The setting screen for Japanese

keyboard appears.

Tap [On-screen keyboard settings].

･

Tap (mark/unmark) an item in

"Common on-screen keyboard

settings" to set.

Setting character entry Setting Japanese keyboard

Common settings of software

keyboard

Key sound

Set whether to sound at the time of key

tapping.

Vibrate

Set whether to vibrate at the time of key

tapping.

Pop-up on

key press

Set to popup the key you have tapped at

the time of key tapping.

Keep

keyboard

type

Set to stabilize the last status of

keyboard (phonepad/QWERTY/

Japanese syllabary keyboard/

handwritten input) in the each portrait/

landscape screen by kana/alphabet/

number input mode.

Before Using the Terminal

Auto capitalization

Set to capitalize automatically the top letter

you enter in English input mode.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard]

[Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard].

Mark [Auto capitalization].

You can change keyboard skin.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard]

[Select keyboard skin].

Select from displayed keyboards

and tap [Set skin].

❖

Information

･

To download and add keyboard skins from a website,

tap [Search for skin] in Step 3. Some keyboard skins

downloaded from website may not support the

terminal. To delete the downloaded keyboard skin,

from the Home screen, tap

, and tap

[Settings]

[Applications]

[Manage applications],

and tap the keyboard skin you want to delete in the

"Downloaded" tab, and then tap

[Uninstall]

[OK]

[OK].

The Word suggestion function shows

predicted conversion candidates when you

enter Japanese/English characters. Mark the

checkbox of Word suggestion checkbox to

set options "Error correction" and "Auto

space". These options help you entering

characters with ease.

Setting Word suggestion

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard].

Mark [Word suggestions]

checkbox.

❖

Information

･

Flick or drag downward in the word suggestion field

to enlarge suggestion field in which you can see

more word suggestions and to hide the keyboard.

Tap [

前候補

(previous suggestion)]/[

次候補

(next

suggestion)]/[

確定

(fix)] shown at the bottom of the

word suggestions screen to select/fix characters to

be entered. To show the software keyboard, tap [

戻る

(Back)] or

Keyboard skin settings

Word suggestion settings

Before Using the Terminal

Setting Error correction

･

Error correction corrects mistyped characters

and shows conversion candidates before

conversion in one-byte alphabet input mode

when entering characters with QWERTY

keyboard.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard].

Mark [Error correction] checkbox.

Setting Auto space

･

When selecting English word suggestion,

Auto space enters next to the entered

character. However, space is not entered

automatically in the mail address or URL input

fields.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard].

Mark [Auto space] checkbox.

To display the word as the preferred

candidate when entering characters, set the

user dictionary beforehand.

Registering words in user dictionaries

There are 2 types of user dictionaries: "My

words Japanese" and "My words English".

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard].

Tap [My words Japanese]/[My

words English].

Tap

and [Add].

Tap the character input box for

"Reading" and fill it out, then tap

[

(Next)].

Enter a word in the input box for

"Word" and tap [

完了

(Done)].

Tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

Up to 50 characters (regardless of one-byte or two-

byte characters) can be stored for a "Reading" and

"Word", and up to 500 items can be stored in the user

dictionary.

User dictionary settings

Before Using the Terminal

･

When entering characters, tapping [

直変

(Direct

conversion)] in the word suggestion field may give

priority to some registered words.

Editing user dictionary

On the user dictionary screen,

select a word you want to edit.

Tap

and [Edit].

Edit the content and tap [Save].

Deleting words from user dictionary

On the user dictionary screen,

select a word you want to delete.

Tap

and tap [Delete]

[OK].

･

To delete all words in the list, tap

[Delete all]

[OK].

Setting Words by learning

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard]

[Learn words].

Mark [Save word while typing].

･

To reset already learned words, tap

[Delete saved words]

[OK].

❖

Information

･

To delete learned words individually, touch and hold

a word you want to delete and tap [

学習データ削除

(Delete learned word)].

Setting online dictionary

When entering characters, touch and hold

to activate online dictionary.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard]

[Online dictionary].

Tap [Online dictionary].

Read the note and tap [Agree].

･

[Online dictionary] is marked.

Backing up and restoring dictionary

User dictionary and Words by learning can be

backed up onto an internal storage and

restored when needed.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard]

[Backup & restore].

Tap [Backup]/[Restore].

Before Using the Terminal

Mark a dictionary you want to

back up or restore from among

[My words Japanese], [My words

English], or [Learn words].

Tap [Go].

･

When backing up, a screen asking

whether to overwrite the user

dictionary on the internal storage

appears. When restoring, a screen

asking whether to overwrite the user

dictionary in the terminal appears.

Tap [OK]

[OK].

･

The data is backed up or restored.

❖

Information

･

If restoring data is failed, user dictionary in the

terminal restores to the default.

･

User dictionary and Words by learning are not

backed up onto microSD card.

When entering characters, touch and hold

and tap to display the plug-in

application list and use desired plug-in

applications.

Using Contact Picker 2.3

If contacts are registered to the Contacts, you

can use "Contact Picker 2.3" to enter contact

information when entering characters.

"Contact Picker 2.3" is a preinstalled plug-in

application.

On a character entry screen, touch

and hold .

Tap .

Tap [Contact Picker 2.3].

On the contacts list screen, tap the

contact to be quoted.

Mark the item you want to enter

and tap [Done].

･

If you want to select/deselect all items,

tap [Mark all]/[Unmark all].

❖

Information

･

On the contacts list screen, tap [History] or [Favorites]

to display specified contacts.

Adding a plug-in application

You can install and add plug-in applications

to use when entering characters.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard]

[Manage extensions].

On the Info screen, tap [OK].

･

The POBox plug-in setting screen

appears.

Using a plug-in application

Before Using the Terminal

Tap [Download new extensions].

Tap an application and follow the

onscreen instructions.

❖

Information

･

Marked plug-in applications in the POBox plug-in

setting screen can be activated in the character entry

screen. Checkboxes for preinstalled plug-in

applications, "Contact Picker 2.3" is marked by

default.

You can view the detailed explanations on

the high performance Japanese keyboard

from the basic to application. The latest

information can be obtained from the

websites for plug-in applications or keyboard

skins.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Language &

keyboard].

Tap [Xperia

™

Japanese

keyboard]

[POBox Touch User

Guide].

❖

Information

･

Touch and hold in the handwritten input to

activate the handwritten input guide in the POBox

Touch User Guide (Japanese) to view the detailed

explanations on the handwritten input.

POBox Touch User Guide

docomo Palette UI

Home screen is a start screen for using

applications. You can personalize the Home

screen by adding or moving, for example,

application shortcuts and widgets, or

changing the wallpaper.

Tapping

displays Home screen which

consists of up to 12 screens you can use

flicking left and right.

Home screen position : Current position in 7 home

screens

Widget : Google Search

Widget : i-Channel

Widget : Machi-chara

Shortcuts (applications)

Applications button

Wallpapers

❖

Information

･

You can switch the home application between

"docomo" and "Xperia

™

" in the terminal.

"docomo" is set to the home application by default.

To switch the home application, from the Home

screen, tap

[Setup guide] and on the Preferred

applications screen, [Change now]

[Home screen],

or from the Home screen, tap

[Settings]

[Xperia

™

]

[Preferred apps

settings]

[Home screen]. To switch applications

(Home, phonebook (contacts), video or music player)

to be used in the terminal all at once, from the Home

screen, tap [Preferred apps settings]

[OK], or from

the Home screen, tap

[Settings]

[Xperia

™

]

[Preferred apps

settings]

[Set all to].

･

When the home application is switched, widgets or

shortcuts on the screen may not be displayed

correctly depending on home screen layout etc.

Switching the Home screen

Flick the Home screen to left or

right.

･

The Home screen switches.

❖

Information

･

You can check the current position of the Home

screen with at the top of the screen.

･

Alternatively, display "Home screens" (P.67) and then

tap any home screen to switch.

Home screen

Learning Home screen

docomo Palette UI

Displaying a list of home screens

From the Home screen, pinch-in.

･

A home screen list appears.

❖

Information

･

At the left end home screen, tap

or from the

Home screen, tap

and tap [Home screens] to

display the list.

･

To return to the home screen, pinch-out, or tap

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Add].

･

"Add to home screen" menu appears to

change the Home screen.

■

Add to home screen

❖

Information

･

"Add to home screen" appears also by touching and

holding anywhere on the Home screen without

icons.

Adding a shortcut to the Home screen

In "Add to home screen" menu, tap

[Shortcut].

Select a shortcut you want to add.

･

The shortcut appears on the Home

screen.

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, you can add from the Home screen,

and touch and hold an icon you want to add, tap

[Add].

Adding to the Home screen

Shortcut

Add shortcuts of applications or

setting screens. (P.67)

Widget

Add widgets. (P.68)

Folder

Create new folder or add folders

related to the Phonebook. (P.69)

Kisekae

Change the background of the

home screen or application screen,

or download from website to add.

(P.69)

Wallpaper

Change the wallpaper or download

from website to add. (P.69)

Group

Add group shortcut of applications

screen. (P.70)

docomo Palette UI

Adding a widget to the Home screen

In "Add to home screen" menu, tap

[Widget].

･

A list of widgets appears.

Select an item.

❖

Information

･

If you install an application with widget from Android

Market, the installed widget is added to the widget

list.

Calendar

Display the calendar.

Contents

Headline

Display the latest contents

information of music, video, e-

book, etc.

docomo

location

information

Display docomo location

information application.

Facebook

View comments of members.

Google Search

Display the Quick search box.

Google+

Display Google+, compose article

to post.

Home screen

tips

Display tips of the Home screen

operation.

Infrared

Display "Send Myself" button and

"Receive file" button for infrared

communication.

チャネルウィ

ジェット

(i-

Channel widget)

Display the latest information such

as news or weather information in

ticker.

Latitude

View locations of members.

Machi-chara

Display reception of mails or calls

information with Machi-chara.

Market

Display recommended

applications of Android Market.

Personal area

Display personal area.

Phonebook

Select members

Display history of calls or message

(SMS) of 3 contacts selected from

the Phonebook fixed/at random.

Schedule &

Memo

Display memos or photo memos

on the calendar.

Traffic

Display necessary time to transfer

from your current location to your

destination and the widget on the

Home screen when you enter a

widget name or destination. Tap to

confirm the provided traffic

condition.

YouTube

Display the list of frequently played

movies and recommended.

ドコモ地図ナビ

ウィジェット

(DOCOMO map

navigation

widget)

Display a map around current

location and neighboring spots

docomo Palette UI

Adding a folder to the Home screen

In "Add to home screen" menu, tap

[Folder].

Select a folder you want to add.

･

The folder appears on the Home

screen.

･

You can rename or add items to a folder

by selecting [New folder] on the folder

selection screen.

■

Renaming

Touch and hold a folder you want to

rename

Tap [Edit name]

Tap the

[Folder name] entry box to enter a folder

name and tap [OK].

■

Adding an item

From the Home screen, touch and hold a

shortcut you want to add to the

folder

Drag it onto a folder and lift up

your finger.

･

A shortcut is moved into a folder.

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, open a folder by tapping and then

touch and hold the title bar to display the [Folder

name] entry box to change.

Changing Kisekae

In "Add to home screen" menu, tap

[Kisekae].

Select Kisekae you want to change

to and tap [Set].

❖

Information

･

You can add Kisekae contents by tapping [Search] to

download from website. To delete added Kisekae

contents, select the image and tap

[Delete]

[Delete].

･

Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap

and

tap [Kisekae/Wallp].

Changing wallpaper

In "Add to home screen" menu, tap

[Wallpaper].

Tap [Gallery]/[Live wallpapers]/

[Wallpaper gallery]/[Xperia

™

wallpapers].

･

When you tap [Xperia

™

wallpapers],

select an image to set to the wallpaper,

tap [Set wallpaper].

･

When you tap [Gallery], select an image

to set to the wallpaper, pinch or the

cropping frame or drag it to area you

want to use as wallpaper, and tap [Save]

to set wallpaper.

docomo Palette UI

･

When you tap [Live wallpapers], select a

content, tap [Set wallpaper]. You can

also download and add Live wallpaper

content from a web page. For some

contents, you can change type or

contents displayed on the wallpaper by

tapping [Settings].

･

When you tap [Wallpaper gallery],

select an image you want to use as

wallpaper, then tap [Set wallpaper].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap

and

tap [Kisekae/Wallp].

Adding a group to the Home screen

In "Add to home screen" menu, tap

[Group].

Select a group of applications you

want to add.

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, on the Applications screen (P.71), touch

and hold the group name and then tap [Add].

You can add, delete, sort home screens while

the home screen list is displayed.

･

For details on the home screen list, see

"Displaying a list of home screens" (P.67).

Adding a home screen

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Home screens].

Tap .

❖

Information

･

There are 7 home screens by default. You can add 5

home screens moreover.

Deleting a home screen

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Home screens].

Touch and hold a home screen you

want to delete and tap [Delete].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, touch and hold a home screen you

want to delete from the home screen list and drag to

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Sorting home screens

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Home screens].

Touch and hold a home screen you

want to sort.

Drag it to the place you want to

move and lift up your finger.

Changing the Home screen

docomo Palette UI

Moving an icon on the Home screen

From the Home screen, touch an

icon you want to move.

Drag it anywhere.

･

To move to another Home screen, keep

touching the icon and drag to left or

right.

Release your finger from the icon.

Deleting an icon from the Home

screen

From the Home screen, touch an

icon you want to delete.

Tap [Delete].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, touch and hold an icon you want to

delete from the Home screen and drag to

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

You can access the applications installed in

the terminal using the Applications screen.

From the Home screen, tap .

･

The Applications screen appears.

Group name

･

To display/hide applications in the group, tap the

group name.

Application icon

･

is displayed for newly arrived application.

･

Some application icons are displayed with a

number of missed calls or unread mails.

Applications in the group

･

To display/hide all applications in the group,

pinch on the Applications screen.

Number of applications in the group

❖

Information

･

To close the Applications screen, tap

･

If you download applications from website, icons

with are added to the Applications screen.

Applications screen

Learning Applications screen

docomo Palette UI

The applications displayed on the Applications screen by default are as follows.

･

For usage of some applications, separate subscription (Charged) is required.

■

DOCOMO Services

■

Basic Functions

Applications

Icon Applications Description Page

dmenu A shortcut application for "dmenu" to find contents that you used

in i-mode and joyful and convenient contents for smartphones

readily.

−

dmarket Activate dmarket. You can buy contents such as music, videos,

books at the dmarket. Applications on the Android market are also

featured.

−

チャネル

(i-Channel) An application for using i-Channel.

−

Machi-chara An application for displaying character on the terminal screen. The

character moves on the widget and informs you i-concier

information, mail reception, incoming calls, etc.

−

docomo backup Back up or restore phonebook data etc.

−

Icon Applications Description Page

Phone Activate DOCOMO phone application to make/receive calls, and

switch between calls.

P. 8 1

Dial Activate Xperia

™

phone application to make/receive calls, and

switch between calls.

−

Phonebook Activate DOCOMO phonebook application to manage phonebooks

of your friends or colleagues.

P. 8 7

Contacts Activate Xperia

™

phonebook application to manage contacts of

your friends or colleagues.

−

PhoneBookCopy An application to move or copy phonebook data using external

memory such as microSD card.

P. 9 4

docomo Palette UI

■

Entertainment

声の宅配便

(Koe-no-

Takuhaibin)

Use "Koe-no-Takuhaibin" easily and conveniently on the

smartphone. You can record and play voice messages with a simple

operation.

P. 1 0 5

モードメール

(sp-

mode mail)

Send/receive mails using docomo mail address (@docomo.ne.jp).

You can use pictogram and Deco-mail. Mails can be received

automatically.

P. 1 4 1

Email Send and receive emails (multiple accounts are also available). P.144

Gmail Send and receive mails from/to a Google account. P.151

Area Mail Receive early warning "Area Mail" and view received Area Mail. P.152

Messaging Send and receive messages (SMS). P.141

Talk Chat with friends using Google Talk instant messaging. P.151

Anshin Scan Protect your terminal from virus damage. Detect virus hidden in

installed applications or microSD card.

−

災害用キット

(Disaster

kit)

An application which helps you to record and check messages on

the docomo Disaster Message Board.

−

Instruction Manual Display the terminal instruction manual. You can start a function

you want to use from the explanation.

P. 2

Setup guide Display Setup guide. P.39

Browser Browse Web and WAP sites (except for WML) and download files. P.153

Google Search Search information in the terminal and web pages from keywords. P.46

Voice Search Use Google search by voice input. P.46

Market Access to the Android Market, download and buy new applications. P.204

APP NAVI Introduce applications for Android terminals. You can search

applications from categories, rankings, etc.

−

Icon Applications Description Page

Book Store MyShelf An application for viewing e-books you purchased on the dmarket

BOOK store.

−

Media Player Play music and videos.

−

Icon Applications Description Page

docomo Palette UI

■

Tools

Videos An application for accessing movie rental service of Android

market. Select a movie you want to watch and rent it.

−

YouTube Playback videos around the world or upload recorded videos. P.198

ガイド番組表

(G-Guide program

table)

View ground-based broadcasting, BS digital broadcasting.

Searching programs by key words or categories,watching 1Seg, and

remote recording 1Seg program from outside are available.

−

1Seg Watch 1Seg program. P.215

Music player Playback music data stored on the internal storage or microSD card. P.200

FM radio Use FM radio. P.222

Connected devices Set and manage media server via Connected devices, and connect

DLNA device to the terminal via Wi-Fi network to share files.

P. 1 7 0

Facebook Activate Facebook client application. P.133

Google+ Activate Social Network Service (SNS) client application "Google+"

provided by Google.

−

Messenger Chat with friends using Google+ instant messaging.

−

Timescape

™

View Social Networking Service (SNS) history. P.205

Gallery View photos and videos you took, and images posted on Picasa or

Facebook.

P. 1 9 3

Icon Applications Description Page

Camera Take photos and record video clips. P.172

Memo Create/Manage memos.

−

Schedule Create/Manage schedule.

−

Calendar Display a calendar and manage schedule. P.227

地図アプリ

(Map

Application)

Functions such as

地図

(Map),

お店や施設検索

(Shop and facility

search),

ナビ

(Navigation),

乗換

(Transfer function),

訪れた街

(Visited

places) support your outing.

−

Maps Use Google map services, such as viewing current location, finding

another location and calculating routes.

P. 2 1 1

Icon Applications Description Page

docomo Palette UI

■

Osaifu/Shopping

■

Settings

Navigation Display Google map navigation to receive detailed guides for your

destination.

P. 2 1 3

Places Use various information registered on Google map, such as shops

around the current location.

P. 2 1 2

Latitude Check and share the location information of specified friends. P.214

Name card creator Create original name card to display in the My profile field of

docomo "Phonebook" application.

−

Infrared An application which allows you to send and receive phonebook

data, etc. via infrared communication.

P. 1 6 3

Calculator Perform basic calculations such as addition, subtraction,

multiplication, and division.

−

Alarm and Clock Display clock or set an alarm, etc. P.229

OfficeSuite View and read Office documents. P.233

Icon Applications Description Page

Osaifu-Keitai Use Osaifu-Keitai. P.223

設定アプリ

(iD

setting application)

Make settings for use of electronic money, iD. P.226

ToruCa Acquire, display, search, or refresh ToruCa. P.226

Icon Applications Description Page

Settings Make the terminal settings. P.107

eco

モード

(eco mode) An application to set "eco mode" for reducing battery consumption

by adjusting each setting such as display brightness.

−

AUTO-GPS Use GPS compatible services which inform you weather

information, location information such as shop locations, tourist

information, etc. according to your location.

−

Icon Applications Description Page

docomo Palette UI

❖

Information

･

Some application names may not be displayed fully.

･

Some application require downloading and installation. If you cannot download application by tapping, from

the Home screen, tap

and [Settings]

[Applications]

[Unknown sources]

[OK], mark the checkbox and

then tap the application.

docomo location

information

Provide location information such as imadoco search,

imadocokantan search, Keitai-Osagashi Service, Emergency

Location Report.

Also access service website to change or make various settings.

−

Update center Update the latest software or application. P.252

Flash Player Settings Change settings for controlling application running method in

Flash Player.

−

Icon Applications Description Page

docomo Palette UI

From the Applications screen, you can add

icons, sort icons, uninstall applications. Also

you can change group setting.

Adding an application icon to the

Home screen

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold an icon you want to

add to the Home screen.

Tap [Add].

･

The application icon is added onto the

Home screen.

❖

Information

･

From the Home screen, tap

and

[Add]

[Shortcut]

Tap [Application] and select an

application to add.

Sorting application icons

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold an application icon

you want to sort.

Drag it to the place you want to

move and lift up your finger.

･

The application icon moves.

❖

Information

･

To move an application icon to another application

group, touch and hold the icon on the Applications

screen, tap [Move], then select a group you want to

move to.

Uninstalling an application

Some application icons can be deleted from

the Applications screen.

･

Before uninstalling application, back up

contents related to the application that you

want to save including data saved in the

application.

･

Some applications cannot be uninstalled.

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold an icon of

application you want to uninstall.

Tap [Uninstall].

･

Uninstall screen appears.

Tap [OK]

[OK].

❖

Information

･

Some applications pre-installed in the terminal may

not be uninstalled.

･

Application icons can be deleted from the managing

applications screen. For details, refer to "Deleting

installed application" (P.131).

Changing the Applications

screen

docomo Palette UI

Adding a shortcut of group to the

Home screen

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold a group you want

to add to the Home screen.

Tap [Add].

･

Shortcuts to the group is added to the

Home screen.

❖

Information

･

From the Home screen, tap

and [Add]

Tap

[Group] and select a group to add.

Changing a label color of the group

name

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold a group you want

to change the color.

Tap [Edit label] and select label

color to change.

･

The color for group name is changed.

Deleting a group

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold a name of a group

you want to delete.

Tap [Delete]

[OK].

･

Application icons belonged to the

deleted group move to the "Download

Application" group.

❖

Information

･

"Recently", "DOCOMO Services", and "Download

Application" groups cannot be deleted.

Changing a group name

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold a group name you

want to rename.

Tap [Edit name].

Enter a group name in the [Group

name] entry box and tap [OK].

･

The group is renamed.

❖

Information

･

"Recently", "DOCOMO Services", and "Download

Application" groups cannot be renamed.

Adding a group

From the Applications screen, tap

and tap [Add group].

Enter a group name in the [Group

name] entry box and tap [OK].

･

A new group is added.

docomo Palette UI

Sorting groups

From the Applications screen,

touch and hold an group name you

want to sort.

Drag it to the place you want to

move and lift up your finger.

･

The group is moved.

You can view and access recently used

applications from this window.

Touch and hold

･

Recently used applications appear on a

list.

Search application installed into the terminal

to activate.

From the Applications screen, tap

and then tap [Search].

･

For the first time to join Latitude, a

message confirming whether to agree

to Google's privacy policy appears.

Select [Agree] or [Disagree].

･

The software keyboard appears.

Tap at the left of the search box

and select [Apps].

Enter application name you want

to search.

･

Search suggestions appear as you enter

a character.

Tap a search item.

･

The application activates.

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap , then

tap [Google Search] to search application. For details,

refer to "Searching information in the terminal and

web pages" (P.46).

Opening the recently used

applications window

Searching applications

docomo Palette UI

Icons on the Applications screen can be

displayed in a list or tiles.

From the Applications screen, tap

and then tap [List format]/

[Tile format].

You can check information on the home

application and make display setting.

Displaying the Home application

information

From the Home screen, tap

and then tap [More].

Tap [Application info].

･

The home application information

appears.

Making display setting for the Home

screen

From the Home screen, tap

and then tap [More].

Tap [Home settings].

･

The "Home settings" screen appears

and the following setting can be made.

Switching application screens

Home application information

Personal area

Set whether to display personal area

on the Home screen.

Wallpaper loop

Set whether to loop wallpaper on

the Home screen.

Sync function

Set whether to automatically refresh

personal area information.

International

roaming

Set whether to automatically refresh

personal area information during

International roaming.

Calling/Network Services

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial].

Enter the number of the recipient

and tap .

･

If a wrong number is entered, tap

to delete the number.

❖

Information

･

To activate Xperia

™

phone application, from the

Home screen, tap , then tap [Dial].

Entering pause (,)

This function allows you to operate voice

mail at home, to reserve tickets, or to check

the balance of a bank account, etc.

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial].

Enter the phone number, then tap

and tap [Add 2–sec pause].

When the terminal is within range of the

service area, you can make an emergency call

of 110 (Police), 119 (Fire and ambulance), or

118 (Japan Coast Guard).

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial].

Enter the number of the

emergency call and tap .

･

If a wrong number is entered, tap

to delete the number.

❖

Note

･

If UIM is not inserted to the terminal, emergency calls

(110, 119, 118) cannot be made in Japan.

･

This terminal supports "Emergency call location

information". If you use the terminal to place a call to

emergency numbers such as 110, 119, or 118, the

information of a location where you are calling from

(location information) is automatically notified to the

Emergency call acceptance organization such as the

Police Station.

The Emergency call acceptance organization may not

be able to figure out your exact location depending

on the location where you place a call or radio wave

condition.

If you make a call hiding your caller ID, such as by

entering a phone number with "184" for each call, the

location information and phone number are not

notified. However, the Emergency call acceptance

organization may decide to obtain the location

information and phone number regardless of your

settings when they consider it is necessary for

lifesaving, etc. Note that the areas/time for which the

"Emergency call location information" is ready to be

used vary depending on the preparatory state of each

Emergency call acceptance organization.

Making/Receiving a call

Making a call

Emergency call

Calling/Network Services

･

When calling 110, 119 or 118 for emergency from the

terminal, tell that you are calling from a mobile

phone, and give your phone number and your

current location precisely for checking callback from

the police/fire department. Also, make a point to call

in a stationary position to prevent the call from being

dropped. Do not power off the terminal for at least

10 minutes after the emergency call just in case the

Police or Fire/Ambulance may have to get in contact

with you.

･

Note that you may not connect to the local Fire

Department or Police Station depending on where

you are calling from. In this case, try to call from a

public phone or an ordinary phone in the

neighborhood.

Making an emergency call while UIM

is locked

Tap [Emergency call].

Enter the emergency number and

tap [Call].

･

If a wrong number is entered, tap

on the right of the phone number field

to delete the number.

❖

Note

･

In Japan, while entering PIN code on the screen

(P.126) or during PUK lock (P.127), the emergency

numbers of 110/119/118 are not available.

Tap [End call].

For details on WORLD CALL, refer to

DOCOMO International Services website.

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial].

Touch and hold [0] key until "+"

sign appears.

･

When making an international call, "+"

is replaced by an international access

code.

Enter Country code

Area code

(City code)

the number of the

recipient and tap .

･

If the area code begins with "0", omit "0".

However, "0" may be required to dial to

some countries or areas such as Italy.

While receiving a call, touch

(left) and drag it to (right).

❖

Information

･

If you are using regular headphones without a

microphone, you need to speak to the microphone

of the terminal.

･

Even during the screen lock or key lock, the icon

appears and you can answer a call by the same

operation.

Ending a call

Making an international call

(WORLD CALL)

Receiving a call

Calling/Network Services

While receiving a call, touch

(right) and drag it to (left).

❖

Information

･

Even during the screen lock or key lock, the icon

appears and you can decline a call by the same

operation.

You can make or answer a call with Stereo

Headset with Microphone (Sample)

connecting to the terminal.

■

Making a call

Make a call with Stereo Headset

with Microphone (Sample)

connected.

･

An operation of making a call is the

same as usual operation. (P.81)

Press the switch to end the call.

■

Receiving a call

While receiving a call, press the

switch of Stereo Headset with

Microphone (Sample).

･

The call is connected.

･

When receiving a call, you can decline

the call by pressing the switch for a

second or more.

To end a call, press the switch

again.

❖

Information

･

Even when you listen to music with Stereo Headset

with Microphone (Sample) connecting to the

terminal, you can answer a call by pressing the

switch. Music pauses on calling. Music restarts when

ending the call automatically depending on the

player application.

･

Connecting and removing Stereo Headset with

Microphone (Sample) repeatedly during a call may

disconnect a call.

Declining a call

Using Stereo Headset with

Microphone

Calling/Network Services

During a call, press

adjust.

❖

Information

･

You can adjust the ear speaker volume only during a

call.

When receiving a call, press

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, press

to mute the ringtone for

incoming call.

･

From the Home screen, press

to mute the

ringtone for an incoming call.

■

Calling screen

Name of the other party

A photo saved in Phonebook

Call duration time

Speaker : Set speakerphone on/off.

･

Other party's voice can be heard from the speaker

and handsfree call can be made.

･

When the speakerphone is on, a speakerphone

icon appears in the status bar.

Phonebook : View phonebook entry list screen.

Number of the other party

Mute : Set muting on/off of the microphone during

a call.

･

When the microphone is muted, a mute icon

appears in the status bar.

Dial key : Enter the phone number you want to add

to make a call.

･

The ongoing call is automatically on hold.

･

To add a call, "Call waiting" subscription is

required. (P.101)

End call

Adjusting the ear speaker

volume

Muting the ringtone for an

incoming call

Operations during a call

Calling/Network Services

❖

Information

･

During a call/on hold, tap

to display "Hold"/

"Retrieve call".

･

To set a call on hold, "Call waiting" subscription is

required. (P.101)

❖

Note

･

Do not bring the terminal close to your ear with the

speakerphone on to avoid from hearing damage.

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Recent calls].

･

The Recent calls screen appears.

On the Recent calls screen, incoming call

history and outgoing call history are

displayed in chronological order.

Incoming history

Call status icons

: Caller ID notified

: Caller ID hidden

･

Notified if calls are made with "186" (Notify)/"184"

(Hide) prefixed to the number.

･

If entering phone number and tap

, then

select [Caller ID notification]

[Notify]/[Not

notify] to make a call, / does not appear in

the call log list.

: Koe-no-Takuhaibin

･

For details on Koe-no-Takuhaibin, refer to "

声の宅

配便

(Koe-no-Takuhaibin)" (P.105) or NTT

DOCOMO website.

: Outgoing international call

: Incoming international call

Phone number/name

Consecutive calls with the same party

･

Tap a history or to display combined history,

tap again to display individually.

Call history

Showing call history

Recent calls screen

Calling/Network Services

･

Number in bracket indicates number of

combined history.

Outgoing history

Outgoing

History icons

: Missed call

: Incoming call

: Outgoing call

Date

❖

Information

･

On the Recent calls screen, tap

and tap [Search

location] to check the current location of the party

using imadocokantan search.

When you have missed calls, appears in

the status bar.

Drag the status bar downwards.

Tap [Missed call].

❖

Information

･

When you have missed calls, a missed call icon

appears on the key lock screen. For details on the

setting to show/hide icons, see "Setting information

displayed on the key unlock screen" (P.123).

On the Recent calls screen (P.85),

tap .

On the Recent calls screen (P.85),

touch and hold a phone number

and then tap [Add to phonebook].

･

You can also select by tapping the

number and then [Add to phonebook]

at the bottom of the screen.

Tap desired phonebook entry, or

tap [Register new].

･

Tap [Register new] to display a screen

for selection of the saving locations

appears. You can select Phone contacts

or docomo as the saving location.

Edit the phonebook entry and tap

[Save].

On the Recent calls screen (P.85),

tap [Incoming history]/[Outgoing

history].

On the incoming history list

screen/outgoing history list

screen, tap

and tap [Delete

all]

[OK].

Displaying missed calls

Making a call from call history

Adding a number from the call

history to Phonebook

Deleting a call history

Calling/Network Services

❖

Information

･

On the Recent calls screen, touch and hold a log you

want to delete, tap [Remove from call log]

[OK] to

delete an item.

In the Phonebook, you can enter various

information for contacts, for example, phone

numbers, mail addresses and web service

accounts. You can display phonebook entry

to get quick access to that contact.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Phonebook].

･

The phonebook list screen appears.

･

Alternatively, from the Home screen,

tap [Phone] and tap [Phonebook] tab to

display phonebook list screen.

❖

Information

･

To activate Xperia

™

phone application, from the

Home screen, tap , then tap [Contacts].

On the phonebok list screen, you can view

details of your contacts. You can add a

picture to a phonebook entry, and display

phonebook entries by group.

Phonebook tab

Entry items

･

Icons indicate entry items.

Name registered in the phonebook entry

Photo set in the phonebook entry

Group

･

Select a group to be displayed.

Communication tab

･

History of communication exchanged by calls

and mails is shown.

My profile tab

Index character area

･

Tap the right end of the phonebook list screen to

display index character with which you can

search a name in Japanese syllabary and

alphabetic order.

Phonebook

Opening Phonebook

Phonebook list screen

Calling/Network Services

Adding a new phonebook entry

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap [Register].

Tap [Phone contacts]/[docomo].

･

When you set Google account etc., set

account appears as a saving location.

Enter a name.

Select or enter desired additional

information for the contact.

･

You can add items besides ringtone,

phone number and mail address by

tapping in "Others", then tap [Add]

to add items.

Tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

When you save "Phonetic name (family/given)",

phonebook list is displayed according to Japanese

syllabary order or alphabets order of "Phonetic

name".

Using shortcuts of Phonebook

When you tap the photo (image) part on the

phonebook list screen, shortcuts for phone,

mail, etc. appear. Tap the shortcut to make a

call, or create and send a mail.

* You can also use the registered addresses, etc.

❖

Information

･

When you tap a part other than photo (image) on

the phonebook list screen, profile screen of the

phonebook appears instead of shortcuts.

･

Email shortcut appears when email address is saved

in the selected phonebook entry and you have set

your email account. If you have not set your email

account, shortcut for Gmail ( ) appears.

･

For a phonebook entry with only name, tapping

photo (image) does not display the shortcut.

Searching for a phonebook entry

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap [Search].

Enter name or reading you want to

search in the search field.

･

All phonebook entries beginning with

those letters appear.

Managing phonebook

Make a call to saved phone number.

Create and send message (SMS).

Select Email application to create and send an

email.

･

If [Use by default for this action.] checkbox is

marked, application selection screen will not

appear for the next time.

Calling/Network Services

Changing display conditions for

phonebook entries

You can set registered phonebook entries to

be displayed in the phonebook list.

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap

, then tap

[Others]

[Display settings].

■

Setting display condition

Mark [Only contacts with phones].

･

Only phonebook entries with phone

numbers registered are displayed.

■

Setting show/hide

Tap a Social Networking Service (SNS)

name which is made phonebook entry

saving location setting or account setting

(P.133)

Mark/Unmark [Other

phonebook], [All phonebook].

･

Mark to display synchronized

phonebook entries, or unmark not to

display them.

Tap [Done].

Editing a phonebook entry

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap a phonebook entry to

edit.

･

The profile screen of the phonebook

appears.

Tap [Edit].

･

By tapping [Add] on the profile editing

screen, you can add information to

enter.

Edit the desired information and

tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, touch and hold a phonebook entry in

the phonebook list and tap [Edit] to display profile

editing screen.

Combining phonebook entries

You can bind multiple phonebook entries

together into one.

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap a phonebook entry to

combine.

･

The profile screen of the phonebook

appears.

Tap

and [Join/Separate].

･

Phonebook entries to be combined are

displayed.

Tap the phonebook entry to

combine.

❖

Information

･

To cancel binding, on the profile screen of the

phonebook, tap

, then tap [Join/

Separate]

[Separate].

Calling/Network Services

Deleting a phonebook entry

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap

, then tap [Delete].

Mark the phonebook entry you

want to delete.

･

If you want to delete all phonebook

entries, tap [Select all].

Tap [Delete]

[OK].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, on the phonebook list screen, touch

and hold a phonebook entry you want to delete, tap

[Delete]

[OK] to delete.

Making a call using the phonebook

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap a phonebook entry to

call.

･

The profile screen of the phonebook

appears.

Tap a desired phone number.

Tap [Call].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, touch and hold a phonebook entry in

the phonebook list and tap [Phone] to make a call.

Checking My profile and editing

information

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap [My profile].

Tap [Edit].

･

Profile editing screen appears.

Enter the new information or make

the changes you want.

･

By tapping [Add] on the profile editing

screen, you can add information to

enter.

･

Tap in "Others", then tap [Add] to

add information.

When you are done, tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

You can register multiple phone numbers, mail

addresses, etc. in "My profile". Registered phone

number and logs of calls and mails between you and

registered phone numbers can be displayed in the

"Communication" tab.

Calling/Network Services

Sending phonebook via infrared

communication/Bluetooth/Email/

Gmail

Registered phonebook and My profile

information can be sent using infrared

communication (P.163), Bluetooth function

(P.166), or email attachment function.

■

Sending phonebook

Tap a phonebook entry you want

to send on the phonebook list

screen (P.87).

･

The profile screen of the phonebook

appears.

Tap

and [Share].

Select sending method and follow

the onscreen instructions.

■

Sending My profile

Tap [My profile] on the phonebook

list screen (P.87).

Tap

and [Share].

Select sending method and follow

the onscreen instructions.

❖

Information

･

If you use Bluetooth function, tap [Turn on] to turn

on the Bluetooth function, search receiver's

Bluetooth device and send.

･

If you want to send data as files attached to email/

Gmail, send from the compose screen for the mail

service in which you have set an account. When you

have not set a Gmail account, setup wizard appears.

You can create and send email after settings are

done.

･

Messaging is not available.

･

You cannot send some information such as name

card data set in phonebook.

･

For sending all phonebook entries, see "Sharing

phonebook entry currently displayed" (P.94).

Registering a phonebook entry to

Favorites

You can mark a phonebook entry as a

favorite. The favorite list provides quick

access to the phonebook entry you have

marked.

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap a phonebook entry you

want to mark.

･

The profile screen of the phonebook

appears.

Tap .

❖

Information

･

Only phonebook entries saved to the docomo

account can be added to Favorites.

･

To display phonebook entries added to Favorites, tap

[Groups] on the phonebook list screen

[Favorites]

or from the Home screen, tap [Phone]

[Favorites]

tab.

Calling/Network Services

･

From the Home screen, tap [Phone]

[Favorites] to

display the phonebook data registered in Favorites

and "Commonly used phonebook data". Touch and

hold the phonebook data registered in Favorites or

Commonly used phonebook data to select "Remove

from favorites"/"Add to favorites".

Setting photo in a phonebook entry

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap a phonebook entry you

want to add a picture.

･

The profile screen of the phonebook

appears.

Tap [Edit].

Tap [Settings] for image.

Tap [Add image]/[Take photo].

･

If you select [Add image], select a saved

photo and tap [Save].

･

Select [Take photo] to shoot a photo

and save it.

Tap [OK].

Tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

You can also set photo to a phonebook entry by the

following operation.

From the Home screen, tap

[Gallery]. View an

image you want to set and tap

, [Set

as]

[Phonebook icon]/[Contact picture]. Select a

phonebook entry to register to and tap [Save].

You can export/import phonebook entries

from/to microSD card or UIM. This is useful,

for example, when you want to transfer the

contact information to another phone.

❖

Information

･

You can also use a synchronization service for

synchronizing your phonebook. For details, refer to

"Data synchronization" (P.134).

Exporting phonebook to microSD

card

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap

, then tap

[Others]

[Import/Export].

Tap [Export to SD card].

Select a phonebook you want to

export.

･

Tap to select any of [Export one

phonebook data]/[Export multiple

phonebook data]/[Export all

phonebook data], then tap [OK].

･

If you select [Export one phonebook

data]/[Export multiple phonebook

data] and tap [OK], select phonebook

entries to export then tap [OK].

Exporting/Importing

phonebook entries

Calling/Network Services

Select [Yes]/[No] to attach name

card.

Tap [OK].

Importing phonebook from microSD

card

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap

, then tap

[Others]

[Import/Export].

Tap [Import from SD card].

Tap [Phone contacts]/[docomo].

･

When you set Google account etc., it

appears as an import destination.

Select vCard file you want to

import.

･

If there is only one file, vCard file

selection screen does not appear. The

file is imported immediately.

･

If a file has multiple phonebook entries,

they are imported all at once.

･

If there are two or more vCard files, tap

any of [Import one phonebook data]/

[Import multiple phonebook data]/

[Import all phonebook data] to select.

Tap [OK].

･

If you select [Import one phonebook

data]/[Import multiple phonebook

data] and tap [OK], select vCard files to

import then tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

For some phonebook entries, a part of data may not

be imported or exported.

Importing phonebook entries from

UIM

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap

, then tap

[Others]

[Import/Export].

Tap [Import from SIM card].

Tap [Phone contacts]/[docomo].

･

When you set Google account etc., it

appears as an import destination.

To import one contact, tap the

contact you want to import.

･

To import all contacts, tap [Import all].

･

If there is a phonebook entry whose

name is matched with the imported

entry, the entry is imported as a

separated one.

❖

Information

･

Names and phone numbers can be imported.

Calling/Network Services

･

Alternatively, on the phonebook list screen, tap [My

profile] tab, then tap

and [General

settings]

[Data management]

[Import]

[Import

from SIM card] to import contacts from the UIM.

･

To export phonebook entries to UIM, use Xperia

™

phonebook application. Note that only name and

the first phone number can be saved because of

memory space of UIM. For some phonebook entries,

a part of data may not be exported.

Sharing phonebook entry currently

displayed

On the phonebook list screen

(P.87), tap

, then tap

[Others]

[Import/Export].

Tap [Share phonebook data].

Select sending method and follow

the onscreen instructions.

･

If [Use by default for this action.]

checkbox is marked, application

selection screen will not appear for the

next time.

❖

Information

･

If display conditions for phonebook (P.89) are set,

only phonebook entries to be displayed are

exported.

･

If you use Bluetooth function, tap [Turn on] to turn

on the Bluetooth function, search receiver's

Bluetooth device and send.

･

If you want to send data as files attached to email/

Gmail, send from the compose screen for the mail

service in which you have set an account. When you

have not set a Gmail account, setup wizard appears.

You can create and send email after settings are

done.

･

Messaging is not available.

･

When sending two or more phonebook entries via

infrared communication, you need to enter a

passcode to authenticate. Passcode is a 4-digit

number fixed up between you and other parties in

advance.

･

You cannot send some information such as name

card data set in phonebook.

Phonebook data can be copied to another

terminal using microSD card. You can also

copy the Contacts data registered in Google

account to docomo account.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [PhoneBookCopy].

･

When you use for the first time, agree to

使用許諾契約書

(License Agreement)".

Using PhoneBookCopy

Calling/Network Services

Importing phonebook from microSD

card

Attach the microSD card with

phonebook entries saved to the

terminal.

On the "

インポート

(Import)" tab

screen, tap a file you want to

import.

Tap [

上書き

(Overwrite)]/[

追加

(Add)].

･

Imported phonebook data is saved in

docomo account.

Exporting phonebook to microSD

card

Attach the microSD card to the

terminal.

On the "

エクスポート

(Export)" tab

screen, tap [

開始

(Start)].

･

The Phonebook data saved in docomo

account is saved onto the microSD

card.

Copying contacts registered in

Google account to docomo account

On the "docomo

アカウントへコピー

(Copy to account)" tab screen, tap

a Google account you want to

copy.

Tap [

上書き

(Overwrite)]/[

追加

(Add)].

･

Copied phonebook data is saved in

docomo account.

･

You can also copy the phonebook data

saved in "Phone contact" to docomo

account as well as Google account.

❖

Information

･

If phonebook item names (e.g. Phone number, etc.)

of the other terminal are different from ones of your

terminal, the item names may be changed or

deleted. Also, some text may be deleted in copied

destination, because savable characters in a

phonebook entry vary by terminal.

･

When importing phonebook entries from microSD

card, files created by "all backup" cannot be loaded.

･

When exporting phonebook entries to microSD card,

data without Name cannot be copied.

･

If you use phonebook entries created (exported) by

PhoneBookCopy in other than PhoneBookCopy, they

may not be displayed correctly.

Calling/Network Services

You can use the following DOCOMO network

services on the terminal. For details on the

outline and how to use each service, see the

relevant pages indicated in the following

table.

･

You cannot use the network services when

you are outside of the service area or in a

location without the radio wave.

･

"Stop of service" does not mean canceling the

subscription such as Voice Mail service, Call

Forwarding Service, etc.

･

For details, see the "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [Network Services]".

･

For subscription and inquiry, contact "General

Inquiries" on the last page of this manual.

･

Besides, you can use International roaming

setting (P.240).

❖

Information

･

In this manual, the outlines of each network service

are described with menu operations.

Network Services

Available Network Services

Service name Monthly

charge Application Page

Voice Mail service

Paid Required P.97

Call forwarding

Free Required P.99

Call Waiting

Paid Required P.101

Caller ID

Notification

Free Not required P.102

Nuisance Call

Blocking service

Free Not required P.103

Caller ID Display

Request Service

Free Not required P.103

Second call settings

Free Not required P.104

Remote operation

settings

Free Not required P.104

声の宅配便

(Koe-no-

Takuhaibin)

Free Not required P.105

Calling/Network Services

The Voice Mail Service takes messages for

you, as long as it answers a call with the

answering message, if there is an incoming

call when you are in a location without the

radio wave, while the terminal is powered off,

or when you cannot answer a call within the

preset ring time.

･

When the Voice Mail service is set to "Activate"

and if you do not answer an incoming voice

call, the call is saved in "Recent calls" as a

"Missed call" and (Missed call) appears in

the status bar.

❖

Information

･

This terminal does not have Record message

function which records voice messages on internal

memory. Use the Voice Mail Service.

･

The message can be recorded up to 3 minutes for 1

message, up to 20 messages, and stored up to 72

hours.

･

The number of Voice Mail messages appears until

you have played all messages.

Basic flow of the Voice Mail Service

Voice Mail service

Your terminal receives a call

If you do not answer the call, it is

connected to the Voice Mail service center

The caller leaves a message

The receiver is notied that the Voice Mail

service center has taken the voice message

Play the voice message

▼

Activate the Voice Mail Service

▼

If you are in a hurry and wish to leave a

message without listening to the Voice Mail

answering message, you can interrupt the

answering message and switch to message

recording mode immediately by tapping

[Dialpad]→[#]

Calling/Network Services

Setting Voice Mail Service

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Voicemail].

･

Select items you want to use.

* After operation is finished, you receive the "NTT

DoCoMo VM:XX" SMS.

❖

Information

･

If messages are stored at the Voice Mail service

center, (New SMS message) and (Voice Mail

message) appear on the status bar. (Voice Mail

message) disappears when you delete all messages.

･

The notification setting and notifications (message

(SMS) reception) are not charged.

Activate Voicemail

Tap [OK] to activate the Voice

Mail Service.

Set ring time

Enter the ring time (0 to 120

seconds).

It changes only the ring time.

If the ring time is set to 0

seconds, an incoming call is not

saved in "Recent calls".

Deactivate

Voicemail

Tap [OK] to deactivate the Voice

Mail Service.

Check Voicemail

setting

Check the current service

settings.

Play messages

Tap [OK] to call the Voice Mail

service center. After this step,

follow the voice prompts to play

the message.

Voicemail setting

Tap [OK] to change the Voice

Mail setting with the voice

prompts. The call is connected to

the Voice Mail service center.

After this step, follow the voice

prompts to operate.

Check messages

Check if a new message is stored.

After checking, the completion

message appears.

Notification

settings

Set whether to alert you of a new

message with the tone or

vibration.

Activate Missed

Call Notif.

When it is received while the

terminal is powered off or

outside of the service area, an

SMS is sent to notify you of the

information about the call (date,

time and the caller ID) once you

turn the terminal back on or

move back in to the service area.

Select [All Calls] to notify you of

all received calls.

Select [Calls with Caller ID] to

notify you of only the calls with

the caller ID.

Deactiv. Missed

Call Notif.

While starting the notification,

tap [OK] to deactivate the

notification.

Check setting

Check the notification settings.

Calling/Network Services

Playing the voice message

When the SMS notification "NTT

DoCoMo VM:XX" appears, tap

[New message] from the

Notification panel (P.43).

･

A recorded message plays.

Follow the voice prompts to

operate.

The Call Forwarding Service forwards a voice

call to a preset forwarding number when you

are in a location without the radio wave, the

terminal is powered off, or you do not answer

the call within the preset ring time.

･

When the Call Forwarding Service is set to

"Activate Call Forwarding" and if you do not

answer an incoming voice call, the call is

saved in "Recent calls" as a "Missed call" and

(Missed call) appears in the status bar.

Basic flow of the Call Forwarding

Service

Call charge for the Call Forwarding

Service

Call forwarding

▼

Save the forwarding number

Activate the Call Forwarding Service

Your terminal receives a call

If you do not answer the call, it is

automatically forwarded to the specied

forwarding number

Call Forwarding Service subscriber

Caller

Forwarding party

The caller is charged for a call fee

The Call Forwarding Service

subscriber is charged for a call fee

Calling/Network Services

❖

Information

･

Even when the Call Forwarding Service is set to

"Activate Call Forwarding", you can answer the call

during a ringtone sounds.

Setting Call Forwarding Service

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Call Forwarding].

･

Select items you want to use.

* A subscription of Voice Mail service is required.

Setting on/off of the Call Forwarding

guidance

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial].

Tap [1][4][2][9]

･

Follow the voice prompts to operate.

For details, see the "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [Network Services]".

Activate Call

Forwarding

Enter the forwarding phone number

and ring time, then tap [OK] to

activate the Call Forwarding Service.

Change

forwarding

number

Mark the checkbox and

enter the forwarding

number.

ring time

Mark the checkbox and

enter the ring time (0 to

120 seconds).

If the ring time is set to

0 seconds, an incoming

call is not saved in

"Recent calls".

Deactivate

Call

Forwarding

Tap [OK] to deactivate the Call

Forwarding Service.

number

Change the forwarding phone

number. Enter the forwarding phone

number and tap [OK].

Activate Call

Forwarding

Mark the checkbox to

change the forwarding

phone number and to

activate the Call

Forwarding Service

simultaneously.

If fwd

number

busy

When the forwarding number is busy,

an incoming call is connected to the

Voice Mail service center. Tap

[Connect] to turn on the setting; tap

[Do not connect] to turn off the

setting.

Check setting

Check the current service settings.

Calling/Network Services

When there is another incoming call while

you are on a call, the in-call ringtone notifies

you of the second call. You can answer the

second call by putting the first call on hold.

You can also put your current call on hold

and place a call to another party.

❖

Information

･

Even when the call is on hold, the caller is charged for

a call fee.

Setting Call Waiting

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Call Waiting].

･

Select items you want to use.

Putting the current call on hold and

answering an incoming call

When you hear the beep during a

call, tap [Answer].

･

The first call is put automatically on

hold and the incoming call is received.

- The terminal does not support

Conference call.

- Tap [Busy] to connect the incoming

call to the Voice Mail service center.

Activating Voice Mail service is

required beforehand.

Switch to the first call.

･

To end the later call, tap [End call].

The later call is terminated and switched

to the first call.

･

To put the later call on hold, tap [Switch

to this call].

The later call is put on hold and

switched to the first call. Tapping

[Switch to this call] switches the party.

Ending the current call and

answering an incoming call

When you hear the beep during a

call, tap [End current call and

answer].

･

The first call is terminated and the

incoming call is received.

Call Waiting

Activate Call

Waiting

Tap [OK] to activate the Call

Waiting Service.

Deactivate Call

Waiting

Tap [OK] to deactivate the Call

Waiting Service.

Check settings

Check the current service

settings.

Calling/Network Services

Putting the current call on hold and

making a call to another party

During a call, tap (Phonebook)/

(Dialpad).

Enter the other party's phone

number, then tap .

･

The first call is automatically on hold

and switched to the new call you made.

You can also search for a party by

tapping (Phonebook).

Switch to the first call.

･

To terminate the new call, tap [End call].

The new call is terminated and switched

to the first call.

･

To put the new call on hold, tap [Switch

to this call].

The new call is put on hold and

switched to the first call. Tapping

[Switch to this call] switches the party.

When making a call, your phone number can

be shown in the display of the recipient's

phone you are calling. The caller ID is

important personal information. Carefully

decide whether you notify a recipient of your

caller ID.

･

You cannot set the Caller ID notification

where the terminal indicates the outside of

service area ( ).

･

The setting is available only the other party's

phone can display the caller ID.

･

If an announcement requesting caller ID is

heard when making a call, set Caller ID

notification or add prefix 186 to the phone

number to call again.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Caller ID Notification].

･

Select items you want to use.

Caller ID Notification

Activate Caller

ID Notification

Enter the Network security code,

then tap [OK].

Your phone number is notified to

the other party.

Deactivate

Caller ID

Notification

Enter the Network security code,

then tap [OK].

The caller ID notification is

deactivated.

Check settings

Check the current settings.

Calling/Network Services

You can register "crank call" such as prank call

not to be received. When call rejection is

registered, follow-on incoming calls are

automatically rejected. Guidance responds to

the caller.

And, you can register, check, delete phone

numbers to be rejected connecting Nuisance

Call Blocking service setting site.

･

Even if there is an incoming call from the

phone number with rejection registered,

ringtone does not sound. And the call is not

recorded in the call log.

Setting Nuisance Call Blocking

service

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Nuisance call blocking].

･

Select items you want to use.

Request number notification for calls without

phone number with guidance. Calls can be

ended automatically after guidance.

･

When a call is not received because of the

Caller ID Display Request Service, the call is

not recorded in "Recent calls" as "incoming

call" or (Missed call) does not appear on

the status bar.

Setting Caller ID Display Request

Service

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Nuisance Call Blocking service

Caller ID reject

registration

Tap [OK] to register the last

answered call to be rejected.

Specified caller ID

reject

Enter a phone number you want

to reject and tap [OK]

[OK] to

reject incoming calls from the

specified phone number.

Delete all

registered caller ID

Tap [OK] to delete phone

numbers with rejection

registered.

Delete latest

registered number

Tap [OK] to delete the last

registered phone number. By

repeating the same operation,

you can delete registrations one

by one from the last.

Check the number

of registration

Check number of registrations.

Advanced settings

Connect Nuisance Call Blocking

service setting site to make

advanced settings. To sign in, a

network security code is needed.

Caller ID Display Request

Service

Calling/Network Services

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Caller ID request service].

･

Select items you want to use.

Set how to respond incoming call and 64K

data communication during a call for the

customers subscribed Voice Mail Service, Call

forwarding Service and Call Waiting Service.

･

If you do not subscribe Voice Mail Service, Call

forwarding Service and Call Waiting Service,

an incoming call during a call cannot be

responded.

･

To use Second call settings, set Second call

settings to "Activate". When Call Waiting is set

to "Activate", you do not need to set Second

call settings to "Activate Second call settings".

Setting Second call settings

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Second call settings].

･

Select items you want to use.

Set to operate Voice Mail Service or Call

forwarding Service using push system land-

line phone, public phone or DOCOMO

mobile phone, etc.

Setting remote operation

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting].

Tap [Remote operation

settings]

[OK].

･

Call "159" and follow the voice prompts

to operate.

Activate caller ID

request

Tap [OK] to activate Caller ID

Display Request Service.

Deactivate caller

ID request

Tap [OK] to deactivate Caller ID

Display Request Service.

Check settings

Check the current service

settings.

Second call settings

Activate second

call settings

Tap [OK] to activate the Second

call settings.

Deactivate second

call settings

Tap [OK] to deactivate the

Second call settings.

Check settings

Check the current service

settings.

Remote operation settings

100

Calling/Network Services

Koe-no-Takuhaibin is a service of taking voice

messages for you.

･

The message can be recorded up to 15

minutes for 1 message, up to 500 messages,

and stored for 720 hours. And up to 5

messages can be protected. (Unprotected

messages will be erased after 720 hours

automatically.)

･

It is unavailable from overseas.

･

Koe-no-Takuhaibin is a service requiring no

subscription/monthly charge. But for

recording and playing a message, a call

charge is applied.

･

For details, refer to NTT DOCOMO website.

Basic flow of Koe-no-Takuhaibin

*1 When a caller presses a specified button or

ends a call after recording a message, a

record notification message (SMS) is sent to

the recipient.

*2 When a recipient plays the message, a play

notification message (SMS) is sent to the

caller. Even if a recipient plays a message

several times, a play notification message

(SMS) is sent only when the recipient plays

the message for the first time. If you do not

want to notify a message played to a caller,

stop play notification function. By default,

play notification function is on.

声の宅配便

(Koe-no-Takuhaibin)

Specify the other party and make a call

with Koe-no-Takuhaibin

The other party plays the message

Receive a message (SMS) *2 notifying the

message played

Follow the voice prompts to record a message

Message (SMS)*1 is sent to the other party

to notify your message recorded

▼

101

Calling/Network Services

Recording a message

You can record a message by making a call

with Koe-no-Takuhaibin.

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial] tab.

Enter a phone number and tap

[Koe-no-Takuhaibin].

･

Operate the following voice prompts.

Playing the voice message

Play a recorded message in Koe-no-

Takuhaibin. Follow the voice prompts to

operate. You can delete or protect a message

after playing.

Call a phone number displayed in a

record notification message (SMS).

･

Operate the following voice prompts.

Setting Koe-no-Takuhaibin

From the Home screen, tap ,

then [

声の宅配便

(Koe-no-

Takuhaibin)].

･

Activate Koe-no-Takuhaibin application.

Tap [

設定

(Setting)].

･

Select items you want to use.

設定確認・変更（サイト接続）

(Check/change settings

(connecting website))

Connect website to

check/change settings.

設定確認・変更（音声発信）

(Check/change settings

(voice prompt))

Make a call to check/

change settings.

102

Settings

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings].

■

Setting menu

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, from the Home screen, tap , then

tap [Settings].

You can set passwords for applications

provided by docomo or to use the services

supporting AUTO-GPS.

Viewing the setting menu

docomo service

P. 1 0 7

Xperia

™

P. 1 0 8

Wireless & networks

P. 1 0 9

Call settings

P. 1 1 9

Sound

P. 1 1 9

Display

P. 1 2 2

Location & security

P. 1 2 4

Applications

P. 1 2 9

Accounts & sync

P. 1 3 2

Privacy

P. 1 3 5

Storage

P. 1 3 6

Language & keyboard

P. 1 3 8

Voice input & output

P. 1 3 8

Accessibility

P. 1 3 9

Date & time

P. 1 3 9

About phone

P. 1 4 0

docomo service

Application

manager

Set to check update for

applications regularly.

Wi-Fi

Set to use docomo service via

Wi-Fi.

docomo apps

password

Set a password for applications

provided by docomo.

AUTO-GPS

Set to use the services

supporting AUTO-GPS.

Open source

licenses

View open source licenses.

103

Settings

You can back up/restore data or files in the

terminal or set preferred applications. You

can also set synchronization function for

Facebook in the terminal, make settings for

USB connection or Wi-Fi connection to a PC

or other devices.

Back up contacts, call log, messages (SMS),

bookmarks in the terminal or photos and

videos shot by the terminal camera to

microSD card, and restore them when

needed. Mount a microSD card in advance.

❖

Information

･

Do not perform "Unmount SD card" during backup/

restore.

Backing up to microSD card

Back up contacts, call log, messages (SMS),

bookmarks in the terminal or photos and

videos shot by the camera of the terminal to

the microSD card.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Xperia

™

]

[Backup &

restore].

Tap [Back up].

■

Contacts/Call log/Message (SMS)/

Bookmark

Tap [Back up data now]

[OK].

･

Contacts, call log, messages (SMS) and

bookmark data are copied to the

microSD card.

･

You cannot back up phonebook

registered to docomo account (P.134),

Google account (P.132), etc.

■

Photos and videos taken with the

terminal

Tap [Back up media now]

[OK].

･

Photo and video files are copied to the

microSD card.

･

Check that the battery level is high

enough.

❖

Information

･

You cannot back up sp-mode mails, Gmails, photos

or videos downloaded from websites, etc.

Xperia

™

Backup &

restore

P. 1 0 8

Battery life

View built-in battery performance.

Connectivity

P. 1 5 8

Facebook

inside Xperia

™

P. 1 3 3

Preferred apps

settings

Set applications used for the

terminal (Home, phonebook,

playing video or music) to "docomo"

or "Xperia

™

" collectively or

individually.

Backing up and Restoring

104

Settings

Restoring the back up file to the

terminal

You can restore data or files previously

backed up to the microSD card.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Xperia

™

]

[Backup &

restore].

Tap [Restore].

■

Contacts/Call log/Message (SMS)/

Bookmark

Tap [Restore data now]

[OK]

[OK].

･

The back up data in the microSD card is

restored to the terminal. If the restoring

data already exists in the terminal, the

back up data cannot be added.

■

Photos and videos taken with the

terminal

Tap [Restore media now]

[OK]

[OK].

･

Photo and video files are deleted and

backup file of photo and video in the

microSD card are restored.

･

Check that the battery level is high

enough.

❖

Information

･

Do not turn off the power for 5 minutes after

restoring contacts, call log, messages (SMS) and

bookmarks since the system operates in the

background.

You can make settings related to networks

such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth function.

An access point for connecting to the

Internet (sp-mode, mopera U) is already

registered. You can add or change it if

necessary.

By default, sp-mode (P.110) is set for the usual

access point.

Checking the access point you use

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile

networks]

[Access Point Names].

･

Available access points (APN) appear.

･

It is recommended that you use the

displayed access point without editing.

Wireless & networks

Airplane mode

P. 1 1 1

Wi-Fi/Wi-Fi settings

P. 1 1 2

Bluetooth/Bluetooth settings

P. 1 6 6

Tethering

P. 1 1 6

VPN settings

P. 1 1 8

Mobile networks

P.109, P.238

Setting an access point

105

Settings

❖

Information

･

If you have several available connections, a marked

radio button to the right indicates the active network

connection.

Setting an access point additionally

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile

networks]

[Access Point Names].

Tap

Tap [New APN].

Tap [Name], enter a name and tap

[OK].

Tap [APN] and enter the access

point name and tap [OK].

Tap and enter all other

information required by your

network operator.

Tap

and [Save].

❖

Information

･

Do not change the MCC/MNC. If you change MCC/

MNC to other than the default value (440/10), the

settings do not appear on the APNs screen. When

the MCC/MNC settings do not appear on the APNs

screen, make APN settings with [Reset to default] or

[New APN] again.

･

Note that, when using the prediction conversion by

one-byte alphabet entry mode (English mode) with

mark in [Auto space] checkbox on Japanese

keyboard settings screen (P.62), spaces may be

entered automatically. In this case, delete spaces.

By initializing an access point, the default

state is restored.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile

networks]

[Access Point Names].

Tap

and tap [Reset to

default].

sp-mode is ISP for NTT DOCOMO

smartphone. In addition to accessing

Internet, you can use the mail service using

the same address as imode mail

(@docomo.ne.jp), etc. sp-mode is a service

requiring subscription. For details on sp-

mode, refer to NTT DOCOMO website.

Initializing an access point

sp-mode

106

Settings

mopera U is ISP of NTT DOCOMO's Internet

connection. If you have subscribed to

mopera U, you can use Internet after making

the simple settings. mopera U is a service

requiring subscription.

Setting mopera U

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile

networks]

[Access Point Names].

Mark [mopera U (

スマートフォン定

額

) (mopera U (Smartphone flat-

rate))]/[mopera U

設定

(mopera U

settings)] radio button.

･

Return to the Home screen and open

the Browser. You can enjoy the nice

Internet access.

❖

Information

･

"mopera U

設定

(mopera U settings)" is an access

point for setting mopera U. When you use the access

point for setting mopera U, packet communication

charges for setting do not apply. Note that you can

set only the initial setting screen or the change

setting screen. For details on mopera U settings, refer

to mopera U website.

･

Subscription to packet flat-rate service is required for

using "mopera U (

スマートフォン定額

) (mopera U

(Smartphone flat-rate))". For details on mopera U

(Smartphone flat-rate), refer to NTT DOCOMO

website.

In this mode, the functions of using radio

wave transmissions such as calling, accessing

to the Internet (including sending/receiving

mails), etc. are disabled. It is useful when you

want to operate the terminal with no

interruption of incoming calls or mails.

Turning on Airplane mode

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks].

Mark [Airplane mode] checkbox.

･

When you unmark [Airplane mode]

checkbox, the Airplane mode turns off.

❖

Information

･

You can also switch on/off of the Airplane mode by

pressing and holding

for over a second to

switch to the Phone options menu, then tapping

[Airplane mode].

･

Even if Airplane mode is on, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth

function can be turned on.

mopera U

Airplane mode

107

Settings

Using the Wi-Fi function, you can connect to

an access point for your home, company

network or public wireless LAN services to

use mail and Internet.

･

Even when Wi-Fi is on, packet communication

is available. However, while you connect Wi-Fi

network, Wi-Fi comes first.

･

When a Wi-Fi network is disconnected,

connection is automatically switched to a 3G/

GPRS network. Note that packet

communication fee applies for using 3G/

GPRS network.

･

Turn the Wi-Fi function to off when you do

not use Wi-Fi to cut battery power

consumption.

Before using Wi-Fi

To use Wi-Fi, turn on Wi-Fi and search

available Wi-Fi network, then connect it.

･

To access the Internet using Wi-Fi, connect to

Wi-Fi network in advance.

❖

Information

･

Make sure to receive enough signal strength for

using Wi-Fi. The signal strength of the Wi-Fi network

varies by the location of the terminal. Moving closer

to the Wi-Fi router might enhance the signal

strength.

■

Reception interference caused by

Bluetooth devices

Bluetooth devices and wireless LAN

(IEEE802.11b/g/n) devices use the same

frequency band (2.4GHz). If you use

Bluetooth devices near a wireless LAN

device, reception interference may occur or

the communications speed may lower.

Also, you may hear noise or have a

connection problem. Communication may

be interrupted or sound may be lost while

streaming data, etc. In these cases, do the

following:

･

Keep the terminal and Bluetooth device

to be connected wirelessly 10 or more

meters away from a wireless LAN device.

･

Within 10 meters, turn off the Bluetooth

device to be connected.

■

5 GHz device cautions

Channels available in Japan are as follows.

About Wi-Fi

Channel No. (Ch)

Frequency (MHz)

5.2GHz

band

36 5,180

38 5,190

40 5,200

44 5,220

46 5,230

48 5,240

5.3GHz

band

52 5,260

54 5,270

56 5,280

108

Settings

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks].

Mark [Wi-Fi] checkbox.

･

The terminal scans for available Wi-Fi

networks.

❖

Information

･

It may take a few seconds before the Wi-Fi

connection is on.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

･

Available Wi-Fi networks are displayed

under "Wi-Fi networks". The available

networks may be open or secured. This

is indicated by or next to the Wi-

Fi network name. appears next to

the name of the Wi-Fi network that can

be connected with WPS functions.

Select Wi-Fi network you want to

connect, tap [Connect].

･

If you are trying to connect to a

protected Wi-Fi network, you are asked

to enter the security key for that Wi-Fi

network before you can connect to it.

❖

Information

･

The next time you connect to a Wi-Fi network, the

security key is saved in the terminal.

･

If you enter a wrong security key (WEP key) when

connecting to Wi-Fi network, "Limited connectivity"

may appear after IP address acquisition starts, when

the terminal is not connected to Wi-Fi network.

Check the security key (WEP key) and reconnect.

5.3GHz

band

60 5,300

62 5,310

64 5,320

5.6GHz

band

100 5,500

102 5,510

104 5,520

108 5,540

110 5,550

112 5,560

116 5,580

118 5,590

120 5,600

124 5,620

126 5,630

128 5,640

132 5,660

134 5,670

136 5,680

140 5,700

Turning on Wi-Fi

Channel No. (Ch)

Frequency (MHz)

Connecting to a Wi-Fi network

109

Settings

If the above method cannot solve the problem, the

correct IP address may not have been acquired.

Check the signal status and reconnect.

■

Wi-Fi network status icons on status

bar

The following icons appear according to the

Wi-Fi network connection status.

* Without connected to Wi-Fi network, you need to set

Wi-Fi Network notification to on beforehand. (P.114)

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Touch and hold the Wi-Fi network

that you are connected to.

Tap [Forget network].

When you are connected to a Wi-Fi network

or when there are Wi-Fi networks available in

your vicinity, you can see the status of these

Wi-Fi networks. You can also set the terminal

to notify you when an unsecured Wi-Fi

network is detected.

Setting the Wi-Fi network notification

to ON

Confirm Wi-Fi is ON and from the

Settings screen (P.107), tap

[Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Mark [Network notification]

checkbox.

Scanning for Wi-Fi networks

manually

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Tap

Tap [Scan].

･

Scanning for Wi-Fi networks is started,

and they are displayed under "Wi-Fi

networks".

Tap a Wi-Fi network in the list to

connect to it.

Appears when connected to Wi-Fi network.

Appears when connected to Wi-Fi network

using AutoIP function.

Appears when any open network within the

service area is detected.

Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network

Wi-Fi network status

110

Settings

You need to turn on the Wi-Fi setting

beforehand. (P.112)

Connecting to Wi-Fi network using a

WPS device

WPS is a function that enables you to simply

make complicated settings for wireless LAN

connection and security. WPS function in the

terminal enables you to connect to Wi-Fi

network using a WPS compatible wireless

LAN device as an access point. Make setting

for the WPS device as required.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Tap [Auto setup ( WPS)].

Press the WPS button of the WPS

device that functions as an access

point within 120 seconds.

･

Press the WPS button according to the

settings of the WPS device.

Adding a Wi-Fi network manually

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Tap [Add Wi-Fi network].

Enter [Network SSID] name of the

Wi-Fi network you want to add.

Tap [Security] field, then mark a

radio button of security type for

the Wi-Fi network you want to add.

･

4 options, "Open", "WEP", "WPA/WPA2

PSK", or "802.1x EAP", appear.

If required, enter security

information for the Wi-Fi network

you want to add.

Tap [Save].

Viewing detailed information on a

connected Wi-Fi network

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Tap the Wi-Fi network that you are

currently connected to.

･

The detailed network information is

displayed.

❖

Information

･

From the Settings screen (P.107), tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Wi-Fi settings] and tap

and

[Advanced] to check "MAC address" and "IP address".

Advanced Wi-Fi settings

111

Settings

By changing Wi-Fi sleep policy, you can

choose to disable the Wi-Fi function in the

terminal when the screen backlight turns off.

You can also set the terminal to always turn

on the Wi-Fi function or to turn it on when

the terminal is charged.

❖

Information

･

When a Wi-Fi network is disconnected, connection is

automatically switched to a 3G/GPRS network.

Adding a Wi-Fi sleep policy

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Tap

Tap [Advanced].

Tap [Wi-Fi sleep policy].

Tap any of [When screen turns off]/

[Never when plugged in]/[Never].

You can set up the terminal to connect to a

Wi-Fi network using a static IP address.

Setting up a static IP address

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[Wi-Fi

settings].

Tap

Tap [Advanced].

Mark [Use static IP] checkbox.

･

Item of IP settings can be selected.

Tap an item to enter necessary

information.

･

Enter "IP address", "Gateway", "Netmask",

"DNS 1" to use a static IP address.

Tap

Tap [Save].

Tethering stands for using mobile devices

such as smartphone as modem to allow USB

compatible devices or wireless LAN devices

to access the Internet.

Wi-Fi sleep policy Using a static IP address

Using tethering function

112

Settings

❖

Information

･

Packet communication charge when using tethering

varies depending on the charging plan you use.

Subscription of packet flat-rate service is highly

recommended.

･

For details on usage charge, etc., refer to

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/ .

･

For details on tethering, from the Settings screen

(P.107), tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Tethering]

[Help] to refer.

Setting USB tethering

Connecting the terminal to a USB compatible

PC with supplied microUSB cable, and using

the terminal as a modem, you can connect

the PC to the Internet.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Tethering].

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable (P.36).

･

When you connect a USB cable for the

first time, driver software for the

terminal is installed to the PC. Wait for a

while until installation is completed. A

confirmation screen for installation of

PC Companion software appears when

the driver software installation is

completed.

Tap [Skip].

Tap [USB tethering].

Confirm details of the cautions

displayed, tap [OK].

･

[USB tethering] is marked.

❖

Information

･

System requirements (OS) for USB tethering are as

follows. A required driver is automatically installed.

- Microsoft Windows 7

- Microsoft Windows Vista

- Microsoft Windows XP

Setting up a portable Wi-Fi hotspot

You can use the terminal as a Wi-Fi access

point to connect up to 8 wireless LAN devices

to the Internet simultaneously.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Tethering].

Tap [Port. Wi-Fi hotspot settings].

Tap [Configure Wi-Fi spot].

Enter [Network SSID] of the Wi-Fi

hotspot to set.

･

By default, "Xperia acro HD SO-

05D_XXXX" is set.

Tap [Security] field and mark the

radio button for the security type

of Wi-Fi hotspot to set.

･

Either "WPA2 PSK" or "Open" appears.

113

Settings

Enter security information of the

Wi-Fi hotspot to set as required.

Tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

By default, the password is set at random. You can

change the password as desired.

Setting Wi-Fi tethering

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Tethering].

Tap [Portable Wi-Fi hotspot].

Confirm details of the cautions

displayed, tap [OK].

･

[Portable Wi-Fi hotspot] is marked.

❖

Information

･

If USB tethering starts while connecting to Wi-Fi

network, Wi-Fi network is disconnected and

automatically connected when Wi-Fi tethering ends.

Alternatively, when the terminal and DLNA device

are connected via Wi-Fi network, starting/ending Wi-

Fi tethering affects Wi-Fi connection.

･

USB tethering and Wi-Fi tethering can be used at the

same time.

Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a technology

to connect to the information in a protected

local network from another network.

Generally, VPNs are provided to companies,

schools and other facilities. A user can access

to the information in the local network from

outside of the premises.

To set up a VPN access from the terminal, you

need to retrieve the information related to

security from your network administrator. For

details, refer to http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/

support/.

❖

Information

･

If you set sp-mode as an ISP, you cannot use PPTP.

Adding a VPN

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[VPN

settings].

Tap [Add VPN].

Tap a VPN type to add.

If a setting screen appears, follow

the instruction of the network

administrator to set required

items of VPN settings.

Connecting to a VPN (Virtual

Private Network)

114

Settings

Tap

and [Save].

･

A new VPN is added in the list on VPN

settings screen.

❖

Information

･

Added VPNs can be edited or deleted.

To edit VPNs, touch and hold a desired VPN, then tap

[Edit network]. Change the VPN settings as required

and tap

and tap [Save].

To delete, touch and hold a VPN to be removed, then

tap [Delete network]

[OK].

Connecting to a VPN

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Wireless & networks]

[VPN

settings].

･

Added VPNs are displayed in the list on

the VPN setting screen.

Tap a VPN to connect to.

If the dialog box appears, enter the

desired authentication

information and tap [Connect].

･

When you are connected to a VPN,

appears in the status bar. When you are

disconnected, the notification

indicating to return to the VPN setting

screen appears, so that you can

reconnect to. When not connected,

appears in the status bar.

Disconnecting a VPN

Open the Notification panel, and

tap the VPN connecting

notification.

･

Tap a connecting VPN to disconnect.

You can use the network services and search

for available networks.

Call settings

Network service

setting

P. 9 6

Service

providers

When you start using overseas or

move out of your operator's

network, the terminal searches

another available network and

reconnects to it.

Noise

suppression

Make the voice clear to understand

for the other party during a call.

Accounts

Set Internet phone (SIP) account.

Use Internet

calling

Set Internet phone (SIP) call

method.

115

Settings

Set ringtones, operation sound, vibrator, etc.

Press and hold

for over a

second.

･

Phone options menu appears.

Tap [Silent mode].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, from the Settings screen (P.107), tap

[Sound] and mark [Silent mode], or from the key

unlocking screen (P.39), touch and drag to the

left to set silent mode.

･

Setting the phone to silent mode does not mute

sounds for playback of video or music, alarm, etc.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Sound]

[Vibrate].

Tap any of [Always]/[Never]/[When

sound is off]/[When sound is on].

Sound

xLOUD

™

Set audio playback level

enhancement technology

("xLOUD") to enjoy powerful

sounds with the built-in speaker

when playing music, YouTube,

Gallery, etc.

Silent mode

P. 1 2 0

Vibrate

P. 1 2 0

Volume

P. 1 2 0

Phone ringtone

P. 1 2 1

Notification

ringtone

P. 1 2 1

Audible touch

tones

P. 1 2 1

Audible selection

P. 1 2 1

Screen lock

sounds

Set whether to emit sound or

not when unlocking the key or

the screen.

Haptic feedback

Set whether to vibrate the

terminal for some operations

such as specified software key

operation.

Setting Silent mode

Setting vibrator

116

Settings

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Sound]

[Volume].

･

Adjust the volume of following items.

-Ringtone

- Media (sounds of the Music player,

Gallery and FM radio, etc.)

-Alarm

- Notification tone

Drag the slider left or right to

adjust the level.

･

Drag the slider to the left for volume

down, or to the right for volume up.

Tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

By default, Notification volume is adjusted to the

same as Ringtone volume. To adjust Ringtone and

Notification separately, unmark [Use incoming call

volume for notifications] in Step 1. Ringtone and

Notification volume adjustment sliders appear, then

drag each slider to the right or left to adjust volume.

From the Home screen, press up or

down of

･

The volume adjustment bar appears,

you can adjust the volume up or down.

❖

Information

･

You can also press

to mute the

ringtone for an incoming call.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Sound]

[Phone ringtone].

Select a ringtone and tap [Done].

･

You can set voice file in ".wav", ".m4a" or

in other format which is transferred

from Media Go (P.162) or downloaded

from the Internet as a ringtone. (P.203)

❖

Information

･

To set a ringtone other than the ones stored by

default, you can also set from "Music library".

Adjusting each sound volume Adjusting the ringtone volume

with the volume key

Setting a ringtone

117

Settings

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Sound]

[Notification

ringtone].

Select a ringtone and tap [Done].

❖

Information

･

To set a notification sound other than the ones

stored by default, you can also set from "Music

library".

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Sound].

Mark [Audible touch tones],

[Audible selection].

･

If you unmarked them, any operation

tone does not sound when you touch

or tap.

❖

Information

･

"Audible touch tones" is a tone for numeric key

operations. "Audible selection" is a tone when

selecting menu item.

･

To set the key sound of software keyboard, from the

Settings screen (P.107), tap [Language & keyboard],

and select a type of software keyboard.

Set brightness, orientation of the screen, etc.

* Setting Mobile BRAVIA Engine improves image

quality when using Xperia

™

application.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Display]

[Brightness].

Drag the slider to the right or left.

･

Drag the slider to the left for dimmer

screen, or to the right for brighter

screen.

Tap [OK].

Selecting a notification

ringtone

Setting touch tones to ON

Display

Mobile BRAVIA

Engine

To view photos or movies

colorfully and beautifully, set

image quality improving

procedure (Mobile BRAVIA

Engine). It adjusts contrast,

color shade, etc.

Brightness

P. 1 2 2

Auto-rotate screen

P. 1 2 2

Animation

P. 1 2 2

Screen timeout

P. 1 2 3

Theme

Set the background image for

the Home screen or Settings

screen.

Lock screen settings

P. 1 2 3

Adjusting the screen

brightness

118

Settings

You can set the screen orientation to change

automatically between landscape and

portrait view when you turn the terminal

sideways/paleways.

❖

Information

･

Even when you change the orientation of the

terminal, the screen may not change to landscape

view depending on the screen such as Home screen,

etc.

Setting to change to landscape view

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Display].

Mark [Auto-rotate screen]

checkbox.

Set animation effect which shows transition

of screen smoothly.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Display]

[Animation].

Select an animation option.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Display]

[Screen timeout].

Select a time option before the

screen back light turns off.

❖

Information

･

To turn the screen back light off immediately, press

Yon can set information displayed on the key

unlock screen (P.39).

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Display]

[Lock screen

settings].

■

Displaying notification

Mark [Missed calls]/[New sp-mode mails]/

[New messages]/[New emails]/[Calendar

events].

･

By default, "Missed calls", "New sp-

mode mails" and "New messages"

checkboxes are marked.

Changing orientation of the

screen

Setting animation effect to

transition

Adjusting the idle time before

the screen turns off

Setting information displayed

on the key unlock screen

119

Settings

･

When you log in to Facebook and set

"Facebook inside Xperia

™

" (P.134),

"Facebook notifications" checkbox

appears. Mark the checkbox to display

the notification for a new Facebook

message on the key unlock screen.

(Some notifications such as "Friends

requests", "Event invites", etc. cannot be

displayed.)

■

Hiding detailed information on

notification

Mark [Privacy] checkbox.

･

Notification and a number of messages,

calls, etc. are displayed while

information on the other party or

message contents are not displayed.

■

Changing shortcuts of applications

Tap [Application shortcuts]

[Add new

shortcuts]/[Contacts]/[Messaging]/

[Google Search] and flick up and down to

select the application you want to

change.

･

By default, "Contacts", "Messaging" and

"Google Search" are set, which can be

customized.

･

Flick right around date and time

displayed on the key unlock screen to

display a shortcut for the preset

application, or flick left to display Music

player widget. You can activate the

application or play music without

unlocking key lock. You cannot replace

the Music player widget.

■

Changing wallpaper

Tap [Wallpaper]

[Gallery]/[Xperia

™

wallpapers].

･

For setting procedure, see Step 2 (P.69)

in "Changing wallpaper".

■

Displaying Machi-chara

Mark [Machi-chara] checkbox.

･

Set "Machi-chara" widget on the Home

screen in advance. For setting

procedure, see "Adding a widget to the

Home screen" (P.68).

･

If [Machi-chara] checkbox is marked,

three checkboxes or less can be marked

for Notification (P.123).

120

Settings

Set options related to location information

and security.

*1 To use Omakase Lock, enable "Omakase Lock".

Omakase Lock is not available as of February, 2012.

*2 Set the password to the credential storage in

advance.

*3 Save certificates and credential information in the

credential storage.

Some functions provided for convenient use

of the terminal require the security code to

use them. Besides the security code for

locking the terminal, the network security

code necessary for the network services etc.

are available. Make use of the terminal using

an appropriate security code according to

the purpose.

■

Notes on the security codes

･

Avoid using a number that is easy to

guess, such as "birth date", "part of your

phone number", "street address number

or room number", "1111", and "1234".

Make sure to make a note of the security

code you set lest you should forget it.

･

Be very careful not to let others know your

security code. If your security code is

known by anyone else, DOCOMO shall

have no liability for any loss due to any

unauthorized use of it.

Location & security

Use wireless networks

P. 2 1 1

Use GPS satellites

P. 2 1 1

Set up screen lock

P. 1 2 7

Set up SIM card lock

P. 1 2 6

Visible passwords

Set whether to show the

input character before "

・

appears on the password

entry screen.

Select device

administrators

Set whether to enable

device administrators. By

default, "Omakase Lock" is

activated.

Use secure credentials

Allow applications to

access secure certificates

and other credentials.

Install from internal

storage

Install encrypted

certificates from internal

storage.

Set password

Set or change the

credential storage

password.

Clear storage

Delete all certificates and

credential information

from the credential

storage

and reset its

password.

Protecting the UIM

121

Settings

･

If you forget your security codes, you must

bring your official identification (such as

drivers license), the terminal, and UIM

with you to the nearest docomo Shop. For

details, contact the "General Inquiries" on

the last page of this manual.

･

The PUK code is written on the

subscription form (copy for customer)

handed at the subscription in the

docomo Shop. If you subscribed other

than docomo Shop, you must bring your

official identification (such as drivers

license), the UIM with you to the nearest

docomo Shop or contact the "General

Inquiries" on the last page of this manual.

Network security code

The network security code is a 4-digit

number necessary for identification or using

the docomo Network Services at reception of

your request in docomo Shop or at docomo

Information Center. It can be set any number

at the subscription and also changed later by

yourself.

You can change your network security code

to the new one using the PC if you have the

"docomoID"/"Password" for the "My

docomo"

General support site for PC.

* For information on "My docomo", see the

previous page of the last page of this manual.

You can set a security code called PIN code to

the UIM. The code is set to "0000" at the time

of subscription. It can be changed by

yourself.

PIN code is a 4- to 8-digit number (code) that

must be entered for user confirmation to

prevent unauthorized use by a third party

every time you insert the UIM into the

terminal or when the terminal is powered on.

Entering the PIN code enables making/

receiving calls and terminal operation.

･

If you use a newly purchased terminal with

UIM you have been using inserted, use the

PIN code set on the former terminal. If you did

not change the setting, the code is "0000".

･

If you enter a wrong PIN code 3 times

consecutively, the PIN code is locked and

cannot be used anymore. In this case, unlock

with "PUK". (P.126)

PUK code (Personal Unblocking Key)

The PUK code is an 8-digit number for

canceling the locked PIN code. The PUK code

cannot be changed by yourself.

･

If you failed to enter PUK code 10 times

consecutively, the UIM is locked. Please

contact a docomo Shop.

PIN code

122

Settings

By setting PIN (security code) and entering

PIN code when powered on, you can protect

the UIM from improper use.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Location & security]

[Set up

SIM card lock]

[Lock SIM card].

Enter the PIN code of the UIM and

tap [OK].

･

[Lock SIM card] is marked.

Entering the PIN code when powered

On the PIN code entry screen,

enter the PIN code of the UIM.

Tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

Even if you do not unlock the SIM card lock, you can

make an emergency call by tapping [Emergency call]

on the screen unlocking screen after unlocking the

SIM card lock. For details, refer to "Emergency call"

(P.81).

Changing the PIN code

･

You can change the PIN code only when the

UIM PIN is enabled.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Location & security]

[Set up

SIM card lock]

[Change SIM PIN].

Enter the current PIN code of the

UIM and tap [OK].

Enter a new PIN code of the UIM

and tap [OK].

Enter the new PIN code of the UIM

again and tap [OK].

Unblocking the locked UIM

On the PUK code entry screen,

enter the PUK code and tap [OK].

Enter the new PIN code of the UIM

and tap [OK].

Enter the new PIN code of the UIM

again and tap [OK].

Enabling the UIM PIN

123

Settings

You can secure your data by requiring a

screen unlock pattern every time the

terminal is turned on or every time it is

activated from sleep mode.

There are 3 types of screen lock settings:

"Pattern", "PIN" and "Password". (P.127)

❖

Information

･

You can use Key lock (P.38) to prevent unintended

operation or save the power consumption of the

terminal without setting screen lock.

Setting screen unlock method

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Location & security]

[Set up

screen lock].

Tap [Pattern]/[PIN]/[Password].

･

When you tap [Pattern], follow the

onscreen instructions to enter screen

unlock pattern.

Set security question and answer in case

you forget the pattern.

･

When you tap [PIN], follow the

onscreen instructions to enter 4 or

more numbers. This "PIN" code is

different from a PIN code to be set to

UIM (P.126).

･

When you tap [Password], follow the

onscreen instructions to enter 4 or

more characters including alphabets.

Changing screen unlock method

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Location &

security]

[Change screen lock].

･

Enter current screen unlock pattern, PIN

or password.

･

If you should fail 5 times when you

enter the unlock pattern, wait 30

seconds and then try again.

Tap [Pattern]/[PIN]/[Password].

･

Select items you want to change into.

For setting procedure, see Step 2 (P.127)

of "Setting screen unlock method".

Locking the screen

Once screen unlock pattern (P.127) is set, keys

and screen are locked when the terminal

enters in the sleep mode or when

pressed.

Unlocking the screen

Press

to turn the backlight

on.

Screen lock

124

Settings

Unlock the key lock (P.39), then

enter the screen unlock pattern,

PIN, or password.

･

Enter preset screen unlock pattern, PIN

or password.

❖

Information

･

Even if you do not unlock the screen lock, you can

make an emergency call by tapping [Emergency call]

on the screen unlocking screen after unlocking the

key lock. For details, refer to "Emergency call" (P.81).

If you forget how to unlock

■

If you set "Pattern"

"Incorrect pattern" appears when you enter

incorrect unlock pattern 5 times

consecutively.

･

Tap [Next], and answer the security

question that you set for the unlock

pattern setting, then tap [Unlock] to

unlock the screen lock.

･

If you set Google account, on the

"Incorrect pattern" screen, tap [Next] to

display "Answer question" and "Enter

Google account details".

- Mark [Answer question] and tap [Next],

and answer the question that you set for

the unlock pattern, then tap [Unlock] to

unlock the screen lock.

- Mark [Enter Google account details], tap

[Next], and enter Google account and

password, then tap [Unlock] to unlock

the screen lock.

･

When setting new unlock pattern after

unlocking screen lock, "Screen unlocked"

appears. Tap [Yes] to reset unlock pattern.

❖

Information

･

Tap [Try again] to retry entering pattern in 30

seconds.

･

Alternatively, tap [Try again] and [Forgot pattern?] to

display answering question screen that you set the

unlock pattern.

･

You can set multiple Google accounts. To unlock the

screen with Google account and password, enter

one of those accounts.

■

If you set "PIN"/"Password"

Please contact a docomo Shop.

Canceling screen lock

You can cancel screen lock pattern after you

set.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Location & security]

Tap

[Change screen lock].

･

Enter preset screen unlock pattern, PIN

or password.

Tap [None].

125

Settings

You can set options related to application

display and management.

Before you can download unknown source's

applications, set the terminal to enable

downloading.

Applications you download may be of

unknown origin. To protect your terminal

and personal data, only download

applications from trusted sources such as the

Android Market etc.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications].

Tap [Unknown sources].

Read the cautions displayed, tap

[OK].

･

[Unknown sources] checkbox is

marked.

Checking downloaded applications

You can check data downloaded from

websites, such as unknown source's

applications, in the following steps.

From the Home screen, tap

[Browser].

Tap

and tap

[More]

[Downloads].

❖

Information

･

Applications downloaded from Android Market do

not appear.

Manage and delete installed applications,

display memory usage condition, etc. or

change the settings.

Viewing permitted operation of the

applications in the terminal

You can check functions which are permitted

to access to each application in the progress

of performing, such as network

communication function or location

information function of the terminal.

Applications

Unknown sources

P. 1 2 9

Manage applications

P. 1 3 0

Running services

Display/Manage the currently

running services.

Storage use

Display size of all applications,

usage condition, etc.

Battery use

Display operations which has

been using the battery.

Development

Set options for application

development.

Permitting downloading

unknown source's application

Managing your applications

126

Settings

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Manage

applications].

Tap an application to view.

Scroll down the screen to view

permitted operations.

･

If all permitted operations do not

appear, tap [All].

Shutting down an application

If a pop-up window that indicates the

application does not reply appears, you can

force quit the application.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Manage

applications].

Tap an application to force-quite.

Tap [Force stop].

Read the cautions displayed, tap

[OK].

❖

Information

･

When you do not want to force stop the application,

tap [Cancel] and wait for a reply of the application.

❖

Note

･

If you cancel the "status bar" of applications forcibly,

operations may not be performed correctly.

Deleting all data of the application

･

Before deleting all installed application data,

back up contents related to the application

that you want to save including data saved in

the application.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Manage

applications].

Tap an application to delete the

data.

Tap [Clear data].

Read the cautions displayed, tap

[OK].

Deleting installed application

･

Before deleting installed application, back up

contents related to the application that you

want to save including data saved in the

application.

･

Some applications cannot be deleted.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Manage

applications].

Tap an application to be deleted.

Tap [Uninstall].

Tap [OK].

127

Settings

When uninstallation is completed,

tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

Some applications pre-installed in the terminal

cannot be uninstalled.

･

Applications can be deleted from the Applications

screen. For details, refer to "Uninstalling an

application" (P.77).

Deleting cache of the application

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Manage

applications].

Tap an application to delete cache.

Tap [Clear cache].

Deleting settings for activating the

application

You can delete settings for activating the

application and restore to the default.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Manage

applications].

Tap an application to delete its

settings.

Tap [Clear defaults].

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Applications]

[Development].

Mark [Stay awake] checkbox.

You can manage (add or delete) online

service accounts or synchronize contacts,

messages, etc. saved in online services with

the terminal.

Keeping the screen backlight

ON while charging

Accounts & sync

Background data

traffic

All the applications installed to

the terminal perform automatic

data communications.

Activate auto-sync

P. 1 3 5

Manage accounts

P. 1 3 2

128

Settings

You can add or delete an online service

account.

Setting Google account

You can create a Google account on your

terminal and use Google services such as

Gmail, Google Talk, Google Calendar, Android

Market, etc.

You can set multiple Google accounts on the

terminal.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Accounts & sync]

[Add

account]

[Google].

Follow the registration wizard, set

a Google account.

･

If you have no Google account, create

an account.

･

If you have already the Google account,

❖

Information

･

You can use the terminal without creating your

Google account, however the services such as

Google Talk, Gmail, Android Market, etc. are not

available.

･

To sign in, you need a Google account and a

password.

･

If you set a Google account, you can tap your Google

account displayed on the "Accounts & sync" screen in

the setting menu to manually synchronize data from

the following items.

* To upload photos automatically, select settings to

enable the instant upload on the confirmation

screen when you set a Google account to log in

Google+.

･

If you set a Google account and use Picasa in it, "Sync

Picasa Web Albums" appears. Tapping to synchronize

displays Picasa Web Album in the Gallery on the

terminal.

･

If you set a Google account and use Google+ in it,

"Sync Google+" appears. Tap it to synchronize and

display instant upload photos in the Gallery in the

terminal.

･

Make sure to check if the data connection is available

before sign in to the Google account. For checking

the data connection status, see "Status icon" (P.41).

Managing accounts

Sync Instant

Upload

Synchronize photos taken with the

camera or screen shots or photos in

a microSD card with photos in

Google+.

Sync Contacts

Synchronize contacts stored in

Gmail with the phonebook stored in

the terminal.

Sync Gmail

Synchronize Mail logs used in Gmail

account with Gmail on the terminal.

Sync Calendar

Synchronize calendar information

such as schedule, etc., stored in

Google account with Calendar in the

terminal.

129

Settings

Setting Facebook account

When you register or sign in Facebook, you

can display profile information published by

online "Friend" to Phonebook. And you can

display Facebook updates of "Friends" in

Timescape.

❖

Information

･

If you do not have a Facebook account, you can also

create a new account at http://www.facebook.com.

･

If you download and install client applications for

Twitter, mixi, you can setup accounts and

synchronize contacts information in the same

manner as Facebook.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Accounts & sync]

[Add

account]

[Facebook].

･

If you already have a Facebook account

and set account from Phonebook or

Timescape of the terminal, you need

not add a new account.

Enter your sign in information.

･

If you have no Facebook account,

･

If you have Facebook account, sign in.

❖

Information

･

Set Facebook account to display in the status bar.

Drag the status bar downwards, tap [Facebook inside

Xperia

™

], mark the [Facebook integration] checkbox,

read the displayed note, and then tap [Accept]. Tap

(Facebook inside Xperia

™

) added to the

"Accounts & sync settings" screen, and tap the

following items to synchronize and display

corresponding data.

Setting other account

■

Exchange ActiveSync account

･

If you have Exchange ActiveSync account,

from the Settings menu screen (P.107),

tap [Accounts & sync]

[Add

account]

[Exchange Active Sync] and

set according to the onscreen instruction.

■

docomo account

･

docomo account helps you to use

"docomo backup" service (P.72) provided

by NTT DOCOMO. docomo account is set

by default.

Sync Calendar

Synchronize events such as Friends'

birthdays, etc., stored in Facebook

with Calendar in the terminal.

Sync Albums in

Gallery

Display images posted on Facebook

onto the album in Gallery of the

terminal.

Sync Contacts

Synchronize profile of Friends stored

in Facebook with the phonebook

stored in the terminal.

130

Settings

Deleting an account

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Accounts & sync] and select a

service account you want to

delete.

Tap [Remove account]

[Remove

account].

❖

Information

･

The first set Google account cannot be removed

from "Remove account". To remove the first set

Google account, reset the terminal. For resetting

procedure, see "Resetting the terminal" (P.135).

･

docomo account cannot be deleted.

Synchronize online information such as your

Gmail, calendar, contacts, etc. to the terminal.

You can display and edit information on the

terminal or a PC.

❖

Information

･

You need to set your online service account such as

Google account, etc. on the terminal to synchronize.

You can set to synchronize manually or automatically

through use of background data.

Setting Auto-sync

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Accounts & sync].

Mark [Background data traffic]

checkbox.

Tap [Activate auto-sync].

Read the cautions displayed, tap

[OK].

･

[Activate auto-sync] checkbox is

marked.

Tap an online service whose

account is set.

Tap to mark an item for automatic

synchronization.

･

If the items to be synchronized are

marked and checkboxes are led by ,

synchronization starts. When is not

displayed, tap

and tap [Sync now]

to start synchronization.

❖

Note

･

If you mark [Background data traffic], all the

applications installed to the terminal are permitted

automatic data communications to online services

whose accounts are set. And, if you mark [Activate

auto-sync], your Gmail, calendar, contacts, and profile

information published by "Friend", etc. are permitted

automatic data communications by Google account.

These communications may cause you to pay packet

communications charges.

Data synchronization

131

Settings

･

If you do not mark "Activate auto-sync", you can

synchronize manually. On the settings screen (P.107),

tap [Accounts & sync], tap the service where your

account is set to display the synchronizing items,

then tap items you want to synchronize.

Canceling synchronization

During synchronization (

appears in the status bar), tap

Tap [Cancel sync].

Restore the terminal to default.

Resetting the terminal deletes all data,

including downloaded applications and

Google accounts, and resets the terminal

back to the initial (default) state. Make sure to

back up important data you have on the

terminal before you reset the terminal.

For the initial settings, see "Initial settings

(Setup guide)" (P.39).

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Privacy]

[Factory data

reset]

[Reset phone].

･

Mark [Erase internal storage] checkbox

to delete all contents (music, photos,

videos, etc.) on the internal storage.

･

Enter your screen unlock method as

required.

Tap [Erase everything].

･

By tapping [Erase everything], the

terminal restarts automatically.

❖

Information

･

If you reset the terminal, license information for the

DRM protected content may be erased making the

content unable to be played.

Check memory volume of the microSD card,

USB storage, internal storage and phone

memory. And you can format microSD card,

USB storage and internal storage.

USB storage is an external memory such as a

microSD card connected to the terminal

using commercially available reader/writer

cable.

Privacy

Factory data

reset

P. 1 3 5

Resetting the terminal

Storage

microSD card

Total space

Check memory volume of microSD

card.

132

Settings

* Display changes depending on condition of USB

storage or microSD card recognition.

❖

Information

･

Note that when available memory of internal storage

becomes 32KB or less, microSD card cannot be

mounted.

Formatting microSD card

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Storage]

[Unmount SD

card].

Tap [Erase SD card].

Tap [Erase SD card]

[Erase

everything].

❖

Information

･

Formatting microSD card deletes all the data in it.

Formatting USB storage

Insert external memory such as a microSD

card into commercially available reader/

writer cable and connect the cable to the

terminal in advance.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Storage]

[Unmount USB

storage].

Tap [Clear USB storage].

Tap [Clear USB storage]

[Erase

everything].

Available space

Check available memory of a

microSD card.

Unmount SD

card

Cancel connection of microSD card

to remove it safely.

Mount SD card

Have microSD card recognized.

Erase SD card

P. 1 3 7

USB storage

Total space

Check memory volume of USB

storage.

Available space

Check available memory of USB

storage.

Mount USB

storage

Have USB storage recognized.

Unmount USB

storage

Cancel connection of USB storage

to remove it safely.

Clear USB

storage

P. 1 3 7

Internal storage

Total space

Check memory volume of internal

storage.

Available space

Check available memory of internal

storage.

Clear internal

storage

P. 1 3 7

Phone memory

Available space

Check available memory of the

phone memory.

Managing memory

133

Settings

❖

Information

･

Formatting USB storage (external memory such as

microSD card) deletes all the data in it.

Formatting the internal storage of the

terminal

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Storage]

[Clear internal

storage].

Tap [Clear internal storage].

Tap [Erase everything].

❖

Information

･

Formatting the terminal deletes all the data in it.

Checking total memory space and

available memory of internal storage.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Storage].

･

Check total volume and available

memory of microSD card, USB storage,

internal storage and phone memory.

Increasing the available memory of

the terminal

If the terminal has a small memory, you can

perform the following operations to increase

available memory:

･

In the browser, you can clear all temporary

Internet files and browser history information.

For details, refer to "Clearing history" (P.157).

･

Uninstall programs that you no longer use. For

details, refer to "Deleting installed application"

(P.131).

You can select language and keyboard input.

Changing phone language

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Language &

keyboard]

[Select language].

Select a language and tap [Done].

･

When you select Japanese, "

完了

(Done)" is displayed, but its display

varies by the language you selected.

Language & keyboard

Select language

P. 1 3 8

User dictionary

Xperia

™

keyboard

P. 6 0

Xperia

™

Chinese keyboard

Xperia

™

Japanese keyboard

134

Settings

❖

Information

･

If you choose the wrong language and cannot read

the menu texts, go to http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/

so-05d/faq.html for help.

You can set Google voice recognizer and

Text-to-speech settings.

■

Voice recognizer settings

■

Text-to-speech settings

* Japanese is not supported.

You can set call end operation and user

support service which sounds or vibrates

according to user's operation.

❖

Information

･

A user support application is not installed by default.

For the first time of use, install a screen reader for the

terminal from the Android Market according the

onscreen instructions.

･

To use Android Market, you need to set Google

account (P.132).

Voice input & output

Language

Select language used for Google

voice search.

SafeSearch

Set filter explicit.

Block

offensive

words

Set whether to display recognized

offensive voice results.

Listen to an

example

Playback sample of audio synthesis.

Always use my

settings

Overwrite application settings with

content of "Default Engine", "Install

voice data", "Speech rate", "Language"

and "Pico TTS".

Default

Engine

Set audio synthesis engine to read

out text. By default, "Pico TTS" is set.

Install voice

data

Install voice data required to voice

synthesis. If voice data is not installed,

connect to Android Market to search

voice data.

Speech rate

Set speed at reading out text.

Language

Set language for reading out text.

Pico TTS

Make settings for installed voice

synthesis engine.

Accessibility

Set user support service on/off.

Power button ends

call

Set to end a call by pressing

135

Settings

You can change the date and time in the

terminal.

To set date, time zone and time manually,

unmark "Automatic" (Use network-provided

values) under Date & time settings.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Date & time]

[Set date].

Tap number to adjust the date.

Tap [Set].

❖

Information

･

Correction of the time differences may not be

performed correctly depending on the overseas

telecommunication carrier. In that case, set time

zone manually (P.140).

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Date & time]

[Select time

zone].

Select time zone you want to set.

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Date & time]

[Set time].

Tap number to adjust the hour and

minute.

･

When you unmark [Use 24-hour

format], you can change AM/PM. When

you tap [am], it changes to [pm] (or vice

versa).

Tap [Set].

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Date & time] and mark/

unmark [Use 24-hour format]

checkbox.

･

Mark the checkbox to shift to 24-hour

format, and unmark to shift to 12-hour

format.

Date & time

Automatic

Adjust date, time zone, and

time automatically by using

network-provided information.

Set date

P. 1 3 9

Select time zone

P. 1 4 0

Set time

P. 1 4 0

Use 24-hour format

P. 1 4 0

Select date format

P. 1 4 0

Setting the date

Setting the time zone

Setting the time

Setting the time format

136

Settings

From the Settings screen (P.107),

tap [Date & time]

[Select date

format].

Select date format you want to set.

You can check your own phone number,

signal level, legal information, etc.

Setting the date format

About phone

Software update

P. 2 5 2

Status

Check your own phone

number, signal level,

battery level, etc.

Battery use

Display operations which

have been using the

battery.

Legal information

Check license agreement,

Model number

Check version and

number.

Android version

Baseband version

Kernel version

Build number

137

Mail/Internet

Mail/Inter net

Send/receive mails using i-mode mail

address (@docomo.ne.jp).

You can use pictogram and Deco-mail. Mails

can be received automatically. For details on

sp-mode mail, refer to "

ご利用ガイドブック

(sp

モード編

) (Mobile Phone User's Guide [sp-

mode])" (in Japanese only).

From the Home screen, tap [sp

モー

ドメール

(sp-mode mail)].

Scroll the screen, then tap [

ダウン

ロード

(Download)].

･

After this step, follow the instructions

on the screen.

❖

Information

･

When you receive an sp-mode mail, an icon

indicating sp-mode mail appears on the key unlock

screen. For the setting to show or hide icons, see

"Setting information displayed on the key unlock

screen" (P.123).

You can send and receive text messages up

to 70 two-byte characters (160 one-byte

characters) with a mobile phone number as

the destination.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Tap (New mail).

Tap , then mark a checkbox for

the other party to send to from the

contacts list.

･

When you enter a name or phone

number in the box at the top of the

screen, a list of contacts beginning with

the entered numbers or letters appears.

･

Alternatively, you can enter a phone

number in the box at the top of the

screen, then tap [Add] to add a

recipient.

Tap [Done].

sp-mode mail Message (SMS)

Sending message (SMS)

138

Mail/Internet

Tap "Write message" field and

enter a message.

･

When the number of entered

characters comes close to a limit, a

counter appears on the upper left of

the text box and you can check the

remaining entry space.

Tap [Send].

❖

Information

･

For the character entry, see "Character entry" (P.47).

･

You can also send/receive text messages to/from

customers of overseas network operators. See

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]"

or the DOCOMO International Services website.

･

To send SMS to users of overseas network operators,

enter "+", "Country code" and then "the recipient

mobile phone number". Enter the phone number

without a leading "0", if any. You can also enter "010",

"Country code" and "the recipient mobile phone

number" to send messages (To reply to the received

SMS overseas, enter "010").

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Tap someone whose messages you

want to read from the recipient

list.

･

A received message appears.

❖

Information

･

When you receive a message (SMS), appears on

the status bar. To read the mail, drag the status bar

downward, tap an item of notified message (SMS).

･

When you receive a message (SMS), an icon

indicating message appears on the key unlock

screen. For the setting to show or hide icons, see

"Setting information displayed on the key unlock

screen" (P.123).

･

Tap / in the message to turn to (yellow).

From the Home screen, tap , then tap

[Messaging]

, and tap [Starred messages] to

quickly access to the mail you have marked.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Select a thread whose phone

number you want to save.

Tap

, then tap [Add to

Contacts].

Tap [Register new].

Tap [Phone contacts]/[docomo].

･

When you set Google account etc., it

appears as a saving location.

Enter required items and tap

[Save].

Receiving and reading message

(SMS)

Saving phone number of

message to Contacts

139

Mail/Internet

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Tap

and [Settings].

･

You can set the following options.

❖

Information

･

Even if Notification light is unmarked, notification

LED blinks white once, letting you know that a

message has arrived.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Tap a thread to select.

Touch and hold a message you

want to delete.

Tap [Delete message]

[Yes].

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Touch and hold a thread to delete.

Tap [Delete conversation]

[Yes].

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Messaging].

Tap

and tap [Delete several].

Tap [Mark all]

[Delete].

･

After tapping [Mark all], you can tap

individual thread to unmark. Tap

[Unmark all] to unmark all of the

threads.

Setting message (SMS)

Delivery report

Mark to mark a message thread you

sent each time a recipient receives

the message.

Notifications

Mark if you want to receive a

notification in the status bar when a

new message arrives.

Notification

tone

Set if you want to receive a

notification in selected ringtone

when a new message arrives.

Notification

vibration

Set if you want to receive a

notification by vibration when a

new message arrives.

Notification

light

Mark to set to notify of reception by

notification LED when notification

setting is made.

SIM messages

Manage messages saved to UIM.

Push settings

Reports of message settings can be

received from the provider.

Deleting a message

Deleting a thread

Deleting all threads

140

Mail/Internet

You can create an email account provided by

mopera U mail, a POP3 or IMAP compatible

email account provided by general ISP

(provider), or an Exchange ActiveSync

account to send or receive email.

Email setup wizard appears. Set according

the onscreen instructions. Multiple email

accounts can be set.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

Enter your email address and

password.

Tap [Next].

･

To make the email account settings

manually, tap [Manual setup] and

follow the onscreen instructions.

Enter an account name and name

you want to display on outgoing

messages.

･

If "What type of account is this?"

appears, tap an email account type and

follow the onscreen instructions to set.

･

If you set an Exchange ActiveSync

account, a name displayed for sent mail

cannot be set.

Tap [Done].

･

Inbox for set email account appears.

❖

Information

･

If you need to make the settings manually, contact

your email service provider or system administrator

for the correct email account settings.

･

If you set an Exchange ActiveSync account as email

account, and if server manager sets Remote wipe,

the data saved in the terminal may be deleted.

･

Emails are not displayed in Timescape.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

Tap (New mail).

Enter the email address of

recipient.

･

Tap to display the contacts list

screen to select from registered

contacts. If you enter alphabets or a

name, email address options appear

from the contacts beginning with the

entered character.

･

To Cc or Bcc, tap

and tap [Add

Cc/Bcc].

Making initial setting for Email

Creating and sending email

141

Mail/Internet

･

To enter multiple email addresses

directly, separate with a comma (,) and

then enter the next email address.

Enter a subject.

Enter a message text.

To attach a file, tap .

･

Attach a file in the following operations.

･

Image/video/music file up to 5MB can

be attached in Email.

Tap (Send).

❖

Information

･

When you want to save a mail as draft while creating

a mail, enter any of recipient, subject or message or

attach a file. If you do not enter or attach anything, a

mail is not saved as draft. (When only automatic

signature is attached, a mail is not saved as draft

either.)

･

While creating a mail, tap

and tap [Yes] in the

"Save as draft" screen to save a mail as draft. Also,

when you move to the other screen while creating a

mail, the mail is automatically saved as draft.

･

In sent/received emails, a communication data is also

included other than text and image displayed on the

screen and charges will apply to the data.

･

Email is handled as an email from a PC. You cannot

send or receive email if "Reject emails from PCs" is set

on a recipient terminal.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

When two or more email accounts are

set, the Email screen appears. Tap and

select an email account to receive from

an account list.

On the Inbox, tap

and tap

[Refresh].

Tap an email.

❖

Information

･

The sender name of a received email is the name set

on sender's terminal.

･

If you set "Email notifications" in Account settings

(P.148) and set "Inbox check frequency" to an item

other than "Manual", appears in the status bar

when you receive a new email. Drag the status bar

downwards to read the received email.

Add

picture

Select a file from the saved image file list.

Take photo

Start the camera to take a photo and

attach it.

Add video

Select a file from the saved video file list.

Record

video

Start the camera to record a video and

attach it.

Add sound Music player

: Select a saved music file.

Sound Recorder

: Record a voice

message and attach it.

Receiving and reading email

142

Mail/Internet

･

If you set "Inbox check frequency" in Account

settings (P.148) to an item other than "Manual", and if

you are using the pay-as-you-go data

communication, you may be charged every time you

check your email.

･

If you tap the address of a received email, you can

registered, you can display the details of the contact.

･

Tap (gray) to turn (yellow) on the mail

message screen to add the marked mail to "Starred"

on the email screen. From "Starred", you can quickly

access to the mail you have marked.

If is not displayed on the mail message screen, tap

to display.

･

When phone memory becomes low, a message

indicating low memory space appears and receiving

emails is not available. Delete saved mails etc. to

make available memory space.

Changing Inbox view

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

When the Email screen appears, tap

and select an email account to receive

from an account list.

Tap

, then tap

[More]

[Preview pane].

･

You can set the following options.

❖

Information

･

If you have two or more accounts, change made in

any of the accounts applies to all accounts.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

When the Email screen appears, tap

and select an email account whose

attachment you want to save from an

account list.

Tap mail and .

･

The attachment icon is displayed.

Tap the icon of a file you want to

save, then tap [Save].

･

The attached file is saved on the

internal storage.

･

You can display attachment files by

tapping [Open].

Off

Inbox is not shown piecewise.

Landscape

Tap in landscape view to cut the

Inbox to show the selected mail body.

Tap in portrait view or in

landscape view to cut the Inbox to show

the selected mail body.

Saving attachment file of email

143

Mail/Internet

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

When the Email screen appears, tap

and select an email account whose

email you want to reply or forward from

an account list.

■

Replying

Tap an email

Tap (Reply) or

(Reply all)

Enter the text and tap

(Reply).

■

Forwarding

Tap an email

Tap (Reply)

Enter

the email address of recipient

Enter the

text and tap (Reply).

❖

Information

･

When you reply or forward an email, the original

message contents for replying or forwarding is

quoted. To delete the quoted message text, tap .

･

When you forward an email, the attachment file of

the original message is quoted. To cancel quoting

attached file, tap .

･

You can also touch and hold the email to reply or

forward an email.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

When the Email screen appears, tap

and select an email account whose

email you want to delete from an

account list.

Touch and hold an email you want

to delete.

Tap [Delete]

[Yes].

❖

Information

･

To delete several emails at the same time, operate as

follows.

Tap

, then tap [Mark several]

Checkboxes to

the right of mails you want to delete, tap at the

bottom of the screen, and then tap [Yes].

･

To delete mail while sending, tap

then tap

[Folders]

[Outbox], then touch and hold a mail you

want to delete and then tap [Delete]

Tap [Yes].

Replying/forwarding email Deleting email

144

Mail/Internet

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

When the Email screen appears, touch

and hold an account that you want to

change the settings from an account

list and tap [Account settings] to

change the settings.

Tap

, then tap

[More]

[Account settings].

･

You can set the following options.

❖

Information

･

You can also set "Inbox check frequency", "Sync

contacts", and "Sync calendar" for an Exchange

ActiveSync account. "Outgoing settings" cannot be

set.

･

If you set "Inbox check frequency" to other than

"Manual", and if you are using the pay-as-you-go data

communication, you may be charged every time you

check your email.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

If a screen other than Email screen

appears, tap

and tap

[More]

[Accounts].

Tap

and tap [Add account].

Enter your email address and

password.

･

If required, mark [Send email from this

account by default.] checkbox.

Tap [Next].

･

To make the email account settings

manually, tap [Manual setup] and

follow the onscreen instructions.

Changing Email account

settings

Account name

Change account name.

Your name

Change your name (sender name).

Signature

Change your signature.

Inbox check

frequency

Set whether to check new messages

automatically and intervals of

automatic check.

Default

account

Set to the default account to send

email, if you set two or more email

accounts.

notifications

Set whether to show email arrival

notification in the status bar.

Select ringtone

Set ringtone when receiving an

email.

Vibrate

Set whether to vibrate when

receiving an email.

Incoming

settings

Set mail server for receiving.

Outgoing

settings

Set mail server for sending.

Setting another Email account

145

Mail/Internet

Enter an account name and name

you want to display on outgoing

messages.

･

If "What type of account is this?"

appears, tap an email account type and

follow the onscreen instructions to set.

･

If you set an Exchange ActiveSync

account, a name displayed for sent mail

cannot be set.

Tap [Done].

･

Inbox for set email account appears.

❖

Information

･

If you need to make the settings manually, contact

your email service provider or system administrator

for the correct email account settings.

･

If you set an Exchange ActiveSync account as email

account, and if server manager sets Remote wipe,

the data saved in the terminal may be deleted.

･

On the Inbox, tap

and tap [More]

[Accounts]

to display the email screen and set account list.

･

All received mails for the set accounts are shown in

the "Combined Inbox" on the email screen.

･

Tap an account name to open the inbox for selected

account alone.

･

Emails are not displayed in Timescape.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

If a screen other than email screen is

displayed, tap

and tap

[More]

[Accounts].

Touch and hold an account to

delete, and tap [Delete

account]

[OK].

mopera U users (for the setting, see "Setting

mopera U" (P.111)) can use mopera U Mail.

In mopera U Mail, POP mail and IMAP mail are

available. The mail box supports 50MB. Also,

the Web mail system is available.

■

POP mail

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [Email].

･

If you have already set an email

account, operate the following

operations.

- If the Email screen appears, tap

and tap [Add account].

- If a screen other than Email screen

appears, tap

and tap

[More]

[Accounts]

and

[Add account].

Deleting Email account

Using mopera U Mail

146

Mail/Internet

Enter mopera U mail address and

mopera U password, then tap

[Manual setup]/[Next].

･

If you tap [Next], it changes

automatically to POP3 account. Go to

Step 4.

Tap [POP3] from the type of the

mail account.

Check that you have entered [User

name] and [Password] for mopera

U correctly, and [mail.mopera.net]

for the POP3 server.

･

If you tap [Next] in Step 2,

"mail.mopera.net" is entered in the

SMTP server field.

Select the security type.

･

If you do not select, tap [Next] and go

to Step 8.

On the security selection screen,

mark the security radio button to

be used.

Confirm the entry, then tap [Next].

Enter [mail.mopera.net] for the

SMTP server and confirm the entry

of [User name] and [Password] for

mopera U.

･

If you tap [Next] in Step 2, you need to

mark [Require sign–in] to check entered

[User name], [Password] for mopera U.

･

If you tap [Next] in Step 2,

"mail.mopera.net" is entered in the

SMTP server field. Set "587" in the Port

field.

Tap [Next].

On the option setting screen, set

frequency of checking Emails etc.

and tap [Next].

On the mail account registration

screen, enter a name you want to

display on outgoing messages,

then tap [Done].

･

The mailer is displayed and the set mail

account is available.

❖

Information

･

When [Require sign-in.] is unmarked on the SMTP

server setting screen, sending mails is not available.

Mark [Require sign-in.].

147

Mail/Internet

If you have a Google account, you can send/

receive emails by using Gmail on your

terminal. If you have no Google account, see

"Setting Google account" (P.132).

❖

Information

･

Gmail messages are not displayed in Timescape.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Gmail].

On the Inbox, tap

and tap

[Refresh].

･

Synchronizing Gmail application in the

terminal with your Gmail account starts,

and the Inbox is refreshed.

❖

Information

･

For details Gmail, on Gmail screen, tap

and tap

[More]

[Help] to refer the mobile help.

You can use Google Talk instant messaging to

chat with friends. To use Google Talk, you

need to make settings of your Google

account. For details, refer to "Setting Google

account" (P.132).

Signing in Google Talk

Signing in is unnecessary if you have already

set a Google account.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Talk].

Tap [Next]

[Sign in] and enter

your user name and password.

Tap [Sign in].

❖

Information

･

For details on Google Talk, on the Google Talk screen,

tap

and tap [More]

[Help] to refer to the

mobile help.

Using Gmail

Refreshing Gmail

Google Talk

148

Mail/Internet

Early warning "Area mail" is a service with

which you can receive earthquake early

warning, etc. delivered by the Meteorological

Agency.

･

Area Mail is a free service for which

subscription is not required.

･

Area Mail cannot be received in the following

case.

-During a voice call

- Out of service area

- While power is off

- During International roaming

- During Airplane mode

- While updating software

- When a SIM other than by DOCOMO is

inserted

- While sending/receiving a message (SMS)

･

Area Mail may not be received when

tethering is set or during packet

communications.

･

Area Mail that could not be received cannot

be received later.

When the terminal is in service area, Area

Mail is sent automatically.

Receive Area Mails automatically.

A dedicated ring tone sounds and

notification LED flashes when an

Area Mail is received.

･

Ringtone and ringtone volume cannot

be changed.

･

The notification LED blinks only when

backlight is off.

A message body of Area Mail

appears automatically.

View received Area Mail later

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Area Mail].

Select an Area Mail from the Area

Mail list.

･

You can view message of Area Mail.

Early Warning "AreaMail"

Receiving Early Warning

"AreaMail"

149

Mail/Internet

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Area Mail].

Tap

and [Settings].

❖

Information

･

Area Mail cannot be set when UIM is not inserted.

From the Home screen, tap

[Browser].

Tap the search box on the top of

the browser screen.

Using the keyboard, enter the web

page address or keyword to be

searched for.

･

As you enter an address or characters,

retrieved web pages list appears.

Tap the displayed candidates list

or .

･

You can move the web page.

❖

Information

･

You can tap to enter search words by voice and

search a web page.

Going back to the previous page

Tap

Setting Early Warning

"AreaMail"

Receive

setting

Set whether to receive Area Mails.

Beep tone

Set sounding time for Area Mail

reception and whether to sound a

dedicated ringtone even in silent

mode.

Check screen

image and

beep tone

Check the ringtone and screen for

reception of earthquake early warning

or Area Mail for disaster/evacuation

information.

Other

settings

Set receiving/deleting Area Mail.

Using Browser

Opening Browser

Moving to a web page

150

Mail/Internet

Tap

･

All open windows are closed and

Browser ends.

Browser offers advanced features that let you

view web pages like on a PC.

Opening a new browser window

You can open up to 8 browser windows.

While viewing a web page, tap

and tap [New window].

･

A new browser window opens in the

default home page.

Switching browser windows

You can easily switch from one website to

another by opening several windows.

On the Browser screen, tap

and tap [Windows].

Tap a browser window you want to

view.

Closing browser window

On the Browser screen, tap

and tap [Windows].

Tap on the browser window

you want to close.

Zooming in/out a web page

To zoom in/out a webpage, perform any of

the following operations.

･

Double-tap at the point you want to zoom in/

out.

･

Pinch-out at the point you want to zoom in or

pinch-in at the point you want to zoom out.

･

Tap the zoom control icon (the zoom control

icon may appear when you drag in any

direction on the screen).

❖

Information

･

Web pages created to fit to the screen cannot be

zoomed in/out.

Searching text in a web page

While viewing a web page, tap

and tap [More]

[Find on

page].

･

The search bar appears in the upper

part of the screen.

Exiting Browser

Displaying web page

Zoom out

Zoom in

151

Mail/Internet

Enter the search item.

･

As you enter, matching characters are

highlighted in green.

Tap to close the search bar.

Copying text in a web page

While viewing a web page, tap

and tap [More]

[Select

text].

Place your finger at the start of the

text you want to copy and then

drag to the end of the text you

want to copy.

･

Copied text is highlighted in orange.

Take your finger away from the

screen and tap the selected text.

･

After copying text is completed, a

message "Text copied to clipboard."

appears.

To paste text in an email, text

message or multimedia message,

touch and hold the text box on a

message or email and tap [Paste]

in the menu.

❖

Information

･

On some web pages, selecting characters may not

be available.

Auto-fitting a web page

Adjust display size of web pages

automatically to fit the screen.

On the Browser screen, tap

and [More]

[Settings]

Mark

[Auto-fit pages].

❖

Information

･

Some web pages cannot be adjusted automatically.

Adjusting Browser settings

On the Browser screen, tap

and tap [More]

[Settings] and

make Browser settings and the

options.

Setting a home page

On the Browser screen, tap

and tap [More]

[Settings].

Tap [Set home page], enter URL

you want to set as the home page,

tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

The URL set as the home page appears when

opening a new browser window.

Back to the previous matched item

Go to next matched item

152

Mail/Internet

Operating links in web pages

Open the web page you want to

operate the links.

To open the web page, tap the link.

･

The links get enclosed in an orange box

when selected.

･

If you touch and hold the link, the

menus, "Open", "Open in new window",

"Bookmark link", "Save link", "Share link"

and "Copy link URL", appear. When you

touch and hold an image or a link

contained image, "Save image", "View

image" and "Set as wallpaper" also

appear. "Share link" enables you to

share the link via Bluetooth, Facebook,

Gmail, Google+, Web page widget

(docomo Palette UI), Messaging, etc.

･

Browser recognizes some phone

numbers that allow you to call the

phone number. Tap the phone number

to call.

･

When you download a file by "Save link"

from websites which require Basic

authentication or SSL session, the

downloading may be failed.

You can check history and store many

bookmarks on the terminal.

Bookmarking a web page

On the Browser screen, go to the

web page you want to bookmark.

Tap

and [Bookmarks].

･

A list of bookmarks appears.

･

You can also access the list screen by

tapping on the right side of the URL.

･

You can switch thumbnail view and list

view by tapping

on the

bookmark list screen.

■

Thumbnail view

Tap [

★

Add] at the upper left

screen

Edit a bookmark name if

required, and then tap [OK].

■

List view

Tap [Add bookmark...] in the upper part of

the screen

Edit a bookmark name as

required, and then tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, in the bookmarks list, tap

, then

[Bookmark last-viewed page]

Tap [OK] to

bookmark the page.

Operating links Managing bookmarks and

history

153

Mail/Internet

･

Tap [Most visited]/[History] tab in the bookmark list

screen and tap on the right side of the record.

turns into and the web page is added to the

bookmark list.

Opening a bookmark

On the Browser screen, tap

and [Bookmarks].

Tap the bookmark you want to

open.

･

If you do not tap a bookmark but touch

and hold it, the menus, "Open", "Open

in new window", "Edit bookmark", "Add

shortcut to Home", "Share link", "Copy

link URL", "Delete bookmark" and "Set as

homepage" appear. Tap "Add shortcut

to Home" to create a shortcut on the

Home screen. "Share link" enables you

to share the link via Bluetooth,

Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Web page

widget (docomo Palette UI), Messaging,

etc.

Checking browsing history

On the Browser screen, tap

and tap [Bookmarks]

[History]

tab.

Tap the time you browsed the web

page, such as [Today], [Yesterday],

etc.

･

To open the web page, tap an item.

･

To check your most visited web pages,

tap [Most visited] tab.

❖

Information

･

On the Browser screen, touch and hold

check the history.

Clearing history

On the Browser screen, tap

and tap [Bookmarks]

[History]

tab.

Tap

and tap [Clear history].

･

When you delete the history, a list in

"Most visited" tab is also deleted.

❖

Information

･

To clear temporary internet files such as cache, on

the Browser screen, tap

and tap

[More]

[Settings] and set each item in "Privacy"

menu.

154

File management

Files in the terminal should be operated on

the file handling application. For example, to

delete files saved in a microSD card, use the

deletion function of the applications such as

Music player or Gallery.

With "Share" function of each application,

you can exchange files via Infrared

communication, Bluetooth or by email file

attachment sending to/receiving from other

compatible devices.

In addition, with the terminal connected to a

PC, you can move to the PC or delete files in

the internal storage or a mounted microSD

card. If you install PC Companion and use

Media Go, you can manage files between a

PC and the terminal mutually.

With "Sync Zone" of PC Companion, you can

synchronize contacts in the terminal and

calendar with Outlook of a PC.

You can transfer and move images, music

data and some other data. Sharing some data

may not be permitted due to copyright.

By connecting the terminal and a PC with the

supplied microUSB cable, you can exchange

data between the terminal and the PC.

Connecting the terminal and a PC

using a microUSB cable

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable (P.36).

･

When you connect microUSB cable for

the first time, the driver software for the

terminal is installed to a PC. Wait for a

while until installation is completed. A

confirmation screen for installation of

PC Companion software appears when

the driver software installation is

completed.

Handling a file Transferring and moving

data

Using microUSB cable

155

File management

･

The terminal is connected by "Media

transfer mode (MTP)" and "Mass storage

mode (MSC)", which are USB

connection modes set by default, and 2

screens "Xperia acro HD SO-05D" and

リムーバブル

ディスク

(Removal disk)"

appear on the PC. "Media transfer mode

(MTP)" allows you to access the internal

storage and "Mass storage mode

(MSC)" allows you to access the

microSD card inserted into the terminal.

Tap [Skip].

❖

Information

･

Window that appears when connecting to a PC may

vary depending on the operating system (OS) of a

PC.

･

While in a connection, drag the status bar

downwards and tap [Internal storage connected] or

tap [SD card connected]

[Connectivity settings] to

check connection status or change the following

connection settings.

･

If you mark [Auto connect in MSC] and connect the

terminal to a PC, microSD card can be accessed as a

removal disk. microSD card cannot be accessed from

the terminal and functions using microSD card may

become unavailable in Camera, Gallery, Music player,

etc.

･

If you install PC Companion, you can use the

following applications on a PC for managing media

files, creating backup files, etc. when connecting the

terminal and the PC. For details, check on the PC

Companion screen after installation.

Install PC

Companion

Display PC Companion installation

wizard when connected to a PC.

USB connection

mode

Check initial settings when

connecting to a PC.

Auto connect in

MSC

When the terminal is connected

to a PC, USB connection mode is

set to "MSC" automatically. If you

unmark the checkbox, you cannot

access microSD card from a PC.

Tethering

Set terminal data communication

via USB cable or as portable Wi-Fi

hotspot. (P.116)

Trusted devices

Connect the terminal and a host

device in a pair via Wi-Fi network.

(P.161)

Media Go

P.162

Support Zone

Update software of the

terminal connecting to a PC.

(P.254)

Sync Zone

Synchronize calendar and

contacts between Outlook and

the terminal.

File Manager

Check file type, update time,

location, etc. on the terminal.

Contacts Setup

Copy the contacts data of the

mobile phone previously used

to the terminal.

Back up and restore

Back up the terminal data or

move the data to another

terminal.

156

File management

･

When the terminal is connected to a PC, charging

starts automatically.

Disconnecting the microUSB cable

safely

･

Do not disconnect the microUSB cable during

data transferring. Otherwise, data may be

damaged.

･

If you connect the terminal in the Media

transfer mode (MTP) only, make sure that data

transfer is not in progress and just disconnect

the microUSB cable.

Drag the status bar downwards.

･

When "Connect your phone" is

displayed, go to Step 4.

When "SD card connected" is displayed,

go to Step 2.

Tap [SD card connected].

Tap [Disconnect].

･

"Preparing SD card" then "Connect your

phone" appear in the status bar.

Disconnect the microUSB cable.

Dragging and dropping data on the

terminal and a PC

■

Media transfer mode (MTP)

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable.

･

"Internal storage connected" appears in

the status bar.

Drag and drop selected data

between the terminal and a PC.

■

Mass storage mode (MSC)

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable.

･

"SD card connected" appears in the

status bar.

Drag and drop selected data

between the terminal and a PC.

❖

Information

･

You can transfer files using a microUSB cable on most

devices and the following operating systems (OSs)

that supports the USB mass-storage memory

interface.

- Microsoft Windows 7

- Microsoft Windows Vista

- Microsoft Windows XP

157

File management

If the terminal and a PC

are connected in a

pair on a Wi-Fi network, automatic

connection/disconnection of internal storage

of the terminal or a microSD card with a PC is

enabled when the terminal user comes in

and out of the Wi-Fi area. You can easily

access to files in the internal storage of the

terminal or a microSD card from a connected

PC.

* Use Microsoft Windows 7 to make a pair

setting. Pair setting cannot be made under

Microsoft Windows XP, Microsoft Windows

Vista or other OS.

Connect a PC you want to set in a

pair to a Wi-Fi network.

Connect the terminal to a Wi-Fi

network (P.113).

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable.

･

When a confirmation screen for

installation of PC Companion software

appears on the terminal, tap [Skip].

Make sure that "Xperia acro HD

SO-05D" is displayed as a portable

device on the explorer of the PC.

Right click the portable device

icon, then click "

ネットワーク構成

(network composition)".

Click "

(Next)".

On the pop-up screen of the

terminal, tap [Pair].

On the network composition of the

portable device screen of the PC,

click "

完了

(Done)".

Disconnect the microUSB cable.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings]

[Xperia

™

]

[Connectivity]

Tap "Host name"

(PC name) in the "Trusted devices"

field.

Tap [Connect].

･

The terminal and the PC are connected

in "Media transfer mode (MTP)" on a Wi-

Fi network, and you can exchange data

files.

Connecting the terminal to a PC

on a Wi-Fi network

158

File management

❖

Information

･

From the Home screen, tap

, then tap

[Settings]

[Xperia

™

]

[Connectivity] to display

"Host name" (PC name) in the "Trusted devices" field.

To cancel connection setting, tap the host name and

[Forget]. Until "Forget" is tapped, the connection

setting retains even if you connect/disconnect

repeatedly by coming in and out of a Wi-Fi area.

･

If the privacy separator function for Wi-Fi network

(access point) is enabled, pair setting cannot be

made.

The Media Go computer application helps

you transfer and manage media content in

the terminal and PC.

With Media Go, you can load music from a CD

to a PC and transfer to the terminal.

You need one of these operating systems

(OS) to use the Media Go application:

･

Microsoft Windows 7

･

Microsoft Windows Vista

･

Microsoft Windows XP, Service Pack 3 or

higher

❖

Information

･

To learn more about how to use the Media Go

application, see the help section in the main menu of

the Media Go application.

Installing Media Go

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable.

･

"PC Companion software" screen

appears on the terminal.

Tap [Install].

･

An Installer screen appears on the PC

screen.

On the installer screen of PC, select

"English (U.K.)" or "English (U.S.)"

and click "Install".

･

After this step, follow the onscreen

instructions.

After the installation, on the "Sony

PC Companion" screen of the PC,

install "Media Go".

❖

Information

･

You can also download Media Go from http://

www.sonymobile.co.jp/mediago/.

Using Media Go

159

File management

Transferring data using Media Go

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable.

･

When "PC Companion software" screen

appears on the terminal, tap [Skip].

Select Media Go from the PC's start

menu and activate Media Go.

･

Using Media Go, you can move files

between the terminal and the PC.

You can send/receive data of contacts,

photos or videos taken by the camera to/

from terminals etc. supporting infrared

communication function.

･

The communication range for infrared

communication is 20 cm or less. Keep the

devices pointing at the infrared data port

each other, and do not move them until data

exchange completes.

･

If the infrared data port is soiled, clean the

data port with a dry soft cloth to prevent from

scratching. Performing infrared

communication with the data port soiled or

scratched may cause communication failure.

･

Infrared communication may not be

performed in areas exposed to direct sunlight,

directly under fluorescent lights or near

infrared devices.

･

Depending on the terminal of the other party,

it may be difficult to exchange data.

❖

Information

･

Do not cover the infrared data port with the fingers,

etc. while performing infrared communication.

･

Infrared communication for the terminal conforms to

IrMC version 1.1. However, some data cannot be sent

or received even if the receiver's phone conforms

IrMC version 1.1.

･

Authentication passcode may be required while

sending or receiving infrared data. Authentication

passcode is a 4-digit number fixed up between you

and other party in advance. The same number string

must be entered by the sender and receiver.

Using Infrared

communication

160

File management

･

If the terminal receives a call during infrared

communication, data exchange is interrupted and

the incoming call screen appears.

･

If the set alarm time comes during infrared

communication, data exchange is interrupted and

the alarm starts to sound.

･

is displayed in the status bar during infrared

communication.

･

Up to 2MB of data of contacts

, Myself

, photos,

videos and music can be sent and received. It may

take a time to exchange data depending on the data

amount or device of other party.

･

Some data, such as data with copyright protection,

etc., cannot be played back on other devices.

･

Received data cannot be played back or saved

depending on the sender's device, data type or data

amount.

･

The received data is saved in the internal storage.

･

If "Notification tone ON" is set with the Infrared

application, when sending/receiving data is

complete, it is notified by notification tone set in

"Selecting a notification ringtone" (P.121). For details

on the notification tone volume settings, see

"Adjusting each sound volume" (P.120). Notification

tone is muted while silent mode is set. To switch on/

off notification tone, from the Home screen, tap

and tap [Infrared]

, then tap [Notification

tone ON]/[Notification tone OFF].

* You cannot send some information such as name

card data set in contacts.

Start Infrared application and select data to

send. Or select "Infrared" as a sending

method from the application menu for

Phonebook, Gallery or Music player.

■

Sending data using infrared

communication application

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Infrared]

[Send].

Select a data type to send.

* You cannot send some information such as name

card data set in contacts.

Sending data via infrared

communication

Myself

Send Myself data including own

number.

Contact

Select an item from the contact list

screen and send.

All contacts

Enter authentication passcode to

send.

Picture

Select an image from an album in the

Gallery and send.

Video

Select a video from an album in the

Gallery and send.

Audio

Select a track from the Artists in the

Music player or record a voice

message using the voice recorder to

send.

161

File management

■

Sending data from an application

From the application menu, tap

[Share]

[Infrared].

･

To send 1 phonebook entry, from the

Home screen, tap

[Phonebook]

[(a phonebook entry to

send)]

and tap

[Share]

[Infrared].

･

To send all phonebook entries, from the

Home screen, tap

[Phonebook]

and tap

[Others]

[Import/Export]

[Share

phonebook data]

[Infrared], then

enter the same authentication

passcode as that of the recipient and

tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

You cannot send two or more images, videos, or

audio data at a time.

･

You can use Infrared widget on the Home screen to

send Myself easily.

･

You cannot send some information such as name

card data set in phonebook.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Infrared]

[Receive]/

[Receive several].

･

Enter authentication passcode if you

select "Receive several".

When receiving data is completed,

tap [Yes] and store received data.

･

If you received contacts, you can select

saving location.

❖

Information

･

You cannot receive two or more images, videos, or

audio data at a time.

･

You may not be able to save contacts if the phone

memory becomes low.

･

A file name may be changed when saving. A file

named with 127 characters or more (Unicode) may

not be saved properly.

･

You can use Infrared widget on the Home screen to

receive a file easily.

Receiving data via infrared

communication

162

File management

The Bluetooth function creates a wireless

connection to other Bluetooth devices, for

example, handsfree devices. A range within

10 meters, with no solid objects in between,

is recommended. You must turn on the

Bluetooth function to communicate with

Bluetooth devices. You may also have to

make pair setting for the terminal and

Bluetooth device.

❖

Information

･

By default, Bluetooth function is off. If you turn

Bluetooth on and then turn off the terminal,

Bluetooth function turns off. When you turn on the

terminal again, Bluetooth function turns on

automatically.

･

When you do not use Bluetooth function, turn it off

to save the battery.

■

Reception interference caused by

wireless LAN devices

The terminal's Bluetooth function and

wireless LAN devices use the same

frequency band (2.4GHz). If you use the

terminal near a wireless LAN device,

reception interference may occur or the

communications speed may lower. Also,

you may hear noise or have a connection

problem. In these cases, do the following:

･

Keep the Bluetooth device 10 meters or

more away from a wireless LAN device.

･

Within 10 meters, turn off either the

Bluetooth device or the wireless LAN

device.

* The terminal does not communicate

wirelessly with all types of Bluetooth

devices. Bluetooth DUN is not supported.

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks].

Mark [Bluetooth] checkbox.

･

appears on the status bar and

Bluetooth function turns on.

Tap [Bluetooth settings].

Mark [Discoverable] checkbox.

･

The terminal becomes detectable by

other Bluetooth devices for 120

seconds.

Using Bluetooth function

Making the terminal detectable

with the Bluetooth function on

163

File management

You can name the terminal. The name

appears on Bluetooth devices when you use

the Bluetooth function.

Make sure that the Bluetooth

function is on.

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks]

[Bluetooth

settings]

[Device name].

Enter a name.

Tap [OK].

By making pair setting for the terminal and

another Bluetooth device, you can use the

device such as Bluetooth handsfree headset

etc. connecting to the terminal to make and

receive calls.

Once you have made pair setting for the

terminal and a Bluetooth device, the setting

is saved. When making pair setting for the

terminal and a Bluetooth device, you may

need to enter a passkey (PIN). The terminal

automatically tries the generic passkey

"0000". If this passkey does not work, see the

documentation of your Bluetooth device. You

do not need to re-enter the passkey the next

time you connect to a paired Bluetooth

device already set.

You cannot make pair setting for the terminal

and two Bluetooth headsets. However, you

can pair with two or more Bluetooth devices

of different profiles. The terminal supports

the following Bluetooth profiles: A2DP,

AVRCP, HFP, HSP, OPP, PBAP, and SPP.

Entering the terminal's name Making pair setting for the

terminal and Bluetooth device

164

File management

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks]

[Bluetooth settings].

Tap [Scan for devices].

･

A list of detected Bluetooth devices

appears.

Tap a Bluetooth device name to

pair with the terminal.

If necessary, enter the passkey

(PIN).

･

You can use the Bluetooth device that

has been paired. The pairing and

connection status appear below the

device name in the Bluetooth device

list.

･

Some Bluetooth devices make

connections continuously after making

pair setting.

❖

Information

･

Make sure that the Bluetooth function and Bluetooth

detection function of the target device are on.

･

When you make pair setting with the Bluetooth

device supporting Secure Simple Pairing (SSP)

function, a passkey appears on the screen. Check the

passkey and make the pair setting.

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks]

[Bluetooth settings].

Touch and hold a Bluetooth device

name you want to connect.

･

Touch and hold a device with "Pair with

this device" displayed under the device

name.

Tap [Pair & connect].

･

If the pairing is complete, the

connection status appears below the

device name in the Bluetooth device

list. While connecting to a device,

appears in the status bar.

Connecting the terminal with

another Bluetooth device

165

File management

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks]

[Bluetooth settings].

Touch and hold the currently

connected Bluetooth device name.

･

The pairing and connection status is

shown below the connected device

name.

Tap [Disconnect].

･

Alternatively, tap the device name and

tap [OK] on the confirmation screen to

disconnect. The display under the

device name changes to "Paired but

not connected" while the pair setting

remains set. To reconnect, tap the

device name.

From the Home screen, tap

Tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks]

[Bluetooth settings].

Touch and hold the currently

connected Bluetooth device name.

Tap [Disconnect & unpair].

･

Connection disconnects and the pair

setting is canceled.

❖

Information

･

When the terminal is only set to pair with Bluetooth

device (not connected), "Unpair" appears.

Deactivating the connection of

a Bluetooth device

Canceling the pair setting of a

Bluetooth device

166

File management

With Media server, you can share media files

with other client (DLNA: Digital Living

Network Alliance) devices using Wi-Fi

function.

Set Wi-Fi connection (P.112) with another

client device.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Connected devices].

･

If you activate for the first time,

"Welcome!" screen appears. Tap [Done].

Tap

, then tap [Media server].

･

You can set the following options.

❖

Information

･

Tap

to set Wi-Fi connection or check help.

Set Wi-Fi connection with a DLNA device to

allow access from the terminal in advance.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Connected devices].

･

If the device name appears in the server

list, go to Step 4.

Tap [Wireless & networks] to mark

[Wi-Fi] checkbox.

Tap

･

Go back to "Connected devices" screen.

Tap the device name displayed in

the server list and tap the desired

category folder.

Tap a media file to play it.

Sharing files with DLNA

devices via Connected

devices (Media server)

Setting Connected devices

(Media server)

Media server

settings

Rename the terminal (server)

displayed on a client device.

Share contents

Set to connect from a client device

to the terminal via Wi-Fi.

Pending

devices

Manage client devices waiting

access permissions.

Registered

devices

Manage client device registered to

the terminal.

Playing media files in the DLNA

device with the terminal

167

File management

Set Wi-Fi connection on a DLNA device in

advance.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Connected devices].

Tap

, then tap [Media server]

to mark [Share contents]

checkbox.

Tap [OK] to mark [Wi-Fi] checkbox.

･

"Media server turned on" appears in the

status bar.

Tap

and tap and [Gallery].

･

Album list screen appears.

Tap an album, then tap a file you

want to play.

Tap

and [Play on].

･

A "Play on device" screen appears.

Tap a device displayed on the "Play

on device" screen.

･

The file is played by a DLNA device.

Playing a media file in the

terminal with a DLNA device

168

Applications

You can shoot still picture and video by

tapping the shutter icon or screen or using

the camera key (

). You can hold the

camera horizontally or vertically to shoot still

pictures (when shooting with 3D Sweep

Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep

Panorama, hold the camera horizontally). For

recording videos, screen display supports

landscape only. Still pictures and videos are

saved automatically in the internal storage or

a microSD card.

･

Insert a microSD card before using the

camera. All pictures or videos that you

capture on the terminal are stored into the

internal storage or a microSD card. You

cannot take a photo while the terminal is

reading/writing data, for example transferring

a file from Media Go.

･

If you use microSD card with an i-mode

compatible terminal, photos and videos shot

by the terminal cannot be shown.

･

Avoid copyright infringements when you

handle photos, videos, or sound recorded

using the terminal, e.g. copy/edit. In addition,

avoid rights infringements of portraits by

using these photos without consent, altering

them or by other means. Note that capturing

or recording a stage performance,

entertainment or exhibition may be

prohibited even if for personal use.

■

About the Copyright and Portrait rights

Objects, such as movies, still images, and sounds,

recorded using the terminal are prohibited by the

or any other purpose permitted by law. Also, using

or transformation of other person's portrait or

name without his or her permission may violate the

portrait right. When you present recorded images

or sounds in a public place such as on an Internet

home page, make sure to be aware of the copyright

and portrait right. Note that some performances,

shows, and exhibitions may not allow

photography, movie shooting, or sound recording

even for personal use. Transmission of images

related to copyright or beyond the scope provided

in the copyright law is not available.

Please be considerate of the privacy of

individuals around you when taking and

sending photos using camera-equipped

mobile phones.

If you cause the public any trouble using the

terminal, you may be punished under law or

regulations (for example, nuisance

prevention ordinance).

Shooting with the camera

Before using the camera

169

Applications

Note on 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep

Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama

･

In the following cases, 3D Sweep Panorama/

Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama do not

work properly.

- Shooting a moving object

- Shooting the main object that is too close to

the camera

- Shooting an object with repetition of the

same pattern such as a sky, beach, grass, etc.

- Shooting a big object

- Shooting an object with constantly

changing pattern such as a wave, waterfall,

etc.

･

If shooting angle does not increase enough

for 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/

Sweep Panorama within a certain period of

time, the part which was not taken is recorded

in gray.

To avoid this, move the camera faster when

shooting.

･

Because two or more images are joined

together, joints may not recorded smoothly.

･

Images may be blurred or may not be taken in

a dark scene.

･

Under the flickering light source such as a

fluorescent light, you may not be able to

shoot properly since brightness or color

balance of joined image may be unstable.

･

If brightness, color balance and focus point of

whole image to be taken with 3D Sweep

Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep

Panorama are radically different from those of

the focused image, image may not be shot

properly.

･

In the following cases, shooting for 3D Sweep

Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep

Panorama may be stopped.

- Moved the camera too fast/too slow

- Blurred too much

- Moved the camera in the opposite direction

of the shooting

170

Applications

■

Still picture shooting screen

■

Video shooting screen

Select capturing mode

Flash setting (still picture)

Display area of status icons showing selected

settings

Switch between still and video camera

Shutter (still picture)

Start/Stop recording (video)

Recent shooting history

･

Touch the icon on the shooting screen and flick it

to the left of the screen (up when in portrait view)

to display the last 5 shots.

･

Tap to open viewing/playback screen for still

pictures and videos.

･

Tap the icon displayed by touching and holding

to perform the following operations.

: View playback screen of photos and videos

: Share

: Delete

Select scenes

Exposure value setting

Turn Photo light On/Off

❖

Information

･

On the shooting screen, press

to zoom in/

out.

･

On the playback screen of the still pictures and

videos taken recently, tap

to display "Play on",

"Share", "Delete", "Slide show", "Details", "Set as",

"More", "Edit video".

* "Set as" and "More" are displayed on the still

picture viewing screen, "Details" and "Edit video"

are displayed on the video playback screen.

･

To end the camera, tap

Shooting a still picture

Tap the shutter icon ( ) or screen, or use

camera key (

) to shoot a still picture.

Shot still pictures are automatically saved in

the internal storage/microSD card.

Shooting screen and key

operations

Shooting still pictures

171

Applications

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

The still picture shooting screen (P.174)

appears.

■

Tapping the shutter icon ( )

Tap the shutter icon ( ) on the shooting

screen.

･

To take a photo using auto-focus

function, touch and hold the shutter

icon ( ) and release your finger when

the focus frame turns green and sound

beeps. The photo is taken as soon as

you release the finger. If the focus frame

turns red, auto-focus does not operate

correctly.

■

Tapping the screen

On the shooting screen, tap

[Capturing method]

[Touch

capture]

Tap the screen.

･

To take a photo using auto-focus

function, touch and hold the screen

and release your finger when the focus

frame turns green and sound beeps.

The photo is taken as soon as you

release the finger. If the focus frame

turns red, auto-focus does not operate

correctly.

■

Using the camera key (

)

On the shooting screen, press

･

Even if "Capturing method" (P.185) is set

to "On-screen button" or "Touch

capture", you can press

to shoot.

･

To take a photo using auto-focus

function, press

half way and

when the focus frame turns green,

press

the rest of the way down

until it stops. If the focus frame turns

red, auto-focus does not operate

correctly. Press

halfway again.

❖

Information

･

Auto-focus cannot be operated if "Focus mode"

(P.183) is set to "infinity".

･

When you connect Stereo Headset with Microphone

(Sample), commercially available earphone set or

other Bluetooth device, shutter sound may be softer.

172

Applications

Shooting using Quick launch

On the key/SIM/screen unlock

screen, press and hold

for

over a second.

･

The camera is activated to shoot a

photo immediately. Shot pictures are

automatically saved in the internal

storage/microSD card.

❖

Information

･

"Quick launch" (P.185) is set to "Launch and capture"

by default. The operation of Quick launch can be

selected from "Launch and capture", "Launch only",

and "Off". When "Quick launch" is set to "Off", pressing

and holding

for over a second on the key/SIM/

screen unlock screen does not activate the camera.

Using Front camera to shoot pictures

On the shooting screen, tap ,

then tap (Front camera).

Shoot a picture.

･

For information on how to shoot

pictures, see "Shooting a still picture"

(P.174).

❖

Information

･

For using Front camera, "Resolution", "Self-timer",

"Smile detection", "Image stabilizer", "Geotagging",

"Capturing method", "Data storage" can be set. Other

"Still camera setting" (P.181) are not supported by

Front camera.

- "Resolution" can be selected from "1MP 16:9", "1MP

4:3" for Front camera.

- The settings other than "Resolution" take over the

camera settings set at the time when switching.

Using zoom

On the shooting screen, press

❖

Information

･

Zoom is not available while using Front camera/3D

Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep

Panorama.

Adjusting Exposure value

On the shooting screen, tap ,

then tap (Normal).

On the shooting screen, tap

(Exposure value).

Tap or drag the bar to adjust the

exposure value.

173

Applications

You can use face detection to bring an off-

center face into focus. The camera

automatically detects up to 5 faces at a time.

A yellow frame indicates a face to focus on,

and white frames indicate the rest. An

appropriate face is determined by distance

from the camera and off-center balance, and

is focused automatically. You can also tap one

of the frames to select which face should be

in focus.

Setting face detection

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

The still picture shooting screen (P.174)

appears.

On the shooting screen, tap ,

then tap (Normal).

On the shooting screen, tap

then tap "Focus mode" (P.183).

Tap (Face detection).

❖

Information

･

"Scenes" (P.181) is set to "Landscape"/"Night scene"/

"Document", Face detection cannot be used.

Taking a photo using face detection

With Face detection set, point the

camera at the subject.

･

Each detected face is framed (up to 5

faces).

Tap the frame you want to focus on

or let the camera select which face

to focus on without tapping.

･

A yellow frame shows the face in focus.

Shoot a picture.

･

For information on how to shoot

pictures, see "Shooting a still picture"

(P.174).

･

The photo is taken as soon as focus is

set. Shot pictures are automatically

saved in the internal storage/microSD

card.

Face detection

174

Applications

Smile detection allows you to capture a face

just as it smiles. The camera detects up to 5

faces and selects 1 face for smile detection

and auto focus. A yellow frame shows which

face is selected. When the selected face

smiles, the frame turns to green and the

camera automatically takes a photo.

Setting smile detection

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

The still picture shooting screen (P.174)

appears.

On the shooting screen, tap

then tap "Smile detection" (P.183).

･

You can select smile level for the smile

detection feature from "Big smile"/

"Average smile"/"Small smile"/"Off". Set

"Off" to cancel smile detection.

Taking a photo using smile detection

With Smile detection set, point the

camera at the subject.

･

Each detected face is framed (up to 5

faces).

･

The camera selects which face to focus

on. A yellow frame shows the face in

focus.

The camera automatically takes

the photo when the subject in

focus smiles.

･

Shot pictures are automatically saved in

the internal storage/microSD card.

･

If no smile is detected, operate the

steps in "Shooting a still picture" (P.174)

to shoot a picture.

Smile detection

175

Applications

Use Sweep Panorama to shoot panoramic

image with wide angle.

Aligning the white frame on the screen with

the black frame, move the camera slowly

toward the set shooting direction to shoot.

Using 3D Sweep Panorama allows you to

shoot 3D pictures.

Setting 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep

Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

The still picture shooting screen (P.174)

appears.

On the shooting screen, tap ,

then tap (3D Sweep

Panorama)/ (Sweep Multi

Angle)/ (Sweep Panorama).

･

Tap to select "On" or "Off" for "Photo

light" (P.185).

･

For 3D Sweep Panorama, tap to

select "Panorama image size" (P.182).

･

For Sweep Panorama, tap to select

"Shooting direction" (P.185).

Using 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep

Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama to

shoot pictures

With 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep

Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama set,

point the camera at the subject.

Shoot a still picture.

･

For information on how to shoot

pictures, see "Shooting a still picture"

(P.174).

･

A white frame and big black frame

appear on the screen.

Aligning the white frame with the

black frame, slowly move the

camera from left to right.

･

If you change shooting direction for

Sweep Panorama, slowly move the

camera in the set direction.

･

Shot pictures are saved automatically in

the internal storage/microSD card.

Using Sweep Panorama

176

Applications

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

The still picture shooting screen (P.174)

appears.

On the shooting screen, tap

then tap the setting item.

･

Several setting icons are displayed on

the shooting screen in advance. The

displayed setting icons change

depending on the setting conditions.

･

While using 3D Sweep Panorama/

Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama,

tap the setting item icon displayed on

the shooting screen to change the

setting.

･

For setting items and icons, see "Still

camera setting" (P.181).

Tap an option in the selected

setting.

･

If you change setting options, icons

displayed on the shooting screen

change to the set items.

❖

Information

･

On the shooting screen, tap

to display setting

items, which you can touch and hold and drag to the

left (up when the shooting screen is in portrait view)

to change setting item icons displayed in the

shooting screen.

･

To delete a setting item icon displayed on the

recording screen, touch and hold a setting item icon

and drag to displayed in the center of the

screen.

･

"Capturing mode" (P.181) icons cannot be changed

or deleted.

･

Setting item icons cannot be changed or deleted

while using Front camera/3D Sweep Panorama/

Sweep Multi Angle/Sweep Panorama.

Changing the recording

settings

177

Applications

Still camera setting

Item Icon Description

Capturing

mode

Select the shooting method.

Scene

recognition

The camera determines

most suitable scene

effect. A corresponding

scene icon appears

when the scene is

recognized.

Normal A standard shooting

mode.

Front

camera

P. 1 7 6

Sweep

Panorama

P. 1 7 9

Sweep

Multi Angle

Sweep

Panorama

Scenes

Use Scenes to quickly set up the

camera for various scene conditions.

Use when "Capturing mode" is set to

"Normal".

OFF Adjust color shade or

brightness automatically.

Portrait Settings are optimized to

give brighter and

warmer skin tones.

Scenes

Landscape

Shoot landscape

depicting trees with vivid

color and focusing on

distant objects.

Night

scene

Shoot a crisp and clear

night scene. Due to long

exposure time, be careful

not to shake camera.

Night

portrait

Suitable for shooting

persons against the

nightscape background.

Due to long exposure

time, be careful not to

shake camera.

Beach

and snow

Reconstruct beach and

snowy scene brightly

and vividly.

Sports To shoot fast-moving

object, shorten exposure

time to minimize motion

blurring.

Party Shoot an indoor picture

creating good

atmosphere of indoor

lighting. Due to long

exposure time, be careful

not to shake camera.

Document

Use for shooting text or

graphics. It allows to

capture a clear, bright,

and easy to read text.

Item Icon Description

178

Applications

Resolution

Select image sizes and aspect ratios

before shooting. An image with a

higher resolution requires more

memory.

12MP

4:3

12 megapixel image size

with 4:3 aspect ratio.

Suitable for viewing on

normal size screen or

printing in high

resolution.

9MP

16:9

9 megapixel image size

with 16:9 aspect ratio. A

high resolution wide-

screen format. A higher

resolution than full HD.

Suitable for viewing on

wide-screen.

2MP

4:3

2 megapixel image size

with 4:3 aspect ratio.

Suitable for viewing on

normal size screen.

2MP

16:9

2 megapixel image size

with 16:9 aspect ratio.

Suitable for viewing on

wide-screen.

1MP

16:9

1 megapixel image size

with 16:9 aspect ratio.

Use when "Capturing

mode" is set to "Front

camera".

1MP

4:3

1 megapixel image size

with 4:3 aspect ratio. Use

when "Capturing mode"

is set to "Front camera".

Item Icon Description

Panorama

image size

Set image size for 3D Sweep Panorama

Use when "Capturing mode" is set to

"3D Sweep Panorama".

16:9 16:9 aspect ratio. Suitable

for viewing on wide-

screen.

Standard

Standard size for

Panorama image.

Suitable for Panorama

shooting.

Flash

Set whether to turn on the flash when

shooting in the place where lighting

conditions are poor or there is a

backlight.

Auto Turn on the flash

automatically according

to the brightness.

Fill flash Always turn on the flash

regardless of the

brightness.

Red-eye

reduction

Reduce red-eye effect

caused by the flash.

Off The flash does not turn

on.

･

Sometimes still picture

quality can be better

without the flash.

When you do not turn

on the flash, use the

self-timer to avoid

blurring still picture.

Item Icon Description

179

Applications

Self-timer

Use it to take self-portraits, or group

photos where everyone can be in the

photo. You can also use the self-timer

to avoid camera shake.

(10 sec.)

Tap or press

shoot 10 seconds later.

(2 sec.)

Tap or press

shoot 2 seconds later.

Off Tap or press

shoot immediately.

Smile

detection

Shoot faces at the moment they smile.

The camera detects up to 5 faces and

selects 1 face for smile detection and

auto focus. When the selected face

smiles, the camera automatically

shoots.

･

You can select smile level for the

smile detection feature.

Big

smile

Shoot when a big smile

is detected.

Average

smile

Shoot when a smile is

detected.

Small

smile

Shoot when even a tiny

smile is detected.

Off Cancel smile detection.

Item Icon Description

Focus mode

Set focus controls. Use when

"Capturing mode" is set to "Normal".

Single

autofocus

The camera

automatically focuses on

the subject.

Multi

autofocus

The camera

automatically focuses on

several points on the

shooting screen. The

white focus frames turn

to green if focused on.

Face

detection

P. 1 7 7

Infinity Use when shooting at a

distance. Focus on

subjects far away.

Subjects close to the

camera may be blurred.

Touch

focus

Tap an object on the

shooting screen. The

focus frame moves onto

the tapped place.

Exposure

value

P. 1 7 6

Item Icon Description

180

Applications

ISO

Set ISO sensitivity. Shoot clear picture

reducing blur even in a place where

lightning is poor. Use when "Capturing

mode" is set to "Normal".

Auto Set to the appropriate

sensitivity between

" 100" and "

800".

100 Set sensitivity to 100.

200 Set sensitivity to 200.

400 Set sensitivity to 400.

800 Set sensitivity to 800.

White

balance

The white balance setting adjusts the

color balance according to the light

source. Use when "Capturing mode" is

set to "Normal".

Auto Adjust the color balance

automatically to the light

source.

Incandescent

Adjust the color balance

for lighting like

incandescent bulb.

Fluorescent

Adjust the color balance

for lighting like

fluorescent.

Daylight Adjust the color balance

for a sunny place.

Cloudy Adjust the color balance

for a cloudy sky or

shaded area.

Item Icon Description

Metering

Measure the brightness on the

shooting screen to determine a well-

balanced exposure automatically. Use

when "Capturing mode" is set to

"Normal".

Center Put emphasis at the

center of the shooting

screen and measure

photometry at whole

view finder to adjust the

exposure.

Average Adjust the exposure

based on the brightness

of the whole shooting

screen.

Spot Measure photometry

only at the center of the

shooting screen to adjust

the exposure.

Image

stabilizer

Compensate for photo blur caused by

small movements of the hand while

shooting. Use when "Capturing mode"

is set to "Normal".

On Reduce blur.

Off The stabilizer is not used.

Item Icon Description

181

Applications

Geotagging

Tag photos location information for the

shooting spot.

You need to mark "Use wireless

networks" (P.211) or "Use GPS satellites"

(P.211) checkbox in "Location &

security" settings beforehand. For

details on location information, see

"About location ser vices" (P.209).

･

Geotag (location information)

enables to specify the shooting spot

of the photo.

On Location information is

added to the taken

photo.

Off Shooting location

cannot be viewed on a

map.

Capturing

method

Set the shooting method.

On-screen

button

Set whether to tap the

shutter icon on the

shooting screen or press

to shoot.

Touch

capture

Set whether to tap the

shooting screen or press

to shoot.

Camera key

only

Set to enable shooting

by pressing

Item Icon Description

Shooting

direction

Set shooting direction for Sweep

Panorama. Use when "Capturing mode"

is set to "Sweep Panorama".

Right Shoot moving the

camera from left to right.

Left Shoot moving the

camera from right to left.

Down Shoot moving the

camera downward.

Up Shoot moving the

camera upward.

Photo light

Use the photo light to shoot when

lighting conditions are poor or in

backlight. Use when "Capturing mode"

is set to "3D Sweep Panorama", "Sweep

Multi Angle", or "Sweep Panorama".

On The photo light turns on.

Off The photo light does not

turn on.

Quick

launch

On the key/SIM/screen unlock screen,

press and hold

for over a second

to activate the camera.

Launch

and capture

Activate the camera to

shoot a photo

immediately.

Launch

only

Activate the camera.

Off Cancel quick launcher.

Item Icon Description

182

Applications

❖

Note

･

Some settings cannot be used in combination with

one another.

Recording

Tap the start recording ( )/stop recording ( )

icon or recording screen, or use camera key

(

) to record video. For video recording

screen, only landscape screen is supported.

Recorded data is automatically saved in the

internal storage/microSD card.

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

Tap to display the video recording

screen (P.174).

■

Tapping the start recording ( )/stop

recording ( ) icon

On the recording screen, tap to start

recording

Tap to stop recording.

■

Tapping the screen

On the recording screen, tap

"Capturing method"

"Touch

capture"

Tap the screen to start

recording

Tap the screen to stop

recording.

■

Using camera key (

)

On the recording screen, press

start recording

Press

to stop

recording.

･

Even if "Capturing method" (P.191) is set

to "On-screen button" or "Touch

capture", you can press

to start/

stop recording.

❖

Information

･

Do not cover the microphone with fingers etc. when

recording videos.

･

When you connect Stereo Headset with Microphone

(Sample), commercially available earphone set or

other Bluetooth device, shutter sound may be softer.

Using Front video camera to record

On the recording screen, tap ,

then tap (Front video).

Start/Stop recording.

･

For information on how to start/stop

recording, see "Recording" (P.186).

Data

storage

Set the saving location for shot images.

Internal

storage

Save shot images in the

internal storage.

SD card Save shot images in a

microSD card.

Recording videos

Item Icon Description

183

Applications

❖

Information

･

For using Front video camera, "Video size", "Self-

timer", "Microphone", "Capturing method", "Data

storage" can be set. Other "Video camera setting"

(P.188) are not supported by Front camera.

- The settings take over the video settings set at the

time when switching (if "Video size" is set to "Full

HD", the video size is changed to "HD 720p").

Adjusting Exposure value

On the recording screen, tap

(Exposure value).

Tap or drag the bar to adjust the

exposure value.

On the recording screen, tap the shooting

history at the bottom left or right to display

video, tap

and tap [Edit video] to crop

the part of video to save.

On the recording screen, tap the

shooting history to display video.

Tap

and tap [Edit video].

･

(Progress bar) appears at the bottom of

the screen.

Drag at the left of the progress

bar to the right, to the starting

point of cropping.

Drag at the right of the progress

bar to the left, to the end point of

cropping.

･

Tap the screen to play the cropped part

for check.

Tap [Save].

･

Tap [Cancel] to return to the video

playback screen without saving the

cropped video.

❖

Information

･

If "Video size" (P.189) is set to "Full HD", videos cannot

be cropped.

From the Home screen, press and

hold

for over a second.

･

Tap to display the video recording

screen (P.174).

On the video recording screen, tap

, then tap the setting item.

･

There are 4 setting icons on the

recording screen in advance. The

displayed setting icons change

depending on the setting conditions.

･

For setting items and icons, see "Video

camera setting" (P.188).

Cropping video Changing the recording

settings

184

Applications

Tap an option in the selected

setting.

･

If you change setting options, icons

displayed on the shooting screen

change to the set items.

❖

Information

･

On the recording screen, tap

to display setting

items. If you touch and hold an item and then drag it

to the left, you can replace setting item icons

displayed on the recording screen.

･

To delete a setting item icon displayed on the

recording screen, touch and hold a setting item icon

and drag to displayed in the center of the

screen.

･

"Recording mode" (P.188) icons cannot be replaced

or deleted.

Video camera setting

Item Icon Description

Recording

mode

Select the recording method.

Video

camera

P. 1 8 6

Front

video

P. 1 8 6

Scenes

Use Scenes to quickly set up the

camera for various scene conditions.

Off Adjust color shade or

brightness automatically.

Portrait Settings are optimized to

give brighter and

warmer skin tones.

Landscape

Shoot landscape

depicting trees with vivid

color and focusing on

distant objects.

Night Suitable for dark places.

Beach

and snow

Reconstruct beach and

snowy scene brightly

and vividly.

Sports To record fast-moving

object, shorten exposure

time to minimize motion

blurring.

Party Shoot an indoor picture

creating good

atmosphere of indoor

lighting.

185

Applications

Video size

Full HD Full wide HD format with

16:9 aspect ratio.

1920

1080 pixels

Use when "Capturing

mode" is set to "Video

camera".

720p

HD format with 16:9

aspect ratio.

1280

720 pixels

VGA VGA format with 4:3

aspect ratio.

640

480 pixels

Photo light

Use the photo light to record when

lighting conditions are poor or in

backlight.

On The photo light turns on.

Off The photo light does not

turn on. Sometimes the

video quality can be

better without a photo

light, even if lighting

conditions are poor.

Recording a good video

without using the photo

light requires a steady

hand.

Item Icon Description

Self-timer

Use it to record group videos where

everyone can be in the video.

On (10

sec.)

Tap or press

start recording 10

seconds later.

On (2

sec.)

Tap or press

start recording 2 seconds

later.

Off Tap or press

start recording

immediately.

Focus mode

Single

autofocus

The camera

automatically focuses on

the subject.

Face

detection

P. 1 7 7

Infinity Use when shooting at a

distance. Focus on

subjects far away.

Subjects close to the

camera may be blurred.

Exposure

value

P. 1 8 7

Item Icon Description

186

Applications

White

balance

The white balance setting adjusts the

color balance according to the light

source.

Auto Adjust the color balance

automatically to the light

source.

Incandescent

Adjust the color balance

for lighting like

incandescent bulb.

Fluorescent

Adjust the color balance

for lighting like

fluorescent.

Daylight Adjust the color balance

for a sunny place.

Cloudy Adjust the color balance

for a cloudy sky or

shaded area.

Item Icon Description

Metering

Measure the brightness on the

shooting screen to determine a well-

balanced exposure automatically.

Center Put emphasis at the

center of the shooting

screen and measure

photometry at whole

view finder to adjust the

exposure.

Average Adjust the exposure

based on the brightness

of the whole shooting

screen.

Spot Measure photometry

only at the center of the

shooting screen to adjust

the exposure.

Image

stabilizer

Compensate for movements of the

camera while recording a video.

On Reduce blur.

Off The stabilizer is not used.

Microphone

Select whether to pick up the

surrounding sound when recording

videos.

On Pick up the surrounding

sound when recording

videos.

Off Do not pick up the

surrounding sound

when recording videos.

Item Icon Description

187

Applications

❖

Note

･

Some settings cannot be used in combination with

one another.

You can save the current displayed screen as

an image (screen shot).

Captured screen shots are shown on the

"Pictures" album in the Gallery (P.193).

On the screen you want to capture,

press and hold

for over a

second.

･

Phone options menu appears.

Tap [Take screenshot].

･

A screen shot is taken and a message

notifying the saving location appears

on the screen.

❖

Information

･

By tapping [Share]/[Set as] on the shooting

completion screen, you can share (send) the image

via Bluetooth or email, or register as wallpaper or

contact icon.

Capturing

method

Set the shooting method.

On-screen

button

Set to start/stop

recording videos by

tapping the record

starting/stopping icon or

pressing

Touch

capture

Set to start/stop

recording videos by

tapping the recording

screen or pressing

Camera key

only

Set to start/stop

recording by pressing

Data

storage

Set the saving location for recorded

videos.

Internal

storage

Save recorded videos in

the internal storage.

SD card Save recorded videos in a

microSD card.

Item Icon Description

Capturing the screenshot

188

Applications

You can view/play multimedia contents

(music, photos, videos, etc.) on "Music

Player", "Gallery", "Media Player", etc.,

respectively.

You can play photos and videos shot by the

terminal, transfer files to the built-in storage

by connecting to a PC, and play multimedia

content of the following file formats

downloaded from the Internet.

For details on operations for copying files by

connecting to a PC, see "Transferring and

moving data" (P.158).

Avoid copyright infringements when you

handle photos, videos, or sound recorded

using the terminal, e.g. copy/edit. In addition,

avoid rights infringements of portraits by

using these photos without consent, altering

them or by other means. Note that capturing

or recording a stage performance,

entertainment or exhibition may be

prohibited even if for personal use.

Please be considerate of the privacy of

individuals around you when taking and

sending photos using camera-equipped

mobile phones.

Playing multimedia

content

Type File format

Sound

MP3, 3GPP, MP4, AMR, AMRWB, SMF, XMF,

WAV, iMelody, RTTTL/RTX, OTA, Ogg vorbis

Still

image

JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP

Video

3GPP, MP4

189

Applications

Connect the plug of Stereo

Headset with Microphone

(Sample) to headset connector of

the terminal.

･

Check the connecting direction to

connect correctly. Wrong connection

may cause damage.

❖

Information

･

When you listen to Music player/FM radio with

Stereo Headset with Microphone (Sample)

connecting to the terminal, you can switch on/off by

pressing the switch of Stereo Headset with

Microphone (Sample). However, operation may differ

depending on the conditions of use.

･

If receiving a call when using Stereo Headset with

Microphone (Sample), music stops, and the ringtone

sounds.

- If receiving a call when using Music player, playing

music resumes when the call ends.

- If receiving a call when using Media player, playing

music resumes by tapping the play key on the

Media player screen after the call ends.

Images, photos and videos you took can be

viewed and played. Also, use Media Go to

transfer content to the terminal and to take

content from an external device. For details,

refer to "Using microUSB cable" (P.158).

Using Stereo Headset with

Microphone

Viewing photos/videos

190

Applications

Photos and videos that you took or saved in

the internal storage or microSD card from a

PC are displayed in albums.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Gallery].

･

Album list screen appears.

･

If you signed in online service available

to be synchronized such as Facebook/

Google+/Picasa, online albums also

appear after synchronization.

Tap an album you want to view.

･

A screen listing Photo/Video files in

album appears.

❖

Information

･

When you tap an album, then tap to

the upper right of the screen, the albums are sorted

by date. When you tap the date album, the list of all

files appears. The files of selected date appear with

the thicker frame than the other files.

･

Depending on the number of photos saved, it may

take some times to load all photos on the screen.

■

Album list screen

Camera album (Camera) : Display still picture/videos

saved in the internal storage.

Camera album (100ANDRO) : Display still pictures/

videos saved in the microSD card.

Camera button : Activate the camera.

3D album : View 3D Sweep Panorama/Sweep Multi

Angle

･

Tap / to switch display.

Album list

Viewing photo/video album

191

Applications

❖

Information

･

Still pictures shot with Sweep Multi Angle also

appear in the album of 3D Sweep Panorama.

･

Still pictures saved in (3D Sweep Panorama)

can be viewed three-dimensionally by connecting

with a 3D viewing device.

･

Still pictures saved in (Sweep Multi Angle) can

be viewed three-dimensionally by tilting the

terminal left and right.

On the photo/video file list screen, you can

select files in the album to operate them at a

time.

On the photo/video file list screen,

touch and hold a file.

･

The checkbox is marked and file is

selected. Tap another file in a row to

select two or more files.

･

Tap a selected file to unmark the

checkbox.

Tap

, then tap displayed

menu.

･

You can perform the following

operations.

･

The items vary depending on the

selected file.

･

Some items cannot be operated in

some files.

Operating Photo/Video files in

album

Play on

Detect DLNA device and connect.

Select a transfer method and send

photos/videos.

Delete

Delete selected photos/videos.

Select All

Select all files in album.

Deselect All

Deselect all files in the album.

Details

Display title, type, date, album

name, location, etc.

･

Only displayed in files of the

albums provided by online

service such as Facebook/

Google+/Picasa.

More Details

: Display title, type, date,

album name, location, etc.

Rotate Left

: Rotate a picture 90

degrees counterclockwise.

Rotate Right

: Rotate a picture 90

degrees clockwise.

Show on map

: Display location

information included in the image

on the map.

Edit video

: Crop the video partially

to save.

･

The items vary depending on the

selected file.

192

Applications

❖

Information

･

While selecting a file, tap

and tap [Play on] to

display the connection device selection screen (if

you do not connect Wi-Fi network in advance, tap

[Settings] to display the setting screen for wireless &

networks). Select a device detected on the

connection device selection screen, and tap the

device name to play on to share a file between a

DLNA device and the terminal.

･

For shared files, file size and the file type are not

particularly limited, but may be limited by the

application to transfer. DRM content cannot be

shared.

･

Before selecting a file, tap

to automatically

mark the file displayed near the middle of the screen.

If once a certain file is selected, the file in the middle

is not always marked.

･

On the photo viewing screen, tap

to operate

picture files individually.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Gallery].

Tap an album.

･

A list screen of files in the album

appears.

Tap a photo to view it.

■

Still picture viewing screen

Album information

Zoom out

Zoom In

❖

Information

･

On the viewing screen, tap

to display "Play on",

"Share", "Delete", "Slide show", "Set as", "More", "Set as

wallpaper", "Details".

* "Set as wallpaper" and "Details" only appear in

images of the albums provided by an online

service such as Facebook/Google+/Picasa.

･

The items vary depending on the selected file.

･

From the photo viewing screen for the Facebook

album, you can post comments or "Like" onto

Facebook.

Starting slideshow

On the still picture viewing screen,

tap

, then tap [Slide show].

･

A slideshow of the photos or first

frames of videos in the album starts.

Viewing photos

193

Applications

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Gallery].

Tap an album.

･

A list screen of files in the album

appears. icon is displayed on the

video files.

Tap a video.

■

Video playback screen

Progress bar : Display the playback position in the

playback duration

Marker : Playback position. Drag to change the

playback position

Display the Media player list screen

Playback volume adjustment bar

Auto-rotate screen On/Off switch

Play/Pause key

Adjusting the volume of a video

On the video playback

screen,press top or bottom of

❖

Information

･

Volume can be adjusted by operating the playback

volume adjustment bar on the video playback

screen.

Fast forwarding and rewinding a

video

Drag the progress bar marker right

or left.

Playing video

194

Applications

YouTube is a free online video streaming

service. You can play, search for and upload

videos.

･

A packet communication charge is applied

when downloading or uploading video

content using 3G network.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [YouTube].

･

YouTube video list screen appears.

･

You can tap

, then tap [Browse] to

select video from each category.

Tap a video to play it.

･

While playing a video, tap the screen to

display the play control keys which you

can switch Play/Pause. Double-tap to

switch landscape/portrait. In landscape,

drag the marker on the progress bar at

the bottom of the play screen left or

right to change playing point.

･

Tap

to stop playing and return to

the video list screen.

･

To quit YouTube, tap

❖

Information

･

For movies with caption function which can display

subtitles, "CC" appears on the playback screen in the

landscape mode. For your first activation, tap [CC]

and tap language for the subtitles.

While playing a video, double-tap

the screen to switch to the

landscape screen.

Tap the screen to display the play

control keys, then tap [HQ].

❖

Information

･

A video plays in high quality when Wi-Fi is

connected.

･

On the YouTube screen, tap

, then tap

[Settings], then mark [High quality on mobile]

checkbox to always play video in high quality even

when 3G network is connected.

Playing YouTube video

Playing YouTube videos in high

quality

195

Applications

On the YouTube video list screen,

tap

, then tap [Search].

Enter the search keyword.

Scroll the result and tap a video

you want to play.

On the YouTube video list screen,

tap

, then tap [Settings].

[Clear search history]

Tap [OK].

You can watch photos and videos on

television by connecting the terminal using

an HDMI cable (type D).

Connect the terminal with Home

screen or application screen

displayed to a TV using an HDMI

cable.

■

When the Home screen is displayed

･

Activate TV launcher automatically.

■

When the Applications screen is

displayed

･

, appear in the status bar. Drag

the status bar downwards and tap [TV

launcher] to activate TV launcher.

Searching for a video with

keywords

Deleting search history

Connecting the terminal to

TV to watch photos and

videos

Connecting TV and activating

an application by TV launcher

196

Applications

Scroll an icon left and right to

select the desired application.

･

When you connect an HDMI cable for

the first time, "HDMI cable connected"

appears.

- On the "HDMI cable connected"

screen, tap [Learn more] to show how

to use the TV remote controller.

･

You may be able to operate

applications with the TV remote

controller.

❖

Information

･

While HDMI is connected, drag the status bar

downward and tap [HDMI connected] to set HDMI

control or output. Operations may not be available

depending on the TV remote controller.

･

On the TV launcher screen, select an album art in

Music player on the upper left to display Music player

screen.

･

On the TV launcher screen, select [Add] and select

the desired shortcut to add the shortcut to the TV

launcher screen.

･

On the TV launcher screen, select [Home] to display

the Home screen of the terminal.

･

On the option menu, select [Rearrange] to rearrange

shortcuts on the TV launcher screen.

･

Removing an HDMI cable severs connection,

however, TV may remain to HDMI input mode.

Follow the instructions on the TV to switch to digital

terrestrial television mode, etc.

･

When you do not use HDMI connection, remove the

HDMI cable. If the HDMI cable remains connected,

the battery may be consumed quickly.

You can browse and listen to your music,

playlists and podcasts using Music player.

Tap [MY MUSIC] tab on the Music player

screen, you can browse and play audio

content saved in the internal storage or

microSD card by category.

❖

Note

･

Do not perform "Unmount SD card" while a track is

playing.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Music player].

･

The Music player screen appears.

Tap [MY MUSIC] tab.

Browse tracks by tapping TRACKS/

ALBUMS/ARTISTS/PLAYLISTS/

SensMe

™

channels/MY FAVORITES

category.

･

When a shortcut is added, you can also

tap the shortcut to view/play a track.

For adding a shortcut, see "Adding a

shortcut" (P.202).

Tap a track to play it.

Music player

Playing music

197

Applications

■

Music player screen

Playing tab

Artist name, song title, album title

Favorites/"Like" icon

･

Display when added to Favorites or "Like"

specified.

Album art : Tap to display "Like"/Add to favorites/

Play on device/Play queue.

･

"Like" appears if you log in to Facebook.

[Previous] key : Go to the previous track, or to the

beginning of the track in the current playlist.

Progress bar : Resume playback from the specified

point by dragging or tapping.

Track play time

My MUSIC tab : Display categories, TRACKS/

ALBUMS/ARTISTS/PLAYLISTS/SensMe

™

channels/

MY FAVORITES.

Infinite button : Connect to Google, Wikipedia,

YouTube, etc. to display related information of the

current track.

Play/Pause key

[Next] key : Go to the next track in the current

playlist.

❖

Information

･

On the playback screen of the Music player, tap

to display "Shuffle mode", "Repeat mode", "Equalizer",

"Edit".

- Tap [Equalizer] to change sound quality with

"Equalizer" tab, or to select surround effect for

headphones with "More" tab, or to set xLOUD

™

on/off for speakers.

- Tap [Edit] to enter information such as title of the

track, artist, album, release year, number of track

manually. Alternatively, tap [Edit album art], then

set album art downloaded from network or select

an image from Gallery to set album art. Tap [Save]

in the "Edit music info" screen to display edited

contents on the music player screen.

･

On the playback screen of the Music player, tap

album art and tap [Play queue] to display playing

track and the list containing the track.

- You can switch to play/pause the playing track,

and change the track by tapping other track in the

list.

- Touch and hold a track to display menu items such

as Send, Add to playlist, Set as ring tone, etc.

- Tap [Save] to save tracks on the list as a playlist.

- Drag up and down on the left of the track to

change order.

- To add a track to the list, touch and hold the

desired track from the category of TRACKS/

ALBUMS/ARTISTS/PLAYLISTS/MY FAVORITES, and

tap [Queue track].

･

On the track list of each category, Tap

display "Download music info".

- Tap [Download music info] and tap [Start] to

download album art, artist image, title of track,

information for artist, album, then manually refresh

album information.

198

Applications

･

On the unlocking screen, flick left around date to

display the Music player widget to operate by

tapping Play/Pause/[Rewind]/[Forward] key without

unlocking the keys. While playing music, Music

player widget automatically appears on the key

unlock screen.

･

You can return to the Home screen to perform

another operation while listening to the Music player

in the background. To return to the playback screen

of the Music player, from the Home screen, tap

and [Music player], or drag the status bar down to

tap playing music title from the Notification panel.

Adjusting the volume

While playing music, press top or

bottom of

Adding a shortcut

You can add a shortcut of track or album to

MY MUSIC screen.

In the Music player screen, tap [MY

MUSIC] tab.

Tap TRACKS/ALBUMS/ARTISTS/

PLAYLISTS/SensMe

™

channels/MY

FAVORITES category.

Touch and hold a track or album

you want to add as a shortcut.

Tap [Add as shortcut].

❖

Information

･

To move a shortcut or tile for each category in MY

MUSIC screen, touch and hold a shortcut or tile for

each category and drag to the desired location.

･

To delete a shortcut in MY MUSIC screen, touch and

hold a shortcut and drag to displayed at the

right of the screen.

Sharing track

You can share (send) files by Bluetooth, email

attachment, infrared communication.

In the Music player screen, tap [MY

MUSIC] tab.

Tap TRACKS/ALBUMS/ARTISTS/

PLAYLISTS/MY FAVORITES

category.

Touch and hold a track you want to

share.

Tap [Send].

Select sending method and send.

･

Mark [Use by default for this action.]

checkbox not to display the application

selection screen next time.

❖

Information

･

For shared (to be sent) files, file size and the file type

are not particularly limited, but may be limited by the

application to transfer. DRM content cannot be

shared.

199

Applications

Deleting a track

In the Music player screen, tap [MY

MUSIC] tab.

Tap TRACKS/ALBUMS/ARTISTS/

PLAYLISTS/MY FAVORITES

category.

Touch and hold a track you want to

delete.

Tap [Delete]

[Delete].

Using a track as a ringtone

In the Music player screen, tap [MY

MUSIC] tab.

Tap TRACKS/ALBUMS/ARTISTS/

PLAYLISTS/MY FAVORITES

category.

Touch and hold a track you want to

use.

Tap [Set as ringtone].

In Music player, you can create new playlists

with your desired tracks.

You can use Media Go (P.162) to maintain

your music library and create your own

playlists. Playlists that you create by yourself

are stored on the terminal in the m3u format.

You can connect the terminal to a PC using

the supplied microUSB cable and can use the

internal storage or a microSD card as a

removal disk. For details, refer to "Using

microUSB cable" (P.158).

Creating a playlist

In the Music player screen, tap [MY

MUSIC] tab.

Tap [PLAYLISTS]

[Create new

playlist].

Tap the entry box to enter a

playlist name and tap [OK].

Mark the service you want to post

and tap [Save].

Playlist

200

Applications

Playing Playlists

In the Music player screen, tap [MY

MUSIC] tab.

Tap [PLAYLISTS].

･

The following playlists appear by

default.

Tap a playlist you want to

play

Tap a track.

･

The playlist plays from the track you tap.

With Android Market, you can directly access

useful applications or fun games which you

can download and install on the terminal.

And you can send feedback and comments

about an application, or report objectionable

application or incompatible application with

the terminal as an inappropriate content.

･

To use Android Market, you need to set

Google account (P.132).

･

Some applications and games are free of

charge, and the others are paid. In the

applications list of Market, distinction

between free and paid is clearly specified. For

details on purchasing, returning and

refunding of paid applications, see "Help"

(P.205).

From the Home screen, tap

[Market].

･

When you open Android Market for the

first time, the Terms of Service for

Android Market window appears. Tap

[Accept].

My favorites

Display the list of tracks in My

favorites.

Newly added

Display the list of tracks newly

added.

Most played

Display the list of frequently played

tracks.

Never played

Display the list of available tracks

which have not played wholly.

Using Android Market

Opening Android Market

201

Applications

❖

Information

･

Be sure to check the security of application, then

install it at your own risk. The terminal may be

infected with a virus and the data may be damaged.

･

NTT DOCOMO is not liable for malfunctions, if any,

caused by the application you installed. In such case,

the repair is charged even during the warranty

period.

･

NTT DOCOMO is not liable for any disadvantage

brought to you or any third party due to an

application you installed.

･

Some applications automatically perform packet

communications. Packet communication is kept

active unless you disconnect it or the time-out is

occurred. To disconnect packet communication

manually, from the Home screen, tap

and

[Settings]

[Wireless & networks]

Tap [Mobile

networks] and then unmark [Data enabled].

･

Some applications may be updated automatically.

When you need help or have any questions

about Android Market, in the Andoroid

Market screen, tap

and tap [Help]. The

Browser opens the Android Market Help web

page.

Timescape

™

(hereinafter referred to as

Timescape) displays various information such

as Facebook, Foursquare, Twitter or mixi

updates, etc. in chronological order. You can

see a tile preview of events before choosing

to view the full content. With (infinite

button), you can view all communication

information related to the registered

contacts. (P.208)

❖

Information

･

To make best use of Timescape, you can set up your

social networking service (SNS) account.

･

Note that, you cannot view emails of Gmail or other

Email application accounts in Timescape.

･

If you do not have a Facebook account, you can

create a new account at http://www.facebook.com.

･

If you do not have a Foursquare account, you can

create a new account at https://ja.foursquare.com.

･

If you do not have a Twitter account, you can create a

new account at http://www.twitter.com.

･

If you do not have a mixi account, you can create a

new account at http://mixi.jp (in Japanese only).

･

You can check the update of set Facebook,

Foursquare, Twitter or mixi by Timescape.

Help

Timescape

™

202

Applications

･

The first time you start Timescape, a setup

wizard will guide you the necessary steps to

set up account.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Timescape

™

Tap a tile.

If you want, enter your Facebook/

Foursquare/Twitter/mixi account

information.

Tap [Done].

❖

Information

･

In the setup wizard, tap [Extension search] on the

account registration screen to connect to Android

Market and search new services for Timescape.

･

After completion of setup wizard, you can change

the settings. On the Timescape screen, tap

and

tap [Settings].

･

If the automatic update of Facebook/Foursquare/

Twitter/mixi is set, you can check information update

sooner; however, the battery runs out quickly. To

save the battery, set to manual update.

Latest comment : Display the latest comments

posted to Facebook/Foursquare/Twitter/mixi.

･

To narrow the services to post down, use filter.

Tile : Display various information such as Facebook,

Foursquare, Twitter or mixi friend's updates in

chronological order.

Filter : Tap a filter item to narrow the information

down to a certain type.

･

Display order of filters may differ.

Scrolling through tiles in Timescape

Drag a tile up and down.

Previewing tiles in Timescape

Select a tile to view the content on the tile.

Tap a tile.

Setting up Timescape Timescape screen

203

Applications

Filtering the displayed tile

Tap the filter icons on the

Timescape screen.

Refreshing the Timescape screen

When you refresh the Timescape screen, the

terminal connects to the Internet to update

information from your Facebook, Foursquare,

Twitter and mixi whose accounts are set in

Timescape.

On the Timescape screen, tap

and tap [Refresh].

Posting to Facebook, Foursquare,

Twitter, mixi from Timescape

On the Timescape screen, tap

and tap [Update status].

Mark the service you want to post

and tap [Continue].

Enter the text and tap [Post].

Filter icons

Filter Icon Displayed tile

All tiles

Updates from your Facebook contacts

Updates from your Foursquare contacts

Updates from your Twitter contacts

Updates from your mixi contacts

204

Applications

The following icons on a tile indicate a type of

event.

Displaying tile information

On the Timescape screen, tap a

tile.

When you tap a tile, (infinite button) may

appear in the upper right corner. By tapping

, you can view the communication log by

registered information in the contacts or tile

filter event.

Viewing the registered information of

contacts in Timescape

On the Timescape screen, tap a

tile.

Tap .

･

Communication logs and information

related to the selected tile by event

appear. Flick the filter at the bottom of

the screen to switch displayed

information.

Displaying the Timescape setting

screen

On the Timescape screen, tap

, then tap [Settings].

･

You can set the following operations.

Tile icons

Icon Event

A Facebook update. Tap the tile to

display the update.

A Foursquare update. Tap the tile to

display the update.

A Twitter update. Tap the tile to display

the update.

A mixi update. Tap the tile to display the

update.

The infinite button in

Timescape

Timescape settings

Update mode

Set your Facebook/Foursquare/

Twitter/mixi account information to

be updated manually/automatically

when Timescape is activated.

Timescape

™

content

Change a content type displayed in

Timescape.

Set up services

Set Facebook/Foursquare/Twitter/

mixi account or search new service

of Timescape.

205

Applications

There are two ways to find your location,

using Mobile networks with Wi-Fi (Wireless

network) or GPS. Wireless network

technology determines your position fast but

accuracy may vary. If you use GPS technology

it may take a little longer, but it will find your

exact position. You can enable both Wireless

network and GPS to benefit from both

technologies when trying to find your

position.

The terminal has a GPS receiver that uses

satellite signals to calculate your location.

Some GPS features use the Internet. Data

rates and charges may apply.

When you use functions that require the GPS

receiver to find your location, make sure you

have a clear view of the sky. If the GPS

receiver does not find your location after a

few minutes, you should move to another

location. To help the search, stand still and do

not cover the GPS/Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna

section (P.29). The first time you use the GPS it

may take up to 10 minutes before your

location is found.

･

Use the GPS system with great care. DOCOMO

is not liable for any damage caused by

abnormality of the system.

･

Note that DOCOMO shall have no liabilities for

any purely economic loss including those due

to missing a chance to check the

measurement (communication) results

because of external factors (including the

running out of the battery), such as a failure,

malfunction, or any other problems of the

terminal or the power failure.

About location services

GPS function

206

Applications

･

You cannot use the terminal as a navigation

device for an aircraft, vehicle, and person.

Note that DOCOMO shall have no liabilities

whatsoever even if you suffer damage or loss

while performing a navigation using the

location information.

･

You cannot use the terminal as a high-

accuracy measurement GPS. Note that

DOCOMO shall have no liabilities whatsoever

even if you suffer damage or loss due to a

deviation of the location information.

･

The GPS signals cannot be easily received

near a vehicle's sun visor with metal parts.

･

GPS is operated by the U.S. Department of

Defense. The department controls the

accuracy of the system, and manages the

system. Therefore, GPS radio wave condition

may be controlled (degradation of accuracy,

suspension of radio wave transmission, etc.) at

the discretion of the U.S. Department of

Defense.

･

Some wireless communications products

(mobile phone, data detectors and some

others) block satellite signals and also causes

instability of signal reception.

･

Some map displays based on location

information (latitude/longitude information)

may be not accurate due to some countries'

or regions' regulations.

■

Where radio waves are difficult to

receive

Note that radio waves may not be received

or it may be difficult to receive radio waves

in the following conditions, since GPS uses

radio waves from a satellite.

･

Inside or immediately under a building

･

Inside a bag or box

･

Inside or under a thick covering of trees

･

In a car, inside a train compartment

･

When there are obstructions (people or

objects) near the terminal

･

Inside a basement or tunnel, and below

the ground or water

･

In buildings-clustered or residential area

･

Near a high-voltage cable

･

Bad weather such as heavy rain or snow

❖

Note

･

If some of the GPS functions are not available, or if

none of them are, check that your contract includes

the use of the Internet, and see "Wireless & networks"

(P.109).

･

NTT DOCOMO is not liable for navigation services or

for the accuracy of location services.

207

Applications

Enabling GPS function

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Location & security].

Tap [Use GPS satellites].

Read the note and tap [Agree].

･

[Use GPS satellites] is marked.

Enabling Wireless networks to find

position

･

Enable to search a current location using

mobile network and Wi-Fi.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Location & security].

Tap [Use wireless networks].

Read the note and tap [Agree].

Read the note on location

information and tap [Agree].

･

[Use wireless networks] is marked.

･

Wireless network users' location

information is stored without specifying

who they are. Some location

information is stored even when the

application is not running.

The Google Maps application lets you view

your current location, find other locations

and calculate routes. When you start the

Google Maps application, your approximate

location is shown using information from

nearby mobile towers. Your location is

updated with a more precise position when

the GPS receiver finds your location.

❖

Information

･

Make sure to enable the current location information

setting before trying to get your position.

･

To use Google Maps, enable data connection (3G/

GPRS) or connect to Wi-Fi.

･

Google Maps does not cover the whole world.

･

Only using 3G/Wi-Fi connection may not detect

some locations.

･

Google may provide updated service or function.

From the Home screen, tap .

Tap [Maps]

[OK].

･

A map screen appears.

Finding the current location on the

map

On the map screen, tap .

･

The blinking blue arrow shows the

current location.

Using Google Maps

208

Applications

Viewing Street View

･

Street View does not cover some areas.

Touch and hold a spot on the map

that you are going to look at in

Street View.

Tap the displayed call-out.

Tap (Street View)

[OK].

･

On the Street View display, tap

and tap [Compass mode]. The compass

in Street View shows the same direction

as the terminal's geomagnetic

compass.

･

Uncovered area for Street View appears

in light gray.

Searching for a location you want to

look at

On the map screen, tap

, then

tap [Search].

Fill out the search box.

･

You can enter addresses, city names,

business types and institution names

(for example, London and art museum).

･

If a list of places searched or referred

previously appears on the screen, tap

an address, etc. on the list to check the

location on the map.

Tap .

･

Search result appears on the map.

･

If appears, tap to select the place

to display.

･

When "Do you mean:" appears at the

top of the map, you can tap "Do you

mean:" to select the place.

Tap a destination.

･

A detailed information screen appears.

❖

Information

･

You can use / / on the detailed

information screen. The options you can use vary

depending on the location.

･

On the map screen, tap

and [More], then tap

(Places) to select a category such as "Restaurants",

"Cafes", etc. to search around your current location

and show it on the map. You can add the search

categories.

209

Applications

Zooming in or out on a map

Tap to zoom in or out on a

map.

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, double-tap or pinch on the screen to

zoom in/out.

Changing the layers

You can select information to overlay on the

map.

On the map screen, tap .

Tap the information you want to

view.

･

Traffic information and routes are not

available in all locations.

Receiving guides

Google Maps helps you receive detailed

guides for your destination.

On the map screen, tap

, then

tap [Directions].

Enter a start point in the upper

text box, and an end point in the

lower text box.

･

Alternatively, tap at the right of the

text box to select a Start point and End

point from [My current location]/

[Contacts]/[Point on map]/[My Places].

Select a transportation from

(Driving)/ (Transit)/

(Walking).

Tap [Get directions].

･

A list of guides for your destination

appears.

If you search directions for public

transportation, tap a route in the

list.

･

A route is displayed on the map if you

search in car or walk option. Tap to

display routes on the list, and tap to

display routes on the map.

❖

Information

･

With "Navigation" application, you can use easy route

search with current location as a departure point.

Traffic

Show traffic condition.

Satellite

Display satellite photo.

Terrain

Display geological formation.

Transit Lines

Show route information.

Latitude

Join Latitude.

My Maps

View My Maps that you create on

a PC. Only viewing : You cannot

create My Maps on the terminal.

Wikipedia

Display .

Tap to display a Wikipedia

article related to the location.

210

Applications

Clearing the Maps

Clear displayed layers, route search results

and some others.

On the map screen, tap

and

tap [Clear Map].

･

If there is nothing to clear, "Clear Map" is

displayed in light gray.

Google Latitude enables you to check where

a friend is on the map, and to share status

messages. Latitude also enables you to send

messages (SMS) and emails, to make phone

calls, and to find the route to where a friend

is.

Location information cannot be

automatically shared. You need to join

Latitude and invite a friend who gives his or

her location information, or to receive an

invitation from him or her.

Joining Latitude

On the map screen, tap

, then

tap [More]

[Join Latitude].

･

For the first time to join Latitude, a

message confirming whether to agree

to share location information with

friends appears.

･

Once you join Latitude, the menu name

changes into [Latitude].

❖

Information

･

To set Latitude or log out, tap

on the map

screen, then tap [Settings]

[Location reporting] to

display a screen for the operation.

Opening Latitude

If you join Latitude, you can confirm where a

friend is, and check update with opening the

screen.

On the map screen, tap

, then

tap [More]

[Latitude].

❖

Information

･

For details of Latitude, tap

on the map screen,

then tap [Help] to view the mobile help.

Checking where a friend is by

Google Latitude

211

Applications

1Seg is a terrestrial digital TV broadcasting

service that allows mobile devices to receive

broadcasted data along with images and

sounds. You can also acquire detailed

program information, participate in quiz

programs, enjoy TV shopping, etc.

For details on "1Seg", refer to the following

website.

The Association for Promotion of Digital

Broadcasting

http://www.dpa.or.jp/

Using 1Seg

1Seg is a service provided by TV

broadcasting enterprises (stations), etc. A

communication fee for receiving video

picture and sound is not required. Contact

NHK for details on your NHK viewing fees.

There are 2 types of information displayed in

the data broadcasting area: "Data

broadcasting" and "Data broadcasting site".

"Data broadcasting" is displayed using

airwave along with images and sounds; while

"Data broadcasting site" is displayed by

connecting to a site provided by TV

broadcasting enterprises (stations), etc.,

using information of data broadcasting.

For viewing "Data broadcasting site", etc.,

packet communication fees are charged.

･

Some sites require information fees.

Airwaves

1Seg is one of the broadcast services and a

different type of radio waves (airwaves) from

that of FOMA service is received. Therefore,

regardless of whether you are in or out of

FOMA service area, it cannot be received

where airwaves do not reach or during

broadcasting interruptions.

Also, even in a terrestrial digital TV

broadcasting service area, reception

condition may be poor or reception may be

unavailable in the following places:

1Seg

212

Applications

･

A place far from the tower that the airwaves

are sent from

･

Mountain-ringed regions or a place between

buildings where airwaves are interrupted by

geography or buildings

･

Tunnel, underground or far back from a

building where airwaves are weak or do not

reach

1Seg antenna

To make the reception condition better,

stretch out the 1Seg antenna.

To make the reception condition better, try to

change the direction of the antenna or move

to another location.

･

Stretch out the 1Seg antenna until it stops.

･

1Seg antenna can be rotated by 360 degrees.

Use 1Seg antenna in the direction you can

receive a stronger airwaves.

❖

Information

･

Please note the followings when you operate 1Seg

antenna.

- When changing the direction of the 1Seg antenna,

hold a part close to the root of the 1Seg antenna

and check the direction.

- When retracting the 1Seg antenna, shorten the

antenna, set it up and retract it carefully checking

its direction.

Make channel setting from 1Seg menu when

you activate 1Seg for the first time. After

setting is complete, you can watch 1Seg

programs.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [Channel setting]

[Current

area].

･

Available channels are searched.

Initial settings for 1Seg

213

Applications

Tap [ YES].

Tap entry box, enter a title name

and tap [OK].

･

To go back to 1Seg menu, tap

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, tap [Select area] in Step 2 then select

area to make channel setting.

･

Channel setting may not be made in the area where

a terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service has just

started.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [Activate 1Seg].

･

1Seg watching screen appears. Tap the

image to temporarily view program

information such as channel, program

name, multi-channel formation

(multiple services), etc.

･

Tap

on the 1Seg watching screen

to display operation bar.

❖

Information

･

It may take a time to acquire image data or

broadcasted data when you activate 1Seg or change

channels due to characteristic of digital

broadcasting.

･

According to the airwave condition, image or sound

may be interrupted or stopped.

･

If the terminal receives a call while watching 1Seg,

1Seg is interrupted and resumes after the call ends.

■

1Seg screen

Watching 1Seg program

1Seg watching screen (Full screen)

1Seg watching screen (operation bar screen)

1Seg watching screen (with Data broadcasting)

214

Applications

Image

Subtitle

Program information

Switch screen view : Switch screen between full

screen data broadcasting and 1Seg program with

data broadcasting (only for vertical view).

Advanced settings

DOWN selection/UP selection : Select previous or

next channel you are currently watching.

Remote controller : Display numeric keys 1-12 to

switch channels and keys for searching stations.

Mute

Data broadcasting : Display data broadcasting

content.

Remote controller for data broadcasting : Display

operation keys for data broadcasting such as Move

focus, Select focus, Back, Show numeric keys, etc.

1Seg status bar : Display icons for reception level,

subtitle, muting, channel, volume, off timer, etc.

❖

Information

･

Press

on the 1Seg watching screen to adjust

volume.

･

Recording 1Seg program is not supported.

･

You can watch 1Seg turning the terminal sideways. If

the screen orientation does not change

automatically when you turn the terminal sideways,

from the Home screen, tap

and tap

[Settings]

[Display], then mark [Auto-rotate screen]

checkbox.

･

For data broadcasting, screen display supports

portrait only.

･

Flick the 1Seg watching screen left and right to select

the previous or next channel you are currently

watching.

･

To exit 1Seg, tap

on the 1Seg watching screen.

On the 1Seg watching screen

(P.217), tap

and tap [Setting].

･

You can set the following options.

Setting 1Seg

Channel info

Display information for available

channels.

Program info

Display information for received

programs.

Channel list

Registered areas (broadcasting

service area) are listed as a channel

list.

Channel setting

Make channel setting.

Add to channel

list

Add a channel from 1Seg watching

screen.

Program guide

Activate "G

ガイド番組表

(G-Guide

program table)" to view program

table.

･

Alternatively, from the 1Seg

menu, tap [Program guide] to

activate "G

ガイド番組表

(G-Guide

program table)".

Switch display

Switch display between image and

data broadcasting.

Caption setting

Switch Display subtitle to on or off.

Off timer

Make a timer setting to end 1Seg

watching.

Main/sub sound

Set main/sub sound.

Sound switch

Set to switch sound.

Volume setting

Adjust the volume level.

Sound effect

setting

Switch sound effect of data

broadcasting between on and off.

215

Applications

For data broadcasting, you can view various

information by following the onscreen

instructions.

❖

Information

･

To watch data broadcasting, call charge or packet

communication charge is not required. If you use

additional services of data broadcasting, etc. via

packet communication, packet communication fees

are charged.

For some data broadcasting programs, link

information to related websites (TVlink) is

displayed. Save TVlinks to connect to related

websites later.

Saving TVlinks

On the 1Seg watching screen

(including data broadcasting)

(P.217), select TVlink to store.

･

After this step, follow the onscreen

instructions to operate.

Display TVlinks

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [TVlink].

･

A TV link list screen appears.

Select a TVlink.

■

When a link content or HTML content

is selected

Tap [Yes]/[OK].

❖

Information

･

Some TVlinks have period of validity. Out of date

TVlinks are no longer available.

Reset

confirmation

status

Initialize the confirmation screen

display.

Back to data BC

Display data broadcasting.

Tune service

You can select a sub-channel when

several programs (services) are

broadcasted for separated sub-

channels in a channel.

TVlink

Stored TVlinks appear.

Operation guide

A guide for watching 1Seg appears.

Watching data broadcasting

Using TVlink

216

Applications

Viewing/Deleting details of TVlink

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [TVlink] and tap

･

A menu list appears.

❖

Information

･

On the list screen in TVlink, touch and hold a TVlink

item to display menus for displaying detailed

information, etc.

･

When TVlink is not registered, tapping

on the

list screen in TVlink does not display the menu.

Available channels vary depending on the

area (broadcasting service area) you are

using in.

Storing broadcasting service areas

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [Channel setting]

[Current

area].

･

Available channels are searched.

Tap [ YES].

Tap entry box, enter a title name

and tap [OK].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, tap [Select area] in Step 2 then select

area to make channel setting.

Changing broadcasting service area

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [Channel list] to select a list

from registered channel lists.

･

The broadcasting service area is

changed.

Check the

number of

registration

Check the number of stored

TVlinks.

Delete all

Delete all stored TVlinks.

Delete selected

Delete several stored TVlinks.

Mark TVlink to delete and tap

, tap [Delete data?]

[YES].

Storing/Changing

broadcasting service areas

217

Applications

■

Using menus on the channel list

selection screen

Touch and hold the channel list selection

screen to display menus for displaying

information, setting, editing titles, deleting,

etc.

Change TV remote number assigned to each

broadcasting station. Each broadcasting

station can be called up via the

corresponding TV remote number.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [Channel list]

A list you want

to change.

Touch and hold the channel

information.

Tap [Remote control No.]

broadcasting service area you

want to change.

Tap a remote number you want to

save to.

Tap

, then tap [YES].

You can set, initialize, and reset watching

screen, data broadcasting screen from User

setting.

Initializing settings

You can initialize the channel setting and

1Seg setting.

From the Home screen, tap ,

and then tap [1Seg].

Tap [User setting]

[Reset channel

setting]/[Reset 1Seg settings].

Tap [ YES].

Changing numbers for TV

remote

Making User setting

218

Applications

You can listen to the FM radio with the

terminal. Tuning can be made automatically

or manually, and you can register your

favorite channels to Favorites. To use FM

radio, use a handsfree device such as Stereo

Headset with Microphone (Sample), etc. or a

headphone. They work as antenna.

Connect Stereo Headset with

Microphone (Sample) to the

terminal.

･

For connection of Stereo Headset with

Microphone (Sample), see "Using

Stereo Headset with Microphone"

(P.193).

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [FM radio].

･

FM radio screen appears and selecting

channel starts automatically. You can

select channel by dragging the screen.

To select channel automatically

furthermore, go to Step 3.

Tap

, then tap [Search for

channels].

･

Alternatively, tap / to search

for channels.

･

The search ends when radio waves are

received.

Tap , then tap [+ Add XX.X to

favorites].

Tap entry box, enter a name and

tap [Save].

･

The frequency bands of searched

channels are registered to Favorites.

To stop the FM radio, tap .

❖

Information

･

You can return to the Home screen to perform

another operation while listening to FM radio in the

background. To return to the FM radio screen, from

the Home screen, tap then tap [FM radio], or drag

the status bar downward and tap [FM radio] on the

Notification panel.

･

When the UIM is not inserted, the frequency band

range is 87.5MHz - 108.0MHz. You cannot listen to

the FM radio programs in Japan.

FM radio

Searching and registering

channels

219

Applications

■

FM radio screen

Monaural sound/stereo effect

Play in speaker/Play in handsfree

Channel point displayed in a good radio wave

condition

On/Off of FM radio

Broadcasting station now listening

Channel assigned to favorite

Search channels automatically

Move left to select next favorite

Tuning button ( for Favorites)

Move right to select next favorite

On the FM radio screen, tap

Tap [Play in speaker]/[Play in

headphones].

･

The sound output is switched to the

speaker/handsfree device.

Osaifu-Keitai equipped with IC card is a

function which allows you to pay money or

to use coupon, stamp-rally, etc. only by

holding the terminal over an IC card reader in

stores etc.

You can access a site or website, obtain the

latest coupon, check credit or payment of

electronic money, etc. by holding the

terminal over the IC card reader. In addition,

you can lock your Osaifu-Keitai to provide

against loss or theft, and you can use Osaifu-

Keitai with safe.

For details on Osaifu-Keitai, refer to "

ご利用ガ

イドブック

(sp

モード編

) (Mobile Phone User's

Guide [sp-mode]) (in Japanese only)" or

dmarket.

* A setting from the dedicated website or

application is required to use Osaifu-Keitai

compatible services.

Switching the speaker and

handsfree device

Osaifu-Keitai

220

Applications

Precautions on using Osaifu-Keitai

･

The data (including electronic money, points,

etc.) in the IC card may be lost or modified

because of the malfunction of the terminal

(When we take your Osaifu-Keitai for repair

etc., as we cannot take it with data remained,

you are required to erase the data by

yourself). For support such as reissuance,

restoration, temporary preservation or

transfer of data, contact Osaifu-Keitai

compatible service providers. For important

data, be sure to use a service with backup

service.

･

If the data in the IC card is lost, modified or

damaged by any means related to Osaifu-

Keitai compatible service such as malfunction

or model change, DOCOMO assumes no

responsibility for the loss of data.

･

If the terminal is stolen or misplaced,

immediately contact Osaifu-Keitai

compatible service provider for an advice.

･

The terminal does not support iC transfer

service.

From the Home screen, tap

then tap [Osaifu-Keitai].

Select a service you want to use

from a service list.

･

At the first time you activate Osaifu-

Keitai, an initial setting screen appears.

Follow the onscreen instructions.

You can exchange data with an IC card reader

only by holding mark over the card reader.

･

When holding mark over an IC card reader,

make sure not to hit the terminal strongly.

･

Hold mark horizontally over the center of

the IC card reader.

･

Slowly move the terminal to hold mark

over the IC card reader.

Using Osaifu-Keitai

Holding Osaifu-Keitai over IC

card reader

221

Applications

･

If mark is not recognized even when

holding over the IC card reader, try slightly

picking the terminal up off the reader, or

moving the terminal back, forth and around.

･

If there are metal objects between mark

and an IC card reader, scanning may be failed.

And note that a sticker put on nearby the

mark may affect communication

performance.

❖

Information

･

You can scan and write data to or from an IC card

reader without activating Osaifu-Keitai compatible

application.

･

The function is available even if the terminal is off,

but it may not be available in case you leave the

terminal off for a long time or the battery level is low,

etc.

Use "Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting" to restrict the

use of Osaifu-Keitai function and related

services.

･

Osaifu-Keitai lock is different from screen lock

for the terminal, SIM card lock.

From the Home screen, tap

then tap [Osaifu-Keitai].

Tap

, then tap [Osaifu-Keitai

Lock Setting].

Follow the onscreen instructions

to enter unlock pattern.

❖

Information

･

is displayed in the status bar when you set

"Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting".

･

Note that you cannot cancel "Osaifu-Keitai Lock

Setting", if the battery runs out while using "Osaifu-

Keitai Lock Setting". Be careful about remaining

battery level. If the battery runs out, charge the

terminal before canceling "Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting".

･

You need to enter unlock pattern to use Osaifu-Keitai

menu while using "Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting".

･

IC card unlock pattern will not be deleted even if you

reset the terminal.

･

Note that you cannot cancel "Osaifu-Keitai Lock

Setting" if you forget both the lock pattern and

answer for security question.

Locking Osaifu-Keitai function

222

Applications

iD is a convenient electronic money by credit

clearance scheme. You can enjoy shopping

simply and conveniently only by holding

Osaifu-Keitai with credit information set or

the iD-compatible card over the IC card

reader in stores. Because up to 2 types of

credit information can be registered in

Osaifu-Keitai, you can use them according to

the benefits, etc. It also supports cashing,

depending on the card issuer.

･

To use iD with Osaifu-Keitai, subscribing to a

card issuer that supports iD, settings for iD

setting application are required.

･

The charges required for iD service (including

the annual charge) vary by card issuer.

･

For using the application, a packet

communication charge is applied.

･

A packet communication fee for oversea use

differs from the one in Japan.

･

For details on iD, refer to iD website (http://id-

credit.com/ (In Japanese only)).

ToruCa is an electronic card that can be

obtained to mobile terminals. It can be

obtained from the IC card reader or site as

store information, coupon ticket, etc.

Obtained ToruCa is saved to the "ToruCa"

application. Use the "ToruCa" application to

display, search or update.

For details on ToruCa, refer to "

ご利用ガイド

ブック

(sp

モード編

) (Mobile Phone User's

Guide [sp-mode]) (in Japanese only)" or

dmarket.

❖

Information

･

For obtaining, displaying or updating ToruCa, a

packet communication charge may be applied.

･

Some ToruCa provided to i-mode terminal may not

be obtained/displayed/updated.

･

Depending on the settings of IP (Information

Provider), the following functions may not be

available.

- Obtaining/Updating from the IC card reader,

sharing ToruCa, moving to microSD card, copying/

displaying map

･

Some ToruCa which can be displayed in a map from

ToruCa (details) may not be displayed in a map from

the ToruCa list depending on the IP settings.

･

While using Osaifu-Keitai Lock Setting, you cannot

obtain ToruCa with an IC card reader.

･

If you set

重複チェック

(Duplication check) to "ON",

obtaining the same ToruCa redundantly is not

available. To obtain the same ToruCa redundantly, set

it to "OFF".

設定アプリ

(iD setting

application)

ToruCa

223

Applications

･

When you send ToruCa attaching to email, it is sent

in the condition before obtaining ToruCa (details).

･

Depending on email application, ToruCa received via

the emails may not be saved.

･

Depending on browser, ToruCa cannot be obtained.

･

When ToruCa is moved/copied to the microSD card,

it is moved/copied in the condition before obtaining

ToruCa (details).

･

You may not be able to obtain ToruCa with an IC card

reader, if you do not make initial setting for Osaifu-

Keitai.

The terminal has a built-in calendar for the

schedule. If you have a Google account, you

can synchronize the terminal's calendar and

web calendar. See "Accounts & sync" (P.132).

･

When you register Google account, tap the

Google account displayed in "Accounts &

sync" and a sync item "Sync Calendar". You

can create schedule etc.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Calendar].

Tap [Month]/[Week]/[Day] to

select.

Calendar

Setting the calendar view

224

Applications

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Calendar].

Tap at the upper right.

･

Tap

and tap [New event] to

create a schedule in Calendar.

Enter a schedule name, date, and

time.

If you have two or more calendar

accounts, select one.

If necessary, select the repetition

intervals of the calendar.

Select the notification intervals of

the schedule.

･

Tap to add a new notification into

the schedule.

Enter a place and some others of

schedule.

Tap [Save].

❖

Information

･

Tap [More] and scroll through the screen to set "Time

zone", "Guests (Email addresses)", "Show me as:", and

"Privacy".

Displaying a schedule in Calendar

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Calendar].

･

Flick the calendar left or right to display

the next or previous month/week/day

according to the view mode.

Tap a schedule you want to

display.

❖

Information

･

To view the events created in "Schedule" application

in the Calendar, while the Calendar is displayed, tap

and [My calendars] to synchronize with the

docomo account.

･

If you log in to Facebook, tap [Sync Calendar] in the

"Facebook inside Xperia

™

" (P.134) to display events

in Facebook in the Calendar.

If a reminder icon ( ) appears in

the status bar, drag the bar

downward.

･

The notification panel opens.

･

The reminder icon appears at set

Notification time.

Tap a schedule.

Tap [Snooze all] or [Dismiss all].

･

If you have any schedules on hold, they

appear on the same screen.

Creating a schedule in Calendar

Releasing the reminder of a

schedule or setting the snooze

225

Applications

･

If you tap [Snooze all], all the alarms

sound again 5 minutes later.

(Snooze is a function that sounds the

alarm some time later even though you

stop it.)

Set Calendar view, reminder notifications,

ringtone, vibration, reminder time.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Calendar].

Tap

and [Settings].

Select an item to change.

With "Alarm and Clock" application, you can

set an alarm, show the clock or photo

slideshow on the display, or play music with

the Media player.

From the Home screen, tap .

Tap [Alarm and Clock].

･

The Clock screen appears.

Alarm display

･

Appear when there is a set alarm.

: Turn off the backlight.

･

Tap the screen to light up.

Clock display

･

When 5 minutes are passed without touching the

display, the day and time view appears.

: Display the alarm list screen.

: Display a slideshow.

: Display the Media player screen.

: Go to the Home screen.

Changing the calendar settings

Alarm and Clock

efg

226

Applications

❖

Information

･

If you tap

on the Clock screen, "Dock settings"

appears. However the dock compatible to this

function is not sold by Sony Mobile Communications

Japan, Inc. (as of February, 2012).

From the Home screen, tap ,

then [Alarm and Clock]

Tap .

･

The alarm list screen appears.

Tap [Add alarm].

･

An alarm setting screen appears. You

can set the following items.

Tap [Done].

･

Return to the alarms list screen.

❖

Information

･

To set on/off of the alarm, mark the checkbox on the

alarm list screen.

･

On the alarms list screen, tap "Time" at the top of the

screen to display the clock screen (P.229).

･

While using World clock/Stopwatch/Timer, tap

[Alarm] at the bottom of the screen to display the

alarm list screen.

Deleting the alarm

On the alarm list screen, tap

and [Delete].

Mark the alarm setting you want to

delete.

Tap [Delete]

[Yes].

❖

Information

･

Alternatively, on the alarm list screen, touch and hold

the alarm setting you want to delete, then tap

[Delete alarm]

[Yes] to delete the alarm setting.

Setting alarm

Time

Tap number to set the time.

Repeat

Set a day of the week for the alarm.

Alarm text

Enter texts that appear while alarm

is sounding.

Snooze

duration

Set time interval to sound the

ringtone again after stopping the

ringtone.

Style settings

Mark the checkbox to display an

image while alarm is sounding.

Alarm sound

Set alarm sound.

Vibrate

Mark to vibrate at the alarm time.

Mute alarm

Mark not to sound at the alarm time.

Customize

volume

Mark to change alarm volume.

Alarm volume

Drag the slider left or right to adjust

the level.

Alarm in silent

mode

Mark to sound alarm even in silent

mode.

Side keys

behavior

Select an effect when pressing

while alarm is

sounding.

227

Applications

Stopping an alarm while the alarm is

sounding

While alarm is sounding, touch

and drag it to the right.

Display the date and time in cities around the

world.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then [Alarm and Clock]

Tap .

Tap [World clock].

･

The list screen of the world clock

appears.

Tap [Add new].

Drag the screen up and down to

select a city.

❖

Information

･

Date and time of the world clock synchronizes with

date and time set on the terminal.

･

On the list screen of the world clock, tap "Time" at

the top of the screen to display the clock screen

(P.229).

･

On the list screen of the world clock, tap [Compare

time] to graphically display dates and time in regions

around the world that you set.

Changing World clock

You can switch, sort or delete Celsius/

Fahrenheit displayed on World clock.

On the list screen of the world

clock, tap

■

Switching Celsius/Fahrenheit

Tap [Celsius]/[Fahrenheit].

･

Switch Celsius/Fahrenheit.

■

Sorting

Tap [Rearrange]

Drag of the date in

the world clock up and down

Tap

[Done].

■

Deleting

Tap [Delete]

Mark world clock

checkbox you want to delete

Tap

[Delete]

[Yes].

Using World clock

228

Applications

From the Home screen, tap ,

then [Alarm and Clock]

Tap .

Tap [Stopwatch].

Tap [Start].

･

Measurement starts and appears in

the status bar.

･

Tap [Lap] to measure elapsed time.

Tap [Stop].

･

Tap [Start] to resume measuring.

･

Tap [Reset] to delete measured time

and lap time.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then [Alarm and Clock]

Tap .

Tap [ Timer].

･

Time screen appears.

Tap [Set time].

Tap number to adjust the time and

then tap [Set].

Tap [Start].

･

Timer starts, and appears in the

status bar.

Tap [Stop].

･

Stop sounding alarm after a set time

has elapsed.

･

Tap [Stop] within a set time duration to

pause timer. Tap [Start] to resume timer.

❖

Information

･

To change alarm sound, on the timer screen, tap

, then [Settings] and select the alarm sound you

want to change, and then tap [Done].

Using Stopwatch Using Timer

229

Applications

With OfficeSuite, you can view files of Word,

Excel, etc. from the terminal or a microSD

card.

From the Home screen, tap .

Tap [OfficeSuite].

･

OfficeSuite starts.

You can use the following online services on

the terminal.

PlayNow is a web application which allows

you to use news flash, dictionary service, etc.

To use the application, on the Browser

screen, tap

and tap [Bookmarks] and

tap [PlayNow] to connect the dedicated site.

For membership registration etc., operate

following the onscreen instructions.

Show dedicated website to access SE Home.

To use the function, from the Home screen,

tap [SE HOME].

Follow the screen to download the "SE

Home" application, allowing you to access

"SE Home", the website for the smart phone

introducing Sony Ericsson products and

campaign information.

Show dedicated website to access the PS

Store.

To use the application, from the Home

screen, tap [PS Store

を始めよう

(Let's start PS

Store)].

Follow the onscreen instructions to

download necessary application. You can

buy games from PS Store to enjoy it on your

terminal.

OfficeSuite

Starting OfficeSuite

Other applications

PlayNow

SE Home

PS Store

を始めよう

(Let's start

PS Store)

230

International roaming

With the international roaming (WORLD

WING), you can use the terminal without

changing phone number or mail address in

the service area of the overseas network

operator affiliated with DOCOMO. You do not

need to change the settings of call and SMS.

■

Service area

The terminal works in a 3G roaming area

and GSM/GPRS service area. Services are

also available in countries and areas

supporting 3G850MHz/GSM850MHz. Check

available areas.

■

Before using the terminal overseas,

refer to the followings.

･

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International

Services]"

･

DOCOMO International Services website

❖

Information

･

For Country codes, International call access codes,

Universal number international prefix, supported

countries/areas and network operators, refer to

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International Services]"

or DOCOMO International Services Website.

*1 To use data communication during roaming, mark

[Data roaming] checkbox in Mobile network

settings. (P.238)

*2 For GPS positioning (Positioning location), a packet

communication charge is applied.

･

Some services are not available depending on

the overseas network operator or network.

Overview of International

roaming (WORLD WING)

Available Services

Main communication

services 3G GSM/GPRS GSM

Phone

○○ ○

Message (SMS)

○○ ○

○○

Browser

○○

Position location of

GPS

○○

231

International roaming

To use the terminal overseas, check the

following in Japan.

■

Subscription

･

Check if you subscribe WORLD WING. For

details, contact "General Inquiries" on the

last page of this manual.

■

Usage charge

･

Overseas usage charges (call and packet

communication) differ from those in

Japan.

･

Some applications automatically perform

packet communications. Your packet

communication charges may be higher.

For operation details of each application,

please contact the application provider.

Network service settings

If you subscribe to network services, you can

use network services such as Voice Mail

Service, Call Forwarding Service, Caller ID

Notification Service, etc., even overseas.

However, some network services cannot be

used.

･

To use network services overseas, you need to

set "Remote access" to activate. You can set

"Remote access" in the country you stay.

(P.242)

･

Even if the setting/canceling operation is

available, some network services cannot be

used depending on overseas network

operators.

Before using

Before leaving Japan

Advance preparation

232

International roaming

When you arrive overseas and turn on the

terminal, an available network is

automatically set.

Connectivity

When you have set search mode of "Available

networks" to "Automatic" in "Service

providers" settings, optimized network is

automatically selected.

When you connect to the network operator

conducted in flat-rate service manually, you

can use the service with flat-rate packet

communication charges overseas up to the

specified upper limit per day. To use this

service, subscription of packet flat-rate

service is required. For details, refer to

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International

Services]" or DOCOMO International Services

Website.

Display

In the status bar, the type of your operator's

network is displayed.

: During International roaming

/ : GPRS available/in communication

/ : 3G (packet) available/in

communication

/ : HSDPA available/in communication

･

You can confirm the name of the connected

network operator on the Notification panel.

Date & time settings

When "Date & time" is set to "Automatic", the

date, time and time differences of the

terminal clock are corrected by receiving the

information related to time and time

differences from the network of overseas

network operator you connect to.

･

Correction of the time/time differences may

not be performed correctly depending on the

network of overseas network operator. In that

case, set time zone manually.

･

Timing of correction varies by the overseas

network operator.

･

Date & time (P.139)

About inquiries

･

For loss or theft of the terminal or UIM,

immediately contact DOCOMO from the spot

to take the necessary steps for suspending

the use. For inquiries, see the last page of this

manual. Note that you are still liable for the

call and communication charge incurred after

the loss or theft occurred.

･

For using from land-line phone, entering

"International call access code" or "Universal

number international prefix" for the country is

needed.

After arriving overseas

233

International roaming

After returning to Japan

When you return to Japan, the terminal is

connected to DOCOMO network

automatically. If connection is failed, perform

the following operations.

･

Set "Network Mode" to "WCDMA (preferred)/

GSM". (P.238)

･

Set "Search mode" to "Automatic" in "Service

providers" settings. (P.237)

When you start the international roaming or

move out of your operator's network, you

need to reconnect the terminal to another

available network.

❖

Information

･

Some applications automatically perform packet

communications. To disconnect packet

communication manually, from the Home screen,

tap

and tap [Settings]

[Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile networks]

[Data enabled] to

unmark.

Confirming and switching the

network search mode

By default, network search mode is set to

"Automatic". When you connect manually to

an overseas network operator conducted in

flat-rate service, confirm the search mode

with the following operations and switch to

"Manual".

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Service

providers].

Tap [Search mode]

[Manual].

From "Available networks", tap a

network to mark.

･

To display available networks, tap

[Search networks].

❖

Information

･

If you set a network manually, the terminal is not

reconnected to another network automatically even

if you move out of the network area.

･

To return to "Automatic", tap [Automatic] in

Step 3.

Making setting for

international use

234

International roaming

Changing network mode settings

You can change network mode settings

according to the network mode

(communication method) adopted by the

overseas network operator.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile

networks]

[Network Mode].

Select a network mode you use.

･

You can select from [WCDMA only],

[GSM only] or [WCDMA (preferred)/

GSM]. If you select [WCDMA

(preferred)/GSM], you can use both

GSM and WCDMA.

Activating data roaming

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Wireless &

networks]

[Mobile networks].

Tap [Data roaming].

Read the cautions displayed, tap

[Yes].

･

[Data roaming] checkbox is marked.

When you arrive overseas and turn on the

terminal, an available network is

automatically set.

･

Check that the battery and signal levels are

high enough.

･

Depending on the network operator, even if

the Caller ID notification is active, the caller ID

may not be notified or appear properly.

In this case, calls cannot be made from the call

log.

You can make a call from overseas using the

international roaming service.

･

You can easily make international calls from

the country you stay to Japan or to other

countries by entering prefix "+" and then the

country code and phone number.

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial] tab.

Making/Receiving calls in

the country you stay

Making a call to outside

country you stay (including

Japan)

235

International roaming

Dial + (touch and hold

[0])

Country code

Area code

(City code)

Enter a phone

number.

･

If the area code begins with "0", omit "0".

However, "0" may be required to dial to

some country or area such as Italy.

･

To call an overseas "WORLD WING" user,

enter "81" (Japan) for the country code.

･

You can enter country code using the

preset Convert country code list. Enter

a phone number and tap

to tap

[International call], then select country

code from the Convert country code.

Tap .

❖

Information

･

During international roaming, if you make an

international call to Japan using DOCOMO's

phonebook application, the "International dialing

assist" screen appears. You can make a call without

entering country code from that screen.

･

Convert country code list cannot be edited.

You can make a call by entering the phone

number of the other party's land-line phone

or mobile phone in the same way you do in

Japan.

From the Home screen, tap

[Phone]

[Dial] tab.

Enter the other party's phone

number.

･

To make a call to land-line phone, enter

the area code (city code) + other party's

phone number.

Tap .

When the other party uses international

roaming service, make a call as an

international call to Japan even when you

stay in the same country as the other party.

You can receive a call using the international

roaming service.

Making a call within the

country you stay

Making a call to WORLD WING

user overseas

Receiving a call in the country

you stay

236

International roaming

While receiving a call, touch

(left) and drag it to (right).

When the conversation is finished,

tap [End call].

❖

Information

･

When you received a call during the international

roaming, regardless of which country the call is from,

it is forwarded internationally from Japan. A caller is

charged for a call fee to Japan, and the receiver is

charged for a reception fee.

■

Having the other party call you

･

Calling from Japan to the country you stay

To have the other party make a call from a

land-line phone or mobile phone in Japan

to the terminal in the country you stay,

the other party only needs to dial the

phone number as in Japan.

･

Calling from the country except Japan to

the country you stay

You have to receive a call through Japan

no matter where you are; therefore, the

other party needs to enter the

international call access code and "81"

(Country code of Japan).

International access code - 81 - 90 (or 80)

- XXXX - XXXX

Make settings for using international

roaming or international calls.

Set restricting incoming calls overseas or

using roaming guidance.

･

For some overseas network operators,

settings may not be made.

Restricting incoming calls for

roaming

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting]

[Roaming

settings].

Tap [Restricting incoming calls].

･

Select items you want to use.

International roaming

settings

Settings for making/receiving

calls overseas

Activate

restricting

Tap any of [Restricting all incomings]/

[Restricting incoming of video call/

64K data], enter the network security

code, and tap [OK].

Deactivate

restricting

Enter the network security code and

tap [OK].

237

International roaming

Setting roaming guidance

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting]

[Roaming

settings].

Tap [Roaming guidance].

･

Select items you want to use.

Settings Network service (overseas)

Set network service such as voice mail from

overseas.

･

If you make the settings overseas, you are

charged a call fee to Japan from the country

you stay.

･

For some overseas network operators,

settings may not be made.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap [Settings].

Tap [Call settings]

[Network

service setting]

[Roaming

settings].

Tap [Network service].

･

Select items you want to use. You need

to set "Remote access" to activate.

Check settings

Check the current service settings.

Activate roaming

guidance

Tap [OK] to activate roaming

guidance.

Deactivate

roaming guidance

Tap [OK] to deactivate roaming

guidance.

Check settings

Check the current service

settings.

Voice mail

(charged)

Activate

Voice mail

(roaming)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

Deactivate

Voice mail

(roaming)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

Play voice

mail

message

(roaming)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

After this step, follow the

voice prompts to play the

message.

Voice mail

settings

(roaming)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

238

International roaming

* Follow the voice prompts to operate.

Voice mail

(charged)

Voice mail

ring time

(roaming)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

Roaming guidance

(charged)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

Remote operation

(charged)

Tap [OK], and then tap .

239

Appendix/Index

A variety of commercially available optional

devices allows you to expand the terminal's

capabilities by supporting a wide range of

purpose, including personal and business

uses.

Some accessories are only available in some

areas.

For details, please contact a sales outlet such

as docomo Shop.

For details on optional devices, see the user's

manual of each device.

･

AC Adapter cable SO03

･

Carry Case 02

･

FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 02

･

Pocket charger 01/02

･

AC Adapter 03

･

DC Adapter 03

･

1Seg antenna cable SO01

* To charge the terminal, use the supplied

microUSB cable.

･

First, check if the software update is necessary

for the terminal. If necessary, perform the

software update (P.252).

･

When checking the following items not to

improve the state, contact the phone number

given in "Repairs" the last page of this manual

(in Japanese only) or DOCOMO-specified

repair office.

･

If the back cover is removed, check the

direction of the cover and attach to the

terminal body. Push the back cover in the

direction of the arrow until it clicks and make

sure that there are not any spaces between

the body and cover.

■

Power supply

Optional and related

devices

Troubleshooting

Cannot power on the terminal.

･

Check if the battery pack is not run out. P.33

240

Appendix/Index

■

Charging

■

Terminal operation

Screen does not respond. I cannot turn the power

off.

･

Press

and upper of

at the

same time for approximately 5 seconds, and

release your finger after the terminal

vibrates once to restart the terminal.

Or, press

and upper of

at the

same time for approximately 10 seconds

and release your finger after the terminal

vibrates 3 times to turn off the terminal

forcibly.

P. 3 8

Cannot charge the terminal.

(The notification LED does not turn on, or the icon

that means charging does not appear.)

･

Check if the AC adapter cable's power plug

is correctly inserted to an outlet.

P. 3 6

･

Check if the AC adapter cable and the

terminal are set correctly.

P. 3 6

･

If you execute calls, communications or

other function operations for a long time

while charging, the terminal may become

hot and the battery status icon may not

indicate charging (charging stops) or

charging may not be completed. In this

case, wait until the temperature of the

terminal drops and charge again.

−

The notification LED blinks in red and cannot

operate the terminal.

･

When the battery level is low, charge the

internal battery.

P. 3 3

Become hot while operating/charging.

･

While calling, depending on the radio wave

condition or call duration time, the terminal

may become hot. This condition is not

abnormal.

−

･

While operating or charging, or if you watch

1Seg or record video etc. for a long time

while charging the battery, the terminal,

internal battery and AC adapter may

become hot. There is no problem about

safety and continue to use it.

−

The operation time provided by the battery pack is

short.

･

Is your terminal left for a long time under

the state of out of service area?

Out of service area, more power is

consumed to search available radio waves.

−

･

The operating time of the internal battery

varies depending on the operating

environment and the degradation level of

the internal battery.

P. 3 3

･

The internal battery is a consumable

accessory. The usage duration of the battery

per one charge decreases gradually each

time the battery is recharged.

Even the full charge state, when the

operation time is too short, contact the

phone number given in "Repairs" the last

page of this manual (in Japanese only) or

DOCOMO-specified repair office.

−

No operations are performed even by pressing the

keys on the terminal.

･

Check if you activate the screen lock. P.127

241

Appendix/Index

■

Phone call

The screen reacts slowly when a button is pressed.

･

When large amount of data is saved in the

terminal or transferring large-size data

between the terminal and microSD card,

the reactions on the screen may be delayed.

−

The UIM is not recognized.

･

Check if the UIM attached in the right

direction.

P. 3 0

The clock is not on time.

･

The clock time may become wrong while

turning on the power for a long time. Check

if "Auto" time adjust setting (Auto time

adjust via network) is set to on and turn the

power off and on in a place with strong

radio wave conditions.

P. 1 3 9

The terminal operation is unstable.

･

Instability may be caused by applications

that you installed after purchasing the

terminal. If the symptom is improved when

you boot the terminal in safe mode (near

default state), uninstalling the installed

application may improve the symptom.

To boot the terminal in safe mode, press and

hold

for over a second with the

terminal OFF until SONY logo appears, and

then touch and hold

until the terminal

vibrates once. When safe mode is booted,

"Safe mode" is displayed at the lower left of

the screen.

To exit the safe mode, turn power OFF and

then ON.

* Back up the necessary data before using

safe mode.

* Some widgets that you created may be

removed.

* Safe mode is not a normal booting state.

To use ordinarily, exit the safe mode.

−

Cannot make a call even if you press the dial button.

･

Check if you activate the SIM card lock. P.126

･

Check if you activate Airplane mode. P.111

The ringtone does not sound.

･

Is the call alert volume of volume setting set

to silent?

P.121

･

Check if the silent mode is active. P.120

･

Is the ring time for Voice Mail service or Call

Forwarding Service "0 Sec."?

P. 9 8

P.100

242

Appendix/Index

■

Display

■

Sound

■

Display data

■

Camera

■

1Seg

Calls are not connected.

(Even when moving "

圏外

(out of service area)" does

not disappear, or although radio waves are enough,

making/receiving calls is unavailable.)

･

Turn the power OFF and ON, or remove and

attach UIM.

P. 3 0

P. 3 7

･

Due to the nature of radio waves, making/

receiving calls may be unavailable even

when "not out of service area" or "

appears on the display for the radio wave

condition". Move to the other place and call

again.

−

･

Due to the crossing of radio waves, at the

crowded public places, calls/mails are

crossed and the connection status may not

be good. Move to other place or call again

at other time.

−

The display is dim.

･

Check if the backlight time-out is set. P.123

･

Check if the brightness of screen is

changed.

P. 1 2 2

･

Check if you activate eco

モード

(eco mode). P. 7 5

･

Check if you cover the Proximity sensor with

sticker etc.

P. 2 9

･

When the temperature of the terminal

becomes high while using, the display may

become darker. It is not abnormal.

−

During a voice call, the distant party's voice is hard

to listen to or too loud.

･

Check if the listening volume of the sound

volume setting is changed.

P. 8 4

Images or ringtones set in each feature do not work

and the terminal operates in the default data.

･

Is the inserted UIM the same one that is set

when the images or ringtones are

obtained?

−

Still images and video taken with the camera are

blurred.

･

Check if clouds or dirt attach to the lens of

camera.

−

･

To shoot a portrait image, use the face

detection function.

P.177

･

Shoot using shake reducing function. P.184

P.190

Watching 1Seg is unavailable.

･

Are you out of terrestrial digital TV

broadcasting service area or in a place

where airwave is weak?

−

･

Is channel set? P.216

243

Appendix/Index

■

Osaifu-Keitai

■

International roaming

■

Data management

Osaifu-Keitai function is unavailable.

･

Is Osaifu-Keitai lock activated? P.225

･

Do you place mark of the terminal over

an IC card reader?

P. 2 2 4

Cannot use the terminal overseas.

■

When antenna mark is displayed

･

Do you subscribe WORLD WING?

Check if you subscribe WORLD WING.

−

■

Out of service area indicator appears

･

Check if you are out of the international

roaming service area or in an area with poor

signal strength. Check if the service area and

network operator are available, referring to

"Mobile Phone User's Guide [International

Services]" or DOCOMO International

Services website.

･

Try to change the network settings or

overseas network operator settings.

Set "Search mode" of "Service providers" to

"Automatic".

Set "Network Mode" to "WCDMA preferred/

GSM".

･

Turning off the terminal and then turning

on again may work for the restoration.

P. 2 3 6

P. 2 3 8

P. 3 7

Cannot perform data communication overseas.

･

Mark the data roaming checkbox. P.238

The terminal suddenly became unavailable while

using overseas.

･

Check if usage amount exceeds the limit of

maximum charges for use.

For use of "International roaming (WORLD

WING)", the limit of maximum charges for

use is set in advance. If exceeding the limit

of maximum charges for use, pay the

charges.

−

Cannot receive calls overseas.

･

Is "Restricting incoming calls" set to

"Activate restricting"?

P.240

No caller ID is notified/A notified caller ID is

different from that of the caller/Functions for using

contents saved in phonebook or those using Caller

ID notification do not operate.

･

Even if a caller notifies its caller ID, it is not

displayed on the terminal unless the

network or network operator notifies it. And

a different caller ID may be notified

depending on the network or network

operator you use.

−

Data transfer is not performed.

･

Check if USB hub is used. If you use USB hub,

operations may not be performed correctly.

−

Data saved in microSD card is not displayed.

･

Remove the microSD card and insert it

again.

P. 3 1

244

Appendix/Index

■

Bluetooth function

No service

･

The terminal is out of service area, or the

received signal is too weak. Move to a location

where radio signal can be reached.

･

The UIM is not working properly.

Insert the UIM in another terminal. If this

works, it is probably the terminal that is

causing the problem. In this case, contact

"Repairs" on the last page of this manual (in

Japanese only).

Removing and inserting UIM may improve

the problem.

SIM card is locked

Enter your PIN code (P.126) correctly.

SIM card is PUK-locked

Enter your PUK (Personal Unblocking Key)

(P.126) correctly.

The phone storage is full

There is no memory space. Delete

unnecessary applications (P.131) to obtain

memory space.

When trying to display an image, "

" appears

instead of it.

Or "

" appears for the demo play or the preview

function.

･

" may appear instead of destroyed image

data.

−

The terminal cannot be connected to a Bluetooth

communication device/A Bluetooth

communication device cannot be found from the

terminal.

･

Make Bluetooth communication device

(commercial item) registering stand-by state

and then register the device on the

terminal. If you delete already registered

device and register the device again as a

new device, delete the registrations on both

Bluetooth communication device

(commercial item) and the terminal and

then perform registration of the devices.

P. 1 6 7

Calls cannot be made from the terminal connecting

to external device such as car navigation or

handsfree device.

･

If calls are made several times when the

other party does not answer or is out of

service, the call to this number may be

disabled. In this case, turn terminal off and

on.

−

Error messages

245

Appendix/Index

･

Make sure that the warranty is received with

the terminal upon purchase. Check to be sure

that "

販売店名・お買い上げ日

(the name of the

retailer, date of purchase)", and other items

have been filled out on the warranty before

storing it in a safe place. If any necessary

information is not provided, immediately

contact the retailer and request to complete

the warranty. The terminal comes with a year's

free warranty starting from the date of

purchase.

･

Specifications of this product and its

accessories are subject to change for

improvement without prior notice.

･

Data saved in the Contacts etc. may be

changed/lost due to the trouble/repairs or

handling of the terminal. Note down the data

such as the contacts on a separate memo and

keep it safely to prevent such problems.

* You can save contents data in a microSD card

inserted to the terminal.

If you have problems with the

terminal

Before asking repair, see "Troubleshooting"

(P.243) in this manual to check the problem. If

the problem still persists, contact "Repairs"

on the last page of this manual (in Japanese

only).

If repair is required resultingly

Bring the terminal to the DOCOMO-specified

repair office. However, it must be taken

during business hours of the repair office.

Make sure to bring a warranty card with the

product when you visit the shop. Note that

repair may take some days depending on the

problem.

■

Within the warranty period

･

We repair the terminal free of charge

based on the terms documented in the

warranty.

Warranty and After Sales

Services

Warranty

After Sales Services

246

Appendix/Index

･

When requesting a repair, make sure to

bring the warranty card with the terminal.

Repair requests that are not accompanied

by the warranty or that involve

malfunction and damage due to incorrect

handling by the owner (damage of liquid

crystal, connector, etc.) will only be

repaired at the owner's expense, even if

the warranty period is still effective.

･

Malfunction due to use of devices and

consumable parts other than those

specified by DOCOMO will only be

repaired at the owner's expense, even if

the warranty period is still effective.

■

Note that repair may be refused in the

following cases:

･

When some water problem is

acknowledged by the repair office (e.g.

water leak seal is reacted).

･

When the terminal has corrosion due to

wet by liquid, condensation, perspiration,

etc. or the internal circuit board is

damaged or deformed (we may not be

able to repair when the microUSB

connector, headset connecting jack,

HDMI connecting jack, liquid crystal, etc. is

damaged or the frame itself is cracked)

based on the result of our examination.

- Even if repair is possible, it will be done

at the owner's expense, as this type of

corrosion or damage is not covered by

the warranty.

■

If the warranty period expires

We will repair the terminal at the owner's

expense.

■

Parts stock period

The functional parts necessary to repair the

terminal will be basically available for a

minimum of six years after the manufacture

is discontinued.

However, depending on the defective

portion, repair may not be possible because

of a shortage of repair parts. Note that repair

may still be possible depending on the

defective portion even if the stock period

has expired. Contact "Repairs" on the last

page of this manual (in Japanese only).

Precautions

●

Never modify the terminal or accessories.

･

Doing so may result in fire, injuries or

malfunctions.

･

The modified terminal may be repaired

only if the owner agrees on that all the

modified parts are restored to the original

conditions.

However, repairs may be refused

depending on the modifications.

247

Appendix/Index

The following cases may be considered as

modifications.

- Put a seal etc. on the liquid crystal or

keypad.

- Glued decorations on the terminal using

adhesion bond, etc.

- Change the parts such as exterior to

other than DOCOMO standard parts.

･

Malfunction and damage due to

modifications will be repaired at the

owner's expense, even if the warranty

period is still effective.

●

The model plate must not be removed

from the terminal.

The model plate certifies that the terminal

satisfies technical standards. It should be

noted that if the plate is removed or is

replaced with a different plate, and the

original model plate cannot be verified, it

may disqualify the unit from repairs due to

not being able to determine the technical

standards of that particular phone.

●

Note that the settings and other

information may be reset (cleared) as a

result of malfunction, repair or other

handling. In this case, make the settings

again.

●

After the repair, Wi-Fi MAC address or

Bluetooth address may be changed

regardless of the repaired parts.

●

A material that generates a magnetic field

is used in the following parts of the

terminal.

Do not hold an object that is easily

affected by magnetism, such as a cash

card, close to the terminal. You may not

be able to use the card any more.

Where it is used: Speaker, earpiece

Precautions on memory dial

(Contacts function) and downloaded

data

Note that data you created or data you

retrieved or downloaded from sources other

than your terminal may be changed or lost

when you change the model or have repairs

done to the terminal. DOCOMO shall have no

liability for any change or loss of any kind.

Under some circumstances, DOCOMO may

replace your terminal with its equivalent

instead of repairing it.

248

Appendix/Index

You can update the terminal to the most

recent software for optimal performance and

to get the latest enhancements.

❖

Note

･

When the terminal is connected to the Internet using

the mobile network connection, data

communication fee is applied.

･

Make sure you back up and save all data contained in

the terminal before you start updating the terminal.

･

For the first time activating the terminal after

software update, the operation may be slower from

several minutes to several ten minutes due to data

update. The required time varies by the data in the

terminal. Do not turn the power off until usual

operation speed comebacks.

❖

Information

･

For details, refer to http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/

support/.

Setting notification of Software

update

You can set to be notified of updating

software.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Update center].

Tap

, then tap [Settings].

Mark [Notifications] checkbox.

･

To change the notification tone, tap

[Notification tone], then tap notification

tone you want to change, and then tap

[Done].

❖

Information

･

If you mark [Notification vibration] checkbox in Step

3, Software update is notified by vibration.

Updating software

249

Appendix/Index

Downloading software to update

Software can be downloaded wirelessly

directly from your terminal via the Internet by

using mobile network connection or by using

a Wi-Fi network connection.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Update center].

Tap [System] tab, then tap

and then tap [Refresh].

･

The terminal searches for software

updates.

❖

Information

･

"Updates"/"New" tabs in the Update center screen

are not available because the services are not

provided in Japan.

❖

Note

･

For software update via mobile network, a high

packet communication charge will be applied

because of a large amount data communication. For

this reason, subscription of packet flat-rate service is

highly recommended.

･

While you are using roaming service overseas, you

cannot search for or download update software

through the mobile network.

Updating the latest software

automatically

You can update the latest software update

automatically on regular basis. If software

update is searched, appears on the status

bar.

From the Home screen, tap ,

then tap [Update center].

Tap

and [Settings].

Tap [Allow automatic

update:]

[Via Wi-Fi only]/[Via 3G/

Wi-Fi].

❖

Note

･

Note that if you select [Via 3G/Wi-Fi] in the Step 3, a

Wi-Fi connection automatically switches to 3G

connection when the Wi-Fi connection is unstable

and packet communication fee may apply.

･

Note that packet communication fee may apply for

searching automatically.

Downloading software updates

wirelessly

250

Appendix/Index

You can update software by using PC

Companion that can be installed into a PC

from the terminal.

❖

Information

･

To install PC Companion on a PC, an Internet

connection is required.

When PC Companion is not installed

on your PC

Use the supplied microUSB cable

to connect the terminal to a PC.

On the terminal, tap [Install].

･

Installer of PC Companion starts on the

PC.

Follow the onscreen instructions

on the PC to install.

･

After installation, PC Companion starts

on the PC. If further software update is

searched, it is automatically notified.

Follow the onscreen instructions on the

PC.

When PC Companion is installed on

your PC

Check if PC Companion is activated

on the PC. If not, activate PC

Companion from the Start menu.

Connect the terminal to a PC using

a microUSB cable.

Follow the onscreen instructions

on the PC.

･

If available software update is found, it

is automatically notified.

Connecting to a PC and

updating

251

Appendix/Index

■

The terminal

Main specification

Product name

SO-05D

Size

Approx. 126mm (H)

approx. 66mm (W)

approx. 11.9mm (T)

(Thickest part : Approx.

11.9mm)

Weight

Approx. 149g

Storage

ROM 16GB

RAM 1GB

External storage

Compatible with microSD

card of up to 2GB, and

microSDHC card of up to

32GB (as of February,

2012).

Continuous

stand-by

time

FOMA/3G

Approx. 410 hours

(stationary)

GSM

Approx. 290 hours

(stationary)

Continuous

call time

FOMA/3G

Approx. 430 min.

GSM

Approx. 400 min.

Charging

time

AC Adapter

Approx. 190 min.

DC Adapter

Approx. 190 min.

1Seg watching time

Approx. 290 min.

Display Type

TFT16,777,216 colors

Size

Approx. 4.3 inches

Number of

dots

Width 720 dots

Hight 1280 dots

Image

pickup

device

Type

Camera : CMOS sensor

Front camera : CMOS

sensor

Size

Camera: 1/3.0 inches

Front camera :

1/6.0 inches

Camera pixels

Camera :

Effective pixels : Approx.

12,100,000 pixels

(Recorded pixels : Approx.

12,000,000 pixels)

Front camera :

Effective pixels : Approx.

1,300,000 pixels

(Recorded pixels : Approx.

1,220,000 pixels)

Digital zoom

Camera : Max. 16x (41

levels)

Front camera :

―

Still image capture size

Camera : 4000

3000

(12MP 4:3)

4000

2250 (9MP 16:9)

1632

1224 (2MP 4:3)

1920

1080 (2MP 16:9)

Front camera : 1280

720

(1MP 16:9)

1280

960 (1MP 4:3)

Video recording size

Video camera :

1920

1080 (Full HD)

1280

720 (HD 720p)

640

480 (VGA)

Front video camera :

1280

720 (HD 720p)

640

480 (VGA)

Frame rate

Max. 30 fps

252

Appendix/Index

*1 It is confirmed that the terminal and all Bluetooth

devices are compliant with Bluetooth standards

designated by Bluetooth SIG, and they are

authenticated. However, procedures may differ or

data transfer may not be possible depending on the

device's characteristics or specifications.

*2 May vary by the signal status and/or whether there

is an interference between communications

devices.

*3 Bluetooth standards for Bluetooth device

connection procedure according to the product's

applications.

･

Continuous call time is an estimate of the

operation time for calling when radio signal

reception is normal.

･

Continuous stand-by time is an estimate of

the stand-by time when radio signal

reception is normal.

In certain circumstances, the stand-by time

may drop to as low as half the time shown

due to the battery charge, function settings,

temperature, or radio signal reception in the

area (no reception or weak).

･

A use of the Internet reduces the actual call

(communication)/stand-by time.

Composing messages or activating the

camera or applications also reduces call

(communication)/stand-by time even if you

do not call or use the Internet.

･

Stationary continuous stand-by time is the

estimated average operation time when radio

signal reception is normal.

･

Moving continuous stand-by time is the

estimated average operation time when the

terminal remains in the combined conditions

of "stationary" or "moving" in a service area

when radio signal reception is normal and the

condition of "out of area".

･

Charging time is an estimate of the time

required to charge a completely empty

internal battery.

Music

playback

MP3 file

Continuous playback

time

Approx. 1380 min.

(Background playback

supported)

Wireless LAN

Compliant with

IEEE802.11b/g/n

(Corresponding

frequency band to

IEEE802.11n : 2.4 GHz)

Bluetooth Supported

Bluetooth

version

Compliant with

Bluetooth standard Ver.

2.1 + EDR

Radio power

Bluetooth standard

Power Class 1

Available

communication

distance

Within approx. 10 m

Supported

Bluetooth

profile

A2DP, AVRCP, HFP, HSP,

OPP, PBAP, SPP

253

Appendix/Index

■

Internal battery

■

File format

The terminal supports the display or

playback of the following file format:

* Still images are saved in JPEG format.

■

Numbers of still images (Estimation)

* Number of images shot with a resolution of 2MP.

■

Time length of shooting video

(Estimation)

* Time of recording with a resolution of 640

480

(VGA).

To refer to details (including certification

numbers) on authorization and compliance

mark particular to the terminal, perform the

following operation.

From the Home screen, tap

and tap

[Settings]

[About phone]

[Legal

information]

[Certificates].

Battery type

Lithium Ion Battery

Voltage

DC3.7V

Current

1840mAh

Type File format

Sound

MP3, 3GPP, MP4, AMR, AMRWB, SMF,

XMF, WAV, iMelody, RTTTL/RTX, OTA,

Ogg vorbis

Still image

JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP

Video

3GPP, MP4

Savable number of shot

images to the internal

storage

Up to approx. 18500

images

Savable number of shot

images to a microSD card

(2GB)

Up to approx. 3300

images

Savable time of

recording to the

internal storage

Per video : Up to approx.

134 min.

In total : Up to approx. 753

min.

Savable time of

recording to a microSD

card (2GB)

Per video : Up to approx.

134 min.

In total : Up to approx. 134

min.

Authorization and

Compliance

254

Appendix/Index

Mobile phone: GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/

1800/1900 & UMTS/HSPA B1/5/6/19 & LTE B1

This model SO-05D mobile phone complies

with Japanese technical regulations and

international guidelines regarding exposure

to radio waves.

This mobile phone was designed in

observance of Japanese technical regulations

regarding exposure to radio waves

and

limits to exposure to radio waves

recommended by a set of equivalent

international guidelines. This set of

international guidelines was set out by the

International Commission on Non-Ionizing

Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), which is in

collaboration with the World Health

Organization (WHO), and the permissible

limits include a substantial safety margin

designed to assure the safety of all persons,

regardless of age and health condition.

The technical regulations and international

guidelines set out limits for radio waves as

the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR, which is

the value of absorbed energy in any 10 grams

of tissue over a 6-minute period. The SAR

limit for mobile phones is 2.0 W/kg. The

highest SAR value for this mobile phone

when tested for use at the ear is 0.97 W/kg.

There may be slight differences between the

SAR levels for each product, but they all

satisfy the limit.

This is due to automatic changes to the

power level of the device to ensure it only

uses the minimum required to reach the

network. Therefore in general, the closer you

are to a base station, the lower the power

output of the device.

This mobile phone can be used in positions

other than against your ear. This mobile

phone satisfies the international guidelines

when used with a carrying case or a wearable

accessory approved by NTT DOCOMO or the

manufacturer

. In case you are not using the

approved accessory, please use a product

that does not contain any metals, and one

that positions the mobile phone at least 1.5

cm away from your body.

The World Health Organization has stated

that "a large number of studies have been

performed over the last two decades to

assess whether mobile phones pose a

Specific Absorption Rate of

Mobile Phone, etc.

Specific Absorption Rate of

Mobile Phone

255

Appendix/Index

potential health risk. To date, no adverse

health effects have been established as being

caused by mobile phone use."

Please refer to the WHO website if you would

like more detailed information.

http://www.who.int/docstore/peh-emf/

publications/facts_press/fact_english.htm

Please refer to the websites listed below if

you would like more detailed information

regarding SAR.

Ministry of Internal Affairs and

Communications Website:

http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/e/sys/ele/

index.htm

Association of Radio Industries and

Businesses Website:

http://www.arib-emf.org/index02.html (in

Japanese only)

NTT DOCOMO, INC. Website:

http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/

product/sar/

Sony Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.

Website:

http://www.sonymobile.co.jp/product/SAR/

(in Japanese only)

*1 Technical regulations are defined by the

Ministerial Ordinance Related to Radio Law

(Article 14-2 of Radio Equipment

Regulations).

*2 Regarding the method of measuring SAR

when using mobile phones in positions

other than against the ear, international

standards (IEC62209-2) were set in March

2010. On the other hand, technical

regulation is currently being deliberated on

by national council. (As of October, 2011)

United States & Canada

THIS PHONE MODEL HAS BEEN CERTIFIED IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE GOVERNMENT'S

REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO

WAVES.

The SO-05D mobile phones have been

designed to comply with applicable safety

requirements for exposure to radio waves.

Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and

receiver. It is designed to not exceed the

limits* of exposure to radio frequency (RF)

energy set by governmental authorities.

These limits establish permitted levels of RF

energy for the general population. The

guidelines are based on standards that were

developed by international scientific

organizations through periodic and

thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The

Radio Wave Exposure and

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

Information

256

Appendix/Index

standards include a safety margin designed

to assure the safety of all individuals,

regardless of age and health.

The radio wave exposure guidelines employ

a unit of measurement known as the Specific

Absorption Rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are

conducted using standardized methods with

the phone transmitting at its highest certified

power level in all used frequency bands.

While there may be differences between the

SAR levels of various phone models, they are

all designed to meet the relevant guidelines

for exposure to radio waves. For more

information on SAR, please refer to the safe

and efficient use chapter in the User Guide.

The highest SAR value as reported to the

authorities for this phone model when tested

for use by the ear is 1.07 W/kg*, and when

worn on the body is 0.51 W/kg* for speech

and 1.12 W/kg* for data calls. For body-worn

operation, the phone has been tested when

positioned a minimum of 15 mm from the

body without any metal parts in the vicinity

of the phone or when properly used with an

appropriate Sony Mobile communications AB

accessory and worn on the body.

For devices which include "WiFi hotspot"

functionality, SAR measurements for the

device operating in WiFi hotspot mode were

taken using a separation distance of 10mm.

Use of third-party accessories may result in

different SAR levels than those reported.

** Before a phone model is available for sale

to the public in the US, it must be tested and

certified by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) that it does not exceed the

limit established by the government-

adopted requirement for safe exposure*. The

tests are performed in positions and

locations (i.e., by the ear and worn on the

body) as required by the FCC for each model.

The FCC has granted an Equipment

Authorization for this phone model with all

reported SAR levels evaluated as in

compliance with the FCC RF exposure

guidelines. While there may be differences

between the SAR levels of various phones, all

mobile phones granted an FCC equipment

authorization meet the government

requirement for safe exposure. SAR

information on this phone model is on file at

the FCC and can be found under the Display

Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/

fccid/ after searching on FCC ID PY7PM-0020.

Additional information on SAR can be found

on the Cellular Telecommunications &

Internet Association (CTIA) website at http://

www.ctia.org/.

257

Appendix/Index

* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for

mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/

kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue.

The standard incorporates a margin of safety to give

additional protection for the public and to account

for any variations in measurements.

** This paragraph is only applicable to authorities and

customers in the United States.

Europe

This mobile phone model SO-05D has been

designed to comply with applicable safety

requirements for exposure to radio waves.

These requirements are based on scientific

guidelines that include safety margins

designed to assure the safety of all persons,

regardless of age and health.

The radio wave exposure guidelines employ

a unit of measurement known as the Specific

Absorption Rate, or SAR. Tests for SAR are

conducted using standardized methods with

the phone transmitting at its highest certified

power level in all used frequency bands.

While there may be differences between the

SAR levels of various phone models, they are

all designed to meet the relevant guidelines

for exposure to radio waves.

For more information on SAR, please refer to

the safety chapter in the User's Guide.

SAR data information for residents in

countries that have adopted the SAR limit

recommended by the International

Commission of Non-lonizing Radiation

Protection (ICNIRP), which is 2 W/kg

averaged over ten (10) gram of tissue (for

example European Union, Japan, Brazil and

New Zealand):

The highest SAR value for this model phone

tested by Sony Mobile communications AB

for use at the ear is 0.97 W/kg (10g).

258

Appendix/Index

Please follow these guidelines. Failure

to do so might entail a potential health

risk or product malfunction. If in doubt as to

its proper function, have the product

checked by a certified service partner before

charging or using it.

■

Recommendations for care and safe

use of our products

･

Handle with care and keep in a clean and

dust-free place.

･

Warning!

May explode if disposed of in

fire.

･

Do not expose to liquid or moisture or

excess humidity.

･

For optimum performance, the

product should not be operated in

temperatures below +5

C (+41

or above +40

C (+104

F). Do not expose

the battery to temperatures above +60

(+140

F).

･

Do not expose to flames or lit

tobacco products.

･

Do not drop, throw or try to bend

the product.

･

Do not paint or attempt to

disassemble or modify the

product. Only Sony Mobile

communications AB authorised

personnel should perform service.

･

Consult with authorised medical staff and

the instructions of the medical device

manufacturer before using the product

near pacemakers or other medical devices

or equipment.

･

Discontinue use of electronic devices, or

disable the radio transmitting

functionality of the device, where

required or requested to do so.

･

Do not use where a potentially explosive

atmosphere exists.

･

Do not place the product, or install

wireless equipment, in the area above an

air bag in a car.

･

Caution:

Cracked or broken displays may

create sharp edges or splinters that could

be harmful upon contact.

･

Do not use the Bluetooth Headset in

positions where it is uncomfortable or will

be subject to pressure.

Guidelines for Safe and

Efficient Use

259

Appendix/Index

■

Children

Warning!

Keep out of the reach of

children. Do not allow children to

play with mobile phones or accessories.

They could hurt themselves or others.

Products may contain small parts that could

become detached and create a choking

hazard.

■

Power supply (Charger)

Connect the charger to power sources as

marked on the product. Do not use

outdoors or in damp areas. Do not alter or

subject the cord to damage or stress.

Unplug the unit before cleaning it. Never

alter the plug. If it does not fit into the outlet,

have a proper outlet installed by an

electrician. When a power supply is

connected there is a small drain of power.

To avoid this small energy waste,

disconnect the power supply when the

product is fully charged. Use of charging

devices that are not Sony Mobile

communications AB branded may pose

increased safety risks.

■

Battery

New or idle batteries can have short-term

reduced capacity. Fully charge the battery

before initial use. Use for the intended

purpose only. Charge the battery in

temperatures between +5

C (+41

F) and

+35

C (+95

F). Do not put the battery into

your mouth. Do not let the battery contacts

touch another metal object. Turn off the

product before removing the battery.

Performance depends on temperatures,

signal strength, usage patterns, features

selected and voice or data transmissions.

Only Sony Mobile communications AB

service partners should remove or replace

built-in batteries. Use of batteries that are

not Sony Mobile communications AB

branded may pose increased safety risks.

Replace the battery only with another Sony

Mobile communications AB battery that has

been qualified with the product per the

standard IEEE-1725. Use of an unqualified

battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,

leakage or other hazard.

260

Appendix/Index

■

Personal medical devices

Mobile phones may affect implanted

medical equipment. Reduce risk of

interference by keeping a minimum

distance of 22 cm (8.7 inches) between the

phone and the device. Use the phone at

your right ear. Do not carry the phone in

your breast pocket. Turn off the phone if

you suspect interference. For all medical

devices, consult a physician and the

manufacturer.

■

Driving

Some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use

of phones in their vehicles unless a

handsfree kit with an external antenna

supports the installation. Check with the

vehicle manufacturer's representative to be

sure that the mobile phone or Bluetooth

handsfree will not affect the electronic

systems in the vehicle. Full attention should

be given to driving at all times and local

laws and regulations restricting the use of

wireless devices while driving must be

observed.

■

GPS/Location based functions

Some products provide GPS/Location

based functions. Location determining

functionality is provided "As is" and "With all

faults". Sony Mobile communications AB

does not make any representation or

warranty as to the accuracy of such location

information.

Use of location-based information by the

device may not be uninterrupted or error

free and may additionally be dependent on

network service availability. Please note that

functionality may be reduced or prevented

in certain environments such as building

interiors or areas adjacent to buildings.

Caution: Do not use GPS functionality in a

manner which causes distraction from

driving.

■

Emergency calls

Calls cannot be guaranteed under all

conditions. Never rely solely upon mobile

phones for essential communication. Calls

may not be possible in all areas, on all

networks, or when certain network services

and/or phone features are used.

261

Appendix/Index

■

Antenna

Use of antenna devices not marketed by

Sony Mobile communications AB could

damage the phone, reduce performance,

and produce SAR levels above the

established limits. Do not cover the antenna

with your hand as this affects call quality,

power levels and can shorten talk and

standby times.

■

Radio Frequency (RF) exposure and

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

When the phone or Bluetooth handsfree is

turned on, it emits low levels of radio

frequency energy. International safety

guidelines have been developed through

periodic and thorough evaluation of

scientific studies. These guidelines establish

permitted levels of radio wave exposure.

The guidelines include a safety margin

designed to assure the safety of all persons

and to account for any variations in

measurements.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is used to

measure radio frequency energy absorbed

by the body when using a mobile phone.

The SAR value is determined at the highest

certified power level in laboratory

conditions, but because the phone is

designed to use the minimum power

necessary to access the chosen network,

the actual SAR level can be well below this

value. There is no proof of difference in

safety based on difference in SAR value.

Products with radio transmitters sold in

the US must be certified by the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC). When

required, tests are performed when the

phone is placed at the ear and when worn

on the body. For body-worn operation, the

phone has been tested when positioned a

minimum of 15 mm from the body without

any metal parts in the vicinity of the phone

or when properly used with an appropriate

Sony Mobile communications AB accessory

and worn on the body.

For more information about SAR and radio

frequency exposure, go to:

http://

www.sonymobile.co.jp/product/SAR/

262

Appendix/Index

■

Flight mode

Bluetooth and WLAN functionality, if

available in the device, can be enabled in

Flight mode but may be prohibited

onboard aircraft or in other areas where

radio transmissions are prohibited. In such

environments, please seek proper

authorisation before enabling Bluetooth or

WLAN functionality even in Flight mode.

■

Malware

Malware (short for malicious software) is

software that can harm the mobile phone

or other computers. Malware or harmful

applications can include viruses, worms,

spyware, and other unwanted programs.

While the device does employ security

measures to resist such efforts, Sony Mobile

communications AB does not warrant or

represent that the device will be impervious

to the introduction of malware. You can

however reduce the risk of malware attacks

by using care when downloading content

or accepting applications, refraining from

opening or responding to messages from

unknown sources, using trustworthy

services to access the Internet, and only

downloading content to the mobile phone

from known, reliable sources.

■

Accessories

Use only Sony Mobile communications AB

branded original accessories and certified

service partners. Sony Mobile

communications AB does not test third-

party accessories. Accessories may

influence RF exposure, radio performance,

loudness, electric safety and other areas.

Third-party accessories and parts may pose

a risk to your health or safety or decrease

performance.

■

Disposal of old electrical and

electronic equipment

Electronic equipment and batteries should

not be included as household waste but

should be left at an appropriate collection

point for recycling. This helps prevent

potential negative consequences for the

environment and human health. Check

local regulations by contacting your local

city office, your household waste disposal

service, the shop where you purchased the

product or calling a Sony Mobile

communications AB Contact Center. Do not

attempt to remove internal batteries.

Internal batteries shall be removed only by

a waste treatment facility or trained service

professional.

263

Appendix/Index

■

Disposing of the battery

Check local regulations or call a Sony

Mobile communications AB Contact Center

for information. Never use municipal waste.

■

Memory card

If the product comes complete with a

removable memory card, it is generally

compatible with the handset purchased

but may not be compatible with other

devices or the capabilities of their memory

cards. Check other devices for compatibility

before purchase or use. If the product is

equipped with a memory card reader,

check memory card compatibility before

purchase or use.

Memory cards are generally formatted

prior to shipping. To reformat the memory

card, use a compatible device. Do not use

the standard operating system format

when formatting the memory card on a PC.

For details, refer to the operating

instructions of the device or contact

customer support.

Warning!

If the device requires an adapter for insertion

into the handset or another device, do not

insert the card directly without the required

adapter.

■

Precautions on memory card use

･

Do not expose the memory card to

moisture.

･

Do not touch terminal connections with

your hand or any metal object.

･

Do not strike, bend, or drop the memory

card.

･

Do not attempt to disassemble or modify

the memory card.

･

Do not use or store the memory card in

humid or corrosive locations or in

excessive heat such as a closed car in

summer, in direct sunlight or near a

heater, etc.

･

Do not press or bend the end of the

memory card adapter with excessive

force.

･

Do not let dirt, dust, or foreign objects get

into the insert port of any memory card

adapter.

･

Check you have inserted the memory

card correctly.

264

Appendix/Index

･

Insert the memory card as far as it will go

into any memory card adapter needed.

The memory card may not operate

properly unless fully inserted.

･

We recommend that you make a backup

copy of important data. We are not

responsible for any loss or damage to

content you store on the memory card.

･

Recorded data may be damaged or lost

when you remove the memory card or

memory card adapter, turn off the power

while formatting, reading or writing data,

or use the memory card in locations

subject to static electricity or high

electrical field emissions.

■

Protection of personal information

Erase personal data before disposing of the

product. To delete data, perform a master

reset. Deleting data from the phone

memory does not ensure that it cannot be

recovered. Sony Mobile communications

AB does not warrant against recovery of

information and does not assume

responsibility for disclosure of any

information even after a master reset.

Loudness warning!

Avoid volume levels that may be harmful to

your hearing.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions:

Any change or modification not expressly

approved by Sony Mobile communications

AB may void the user's authority to operate

the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in

a particular installation.

FCC Statement for the USA

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,

and

(2) This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

265

Appendix/Index

If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference

by one or more of the following measures:

･

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

･

Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

･

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

･

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

We,

Sony Mobile Communications AB

Nya Vattentornet SE-221 88 Lund, Sweden

declare under our sole responsibility that our

product

Sony type PM-0020-BV

and in combination

with our accessories, to which this

declaration relates is in conformity with the

appropriate standards EN 301 511:V9.0.2, EN

301 489-7:V1.3.1, EN 301 908-1:V5.2.1, EN 301

908-2:V5.2.1, EN 301 908-13:V5.2.1, EN 301

893:V1.5.1, EN 301 489-24:V1.5.1, EN 300 440-

2:V1.4.1, EN 301 489-3:V1.4.1, EN 300

328:V1.8.1, EN 301 489-17:V2.1.1, EN 302 291-

2:V1.1.1, EN 62209-1:2006 and EN 60950-

1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011,

following the provisions of Radio Equipment

and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment

Directive

1999/5/EC

Lund, June 2012

Pär Thuresson

Quality Officer, Head of Quality &

Validation

We fulfill the requirements of the R

＆

TTE

Directive (1999/5/EC)

Declaration of Conformity for

SO-05D

266

Appendix/Index

Software delivered with this device and its

media is owned by Sony Mobile

Communications AB, and/or its affiliated

companies and its suppliers and licensors.

Sony Mobile grants you a non-exclusive

limited licence to use the Software solely in

conjunction with the Device on which it is

installed or delivered. Ownership of the

Software is not sold, transferred or otherwise

conveyed.

Do not use any means to discover the source

code or any component of the Software,

reproduce and distribute the Software, or

modify the Software. You are entitled to

transfer rights and obligations to the

Software to a third party, solely together with

the Device with which you received the

Software, provided the third party agrees in

writing to be bound by the terms of this

Licence.

This licence exists throughout the useful life

of this Device. It can be terminated by

transferring your rights to the Device to a

third party in writing.

Failure to comply with any of these terms and

conditions will terminate the licence

immediately.

Sony Mobile and its third party suppliers and

licensors retain all rights, title and interest in

and to the Software. To the extent that the

Software contains material or code of a third

party, such third parties shall be beneficiaries

of these terms.

This licence is governed by the laws of

Sweden. When applicable, the foregoing

applies to statutory consumer rights.

In the event Software accompanying or

provided in conjunction with your device is

provided with additional terms and

conditions, such provisions shall also govern

your possession and usage of the Software.

End User Licence

Agreement

End User Licence Agreement

267

Appendix/Index

This product includes certain open source or

other software originating from third parties

that is subject to the GNU General Public

License (GPL), GNU Library/Lesser General

Public License (LGPL) and different and/or

additional copyright licenses, disclaimers and

notices. The exact terms of GPL, LGPL and

some other licenses, disclaimers and notices

are reproduced in the about box in this

product and are also available at http://

opensource.sonymobile.com.

Sony Mobile offers to provide source code of

software licensed under the GPL or LGPL or

some other open source licenses allowing

source code distribution to you on a CD-ROM

for a charge covering the cost of performing

such distribution, such as the cost of media,

shipping and handling, upon written request

to Sony Mobile Communications AB, Open

Source Software Management, Nya

Vattentornet, SE-221 88 Lund, Sweden. This

offer is valid for a period of three (3) years

from the date of the distribution of this

product by Sony Mobile.

This product and its accessories may be

covered and controlled by Japan's export

control regulations ("Foreign Exchange and

Foreign Trade Law" and related laws and

regulations). If you wish to export this

product and/or its accessories, you must

complete the necessary procedures at your

own responsibility and cost. For details about

the procedure, contact the Ministry of

Economy, Trade and Industry.

About Open Source

Software

About Open Source Software

Export Controls and

Regulations

268

Appendix/Index

About the Copyright and Portrait

rights

Copyrighted contents you recorded or

obtained from sites or Internet home pages

using this product by downloading or other

means, such as documents, images, music

data, software, are prohibited from

reproduction, transformation and

transmission over public lines without

consent of the copyright holders, unless

intended for personal use or any other

purpose permitted by law.

Note that some performances, shows, and

exhibitions may not allow photography,

movie shooting, or sound recording even for

personal use.

You should also refrain from taking a picture

of other people and disclosing it by such

means as posting it on a site on the Internet

without their consent because of possible

infringement of their right of portrait.

Trademarks

The company names and product names

appearing in this manual are trademarks or

registered trademarks of their respective

holders.

･

"FOMA", "i-mode", "i-

ppli", "Deco-mail", "sp-

mode", "WORLD WING", "WORLD CALL",

"ToruCa", "mopera", "mopera U", "iD", and logo

of "ToruCa" are trademarks or registered

trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, INC.

･

"Bluetooth" is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. INC., and Sony Mobile

Communications is licensed to use them.

･

"Wi-Fi" is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi

Alliance.

･

Wi-Fi Protected Setup and Wi-Fi Protected

Setup logos are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi

Alliance.

･

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Mark is a mark of

the Wi-Fi Alliance.

･

"Catch Phone (Call waiting service)" is a

registered trademark of Nippon Telegraph

and Telephone Corporation.

Intellectual Property Right

269

Appendix/Index

･

Rovi, G-GUIDE, G-GUIDE MOBILE

and their logos are registered

trademarks in Japan of U.S. Rovi

Corporation and/or its affiliates.

･

"Liquid Identity" logo, "Xperia", "PlayNow", and

"Timescape" are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Sony Mobile Communications

AB.

･

"APP NAVI", "acro" is a registered trademark of

Sony Mobile Communications, Inc.

･

"Media Go" is a trademark or registered

trademark of Sony Electronics Inc.

･

"PlayStation" and " " are trademarks or

registered trademarks or Sony Computer

Entertainment Inc.

･

"BRAVIA", "POBox", "Sony" and "Exmor R for

mobile" are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Sony Corporation.

･

"POBox" is a co-developed technology of

Sony Computer Science Laboratories, Inc. and

Sony Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.

･

"xLOUD" is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

･

microSD logo is a trademark of SD-3C,

LLC.

･

is a registered trademark of FeliCa

Networks, Inc.

･

FeliCa is a contactless IC card technology

developed by Sony Corporation.

･

FeliCa is a registered trademark of Sony

Corporation.

･

"Twitter" is a trademark or registered

trademark of Twitter, Inc.

･

"3GPP" is a trademark or registered trademark

of ETSI.

･

"Google" and "Google" logo, "Android" and

"Android" logo, "Android Market" and

"Android Market" logo, "Gmail", "mobile

Google Maps", "Google Talk", "Google

Latitude", "Google Calendar", "YouTube" and

"YouTube" logo and "Picasa" are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Google, Inc.

･

"Facebook" is a trademark or registered

trademark of Facebook, Inc.

･

mixi and mixi logo are registered trademarks

of mixi, Inc.

･

DLNA is a trademark or registered

trademark of the Digital Living

Network Alliance.

･

HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-

Definition Multimedia Interface, are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

270

Appendix/Index

･

"Microsoft", "Windows", "Outlook", "Windows

Vista", "Windows Server", "Windows Media"

and "ActiveSync" are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

･

This product contains technology subject to

certain intellectual property rights of

Microsoft. Use or distribution of this

technology outside of this product is

prohibited without the appropriate license(s)

from Microsoft.

･

Content owners use Microsoft PlayReady

™

content access technology to protect their

intellectual property, including copyrighted

content. This device uses PlayReady

technology to access PlayReady-protected

content and/or WMDRM-protected content.

If the device fails to properly enforce

restrictions on content usage, content owners

may require Microsoft to revoke the device's

ability to consume PlayReady-protected

content. Revocation should not affect

unprotected content or content protected by

other content access technologies. Content

owners may require you to upgrade

PlayReady to access their content. If you

decline an upgrade, you will not be able to

access content that requires the upgrade.

･

Contains Adobe

Flash

Player technology by

Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Adobe Flash Player Copyright

1996-2011

Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights

reserved.

Adobe, Flash and Flash logo are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United

States and/or other countries.

･

This product is licensed under the MPEG-4

visual and AVC patent portfolio license for the

personal and non-commercial use of a

consumer for (i) encoding video in

compliance with the MPEG-4 visual standard

("MPEG-4 video") or the AVC standard ("AVC

video") and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 or AVC

video that was encoded by a consumer

engaged in a personal and non-commercial

activity and/or was obtained from a video

provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide

MPEG-4 and/or AVC video. No license is

granted or shall be implied for any other use.

Additional information including that relating

to promotional, internal and commercial uses

and licensing may be obtained MPEG LA,

L.L.C. ("See http://www.mpegla.com "). MPEG

Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed

from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

271

Appendix/Index

･

Other product and company names

mentioned herein may be the trademarks of

their respective owners.

In context, TM and

mark are omitted.

･

Any rights not expressly granted herein are

reserved. All other trademarks are property of

their respective owners.

272

Appendix/Index

About phone ........................................ ...... 140

Access point

Initializing. ............................................... 110

Setting ..................................................... 109

Accessibility ................................................ 139

Account setting

Facebook ................................................. 133

Google..................................................... 132

Accounts & sync......................................... 132

Auto-sync .......................................... ...... 135

Adjusting sound volume.......................... 120

Airplane mode ........................................... 111

Alarm and Clock.............. ........................... 229

Setting alarm ............... ........................... 230

Android Market.......................................... 204

Anshin Scan ..................... .............................. 73

APP NAVI ........................................................ 73

Applications..........................................71, 129

Adding to Home screen........................... 77

Icon ............................................................. 72

Managing................................................ 130

Searching . .................................................. 79

Sorting...... .................................................. 77

Uninstalling.......................................77, 131

Applications button ..................................... 66

Applications screen ........ .............................. 71

Group................................................... 78, 79

Learning ..................................................... 71

Switching ................................................... 80

Area Mail ..................................................... 152

Audible touch tones .................................. 121

AUTO-GPS ............................................. 75, 107

Auto-rotate screen ..................................... 122

Backlight

Turning off ........................................ 38, 123

Turning on ........................................ 39, 132

Backup & restore ........................................ 108

Backing up............................................... 108

Restoring........................................... ....... 109

Battery level.......................................... 34, 140

Bluetooth.............................................. ....... 166

Device name .................................... ....... 167

Pair setting...............................................167

Book Store MyShelf...................................... 73

Bookmark .................................................... 156

Bookmarking a web page..................... 156

Editing ...................................................... 157

Opening.. ................................................. 157

Brightness.................................................... 122

Browser ....... ................................................. 153

Adjusting settings .................................. 155

Auto-fitting a web page ........................ 155

Closing .............................................. ....... 154

Copying text............................................ 155

Displaying.................... ............................ 154

Displaying new browser window ........154

Exiting ............................................... ....... 154

Going back to the previous page ........153

Moving ..................................................... 153

Index

273

Appendix/Index

Opening .................................................. 153

Searching text ............. ........................... 154

Setting home page................................ 155

Switching browser windows................ 154

Zooming in/out................................ ...... 154

Calculator....................................................... 75

Calendar ................................................ ...... 227

Creating schedule.................................. 228

Displaying schedule... ........................... 228

Call................. .................................................. 81

Declining .................................................... 83

Ending a call .............................................. 82

Making................................................. 81, 83

Mute............................................................ 84

On hold..... .................................................. 85

Receiving............................................. 82, 83

Speaker.............................................. ......... 84

Call forwarding..................................... ......... 99

Call history ..................................................... 85

Adding to Phonebook ............................. 86

Deleting........................ .............................. 86

Making a call..................................... ......... 86

Call settings ................................................ 119

Call Waiting........................................... ...... 101

Caller ID Display Request Service............ 103

Caller ID Notification ................................. 102

Camera .................................................. ...... 172

Face detection ........................................ 177

Front camera .................................... ...... 176

Front video camera ............................... 186

Quick launch................ ........................... 176

Recording videos................................... 186

Settings (still camera) ............................ 181

Settings (video camera)......................... 188

Shooting still pictures............................ 174

Smile detection.......................................178

Sweep Multi Angle.......................... ....... 179

Sweep Panorama............................. ....... 179

3D Sweep Panorama.............................. 179

Character entry............................................. 47

Character mode.................... 49, 52, 56, 57

Input method.............. .......... 49, 52, 56, 57

Settings ...................................................... 60

Charging ............................................... ......... 33

Using a PC.................................................. 36

Using AC adapter...................................... 36

Using desktop holder .............................. 34

Chat .............................................................. 151

Checkbox......................... .............................. 46

Connected devices (Media server) ..........170

Contact Picker 2.3.................................. 49, 64

Contacts ......................................................... 72

Data synchronization................................. 134

Auto-sync.......................................... ....... 135

Date & time.................................................. 139

Dial......................................................... ......... 72

Disaster kit.. ................................................... 73

Display.......................................................... 122

dmarket.......................................................... 72

dmenu............................................................ 72

docomo backup ........................................... 72

docomo location information.................... 76

docomo service ..........................................107

274

Appendix/Index

Ear speaker volume ...................................... 84

Early Warning "AreaMail".......................... 152

eco mode .............................................. ......... 75

Email ............................................................ 144

Deleting........................ ........................... 147

Forwarding .................. ........................... 147

Initial settings ......................................... 144

Receiving................................................. 145

Replying ............................................ ...... 147

Saving attachment file .......................... 146

Sending .... ............................................... 144

Email account

Adding............................................... ...... 148

Changing................................................. 148

Deleting........................ ........................... 149

Emergency call.............................................. 81

Facebook...... ............................................... 133

Deleting........................ ........................... 134

Flash Player Settings .................................... 76

FM radio ...................................................... 222

Force-quite....................... .............................. 38

Foursquare............................................ ...... 205

Gallery (photos/videos). ........................... 193

G-Guide program table ............................... 74

Gmail................................. ........................... 151

Google.......... ............................................... 132

Deleting........................ ........................... 134

Google Maps .............................................. 211

Current location............................... ...... 211

Directions ................................................213

Google Latitude...................................... 214

Layers............................ ............................ 213

Street View .............................................. 212

Google Talk. ................................................. 151

Google+ ......................................................... 74

GPS function ................... ............................ 209

Enabling GPS function........................... 211

Enabling Wireless networks..................211

Handwritten input ....................................... 57

HDMI...................................................... ....... 199

Home application......................... 66, 80, 108

Home screen ................................................. 66

Adding..... ................................................... 70

Deleting ..................................................... 70

Folder ......................................................... 69

Group ......................................................... 70

Kisekae .............................................. ......... 69

Learning............................................ ......... 66

List............ ................................................... 67

Shortcut ..................................................... 67

Sorting........................................................ 70

Wallpaper................................................... 69

Widget..... ................................................... 68

i-Channel........................................................ 72

Index character ............................................. 45

Infrared communication .................... ....... 163

Infrared data port ....... ..................... 29, 163

Initial settings................................................ 39

Internal storage .......................................... 136

275

Appendix/Index

Format ..................................................... 137

International call.................................. ......... 82

International roaming service ................. 234

International roaming setting ................. 240

Japanese syllabary keyboard...................... 56

Key lock

Setting ........................................................ 38

Unlocking................................................... 39

Keys............... .................................................. 44

Kisekae............................................................ 69

Koe-no-Takuhaibin .................................... 105

Landscape view .............. ........................... 122

Language & keyboard......................... ...... 138

Light sensor ................................................... 29

Link.................................... ........................... 156

Location information ................................ 209

Location & security .................................... 124

Machi-chara . .................................................. 72

Map Application ........................................... 74

Media Go............................................... ...... 162

Data transfer ........................................... 163

Installing............................................ ...... 162

Playlist...................................................... 203

Media Player .................... .............................. 73

Memo ............................................................. 74

Message (SMS)............................................ 141

Deleting message...................................143

Deleting thread................................ ....... 143

New registration of contact........... ....... 142

Receiving ................................................. 142

Sending............................................. ....... 141

Setting...................................................... 143

Messenger ..................................................... 74

micro USB cable.......................................... 158

microSD card........................................ 31, 136

Format ...................................................... 137

Missed call .. ................................................... 86

mixi ............................................................... 205

Mobile BRAVIA Engine............................... 122

mopera U..................................................... 111

mopera U Mail ............................................ 149

Moving data ................................................ 158

Music player ................................................ 200

Playback .. ................................................. 200

Playlist ...................................................... 203

Share......................................................... 202

My profile....................................................... 90

Name card creator........................................ 75

Network connection settings...................109

Network mode................ ............................ 238

Notification icon ............. .............................. 41

Notification LED............................................ 43

Notification panel................................ ......... 42

Notification ringtone .................................121

Nuisance Call Blocking service................. 103

276

Appendix/Index

OfficeSuite .................................................. 233

Online dictionary.......................................... 63

Osaifu-Keitai ............................................... 223

Osaifu-Keitai Lock Settings .................. 225

Own number ................................... 7, 90, 140

PC Companion ........................................... 159

Personal area ................................................. 80

Phone language......................................... 138

Phonebook .................................................... 87

Adding a new entry.................................. 88

Combining ................... .............................. 89

Deleting........................ .............................. 90

Editing ........................................................ 89

Exporting ............................................ 92, 95

Favorites ....................... .............................. 91

Importing ............................................ 93, 95

Making a call..................................... ......... 90

My profile ................................................... 90

Searching . .................................................. 88

Sending .... .................................................. 91

Setting photo ................................... ......... 92

PhoneBookCopy ........................................... 94

Phonepad keyboard..................................... 49

PIN code ...................................................... 126

Playing video.............................................. 197

PlayNow ...................................................... 233

POBox Touch User Guide.................... .. 58, 65

Preferred apps settings....................... 66, 108

Privacy ......................................................... 135

Proximity sensor ........................................... 29

PS Store ....................................................... 233

PUK code (Personal Unblocking Key)...... 126

QWERTY keyboard ....................................... 52

Radio button........................................ ......... 46

Recording videos........................................ 186

Remote operation settings....................... 104

Reset............ ................................................. 135

Restart ............................................................ 38

Ringtone setting......................................... 121

Ringtone volume............ ..................... 84, 121

Schedule ........................................................ 74

Creating .. ................................................. 228

Displaying.................... ............................ 228

Screen lock .................................................. 127

Changing ..................... ............................ 128

Setting...................................................... 127

Screen lock setting..................................... 123

Screenshot................................................... 191

SE Home...... ................................................. 233

Searching....................................................... 46

Voice search...................................... ......... 46

Second call settings ................................... 104

Security code

Network security code...........................125

PIN code................................................... 126

Setting menu .............................................. 107

Setup guide................................................... 39

Shooting still pictures................................ 174

Silent mode ................................................. 120

277

Appendix/Index

Slideshow.................................................... 196

Software keyboard ....................................... 48

Software update ........................................ 252

Sound .......................................................... 119

Specific Absorption Rate of Mobile Phone

...................................................................... 258

Specification ............................................... 255

sp-mode ...................................................... 110

sp-mode mail ............................................. 141

Status bar ....................................................... 41

Status icon ..................................................... 41

Stereo Headset with Microphone

...................................................... 83, 193, 222

Stopwatch........................ ........................... 232

Storage ........................................................ 136

Tethering ..................................................... 116

USB tethering ......................................... 116

Wi-Fi tethering ....................................... 117

Theme.......................................................... 122

Timer............................................................ 232

Timescape............................................. ...... 205

Display Tiles ................. ........................... 208

Filter ......................................................... 207

Setting ............................................ 206, 208

Tile...................................................... ...... 206

ToruCa.................................................... ...... 226

Touch screen ................... .............................. 44

Drag ............................................................ 44

Flick ............................................................. 45

Pinch ........................................................... 45

Tap ...................................................... ......... 44

Touch .......................................................... 44

Transferring data........................................ 158

Troubleshooting ......................................... 243

Turning power on/off ......................... ......... 37

Twitter ......... ................................................. 205

UIM .......................................................... 20, 30

PIN............ ................................................. 126

Update center................. ............................ 252

USB connection .............. ..................... 36, 158

USB storage .................................................136

Format ...................................................... 137

User dictionary..................................... ......... 62

English user dictionary................... ......... 62

Japanese user dictionary ........................ 62

User dictionary settings .............................. 62

Backing up and restoring........................ 63

Vibration .......................... 120, 143, 229, 230

Videos............................................................. 74

Viewing photos .......................................... 196

Voice input & output.................................. 138

Voice Mail service........... .............................. 97

VPN ............................................................... 118

Wallpaper....................................................... 69

Web history ................................................. 157

Wi-Fi.................................. ............................ 112

Sleep policy .............................................115

WPS settings................ ............................ 114

Wireless & networks................................... 109

Word suggestion .......................................... 61

Words by learning ........................................ 63

278

Appendix/Index

WORLD CALL ................................................. 82

World clock ................................................. 231

WORLD WING....................................... ...... 234

xLOUD.................................................... ...... 119

Xperia........................................................... 108

Xperia Japanese keyboard................. ......... 47

Setting ........................................................ 60

YouTube ...................................................... 198

Numerics

1Seg ............................................................. 215

Initial settings ......................................... 216

TVlink ................................................. ...... 219

Watching program ................................ 217

1Seg antenna ...................................29, 216

3D album..................................................... 194

Don't forget your mobile phone ... or your manners!

Remember to be courteous to others when you use your terminal.

Turn the power off when you are:

■

In places where use is prohibited

Be sure to switch the power off in an aircraft or a

hospital.

* Turn off your terminal even in hospital lobbies

and waiting rooms as well as hospital wards if

electronic medical devices may be in use near

you.

■

In crowded places such as peak-hour trains if

implanted electronic medical devices may be in

use near you

Radio waves emitted by the terminal may

adversely affect implanted pacemakers and ICDs

when used in close proximity.

■

Driving

Using a handheld mobile phone while driving will

result in a penalty.

However, absolutely necessary cases such as

rescue of a sick person or maintaining public's

safety are exempted.

■

In places such as theaters, cinemas, and art

galleries

Using the terminal in a public place, where you

need to be quiet, annoys people around you.

Keep your voice and ring tone down

■

Keep your voice down in quiet places like

restaurants and hotel lobbies.

■

If you are in an outdoor public place, make sure

you do not disturb others.

Respect privacy

Please be considerate of the privacy of

individuals around you when taking and

sending photos using camera-equipped

mobile phones.

Have good manners

The terminal is equipped with useful functions

not to answer an incoming call or to mute the

sound.

【

Vibrate

】

(P.120)

Vibrates when there is an incoming call.

【

Silent mode

】

(P.120)

Silent mode mutes the sounds of the terminal such

as the keypad sounds and the ring tone.

* Shutter sound cannot be muted.

You can also use optional services such as the

Voice Mail Service (P.97) and Call Forwarding

Service (P.99).

Make various applications or charge your billing plan, check your charges and points, and more

online.

My docomo (http://www.mydocomo.com/) ⇒ 各種お申込・お手続き (Various applications/procedures) *In

Japanese only.

* "docomo ID and password" are required for use.

Please contact "General Inquiries" described on the last page of this manual if you forget or do not have "docomo ID and password".

* May not be available in some cases depending on the conditions of your subscription.

* There are cases where the site may not be available due to system maintenance, etc.

General Inquiries

0120-005-250 (toll free)

*Service available in: English, Portuguese, Chinese, Spanish, Korean.

*Unavailable from part of IP phones.

(Business hours: 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m.)

■From DOCOMO mobile phones (In Japanese only)

(No prefix) 151 (toll free)

*Unavailable from land-line phones, etc.

■From land-line phones (In Japanese only)

0120-800-000 (toll free)

*Unavailable from part of IP phones.

(Business hours: 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m. (open all year round))

●Please confirm the phone number before you dial.

●For Applications or Repairs and After-Sales Service, please contact the above-mentioned information center or the docomo

shop etc. near you on the NTT DOCOMO website.

NTT DOCOMO website http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/

Loss or theft of terminal or payment of cumulative cost overseas

(available 24 hours a day)

From DOCOMO mobile phones

Failures encountered overseas

(available 24 hours a day)

From DOCOMO mobile phones

International call access code

for the country you stay -81-3-6832-6600* (toll free)

You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a land-line phone, etc.

*If you use SO-05D, you should dial the number +81-3-6832-6600

(to enter '＋', touch and hold '0').

From land-line phones

Universal number international

prefix -8000120-0151*

*You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the

call rate for the country you stay.

*For international call access codes for major countries and

universal number international prefix, refer to DOCOMO

International Services website.

●If you lose your terminal or have it stolen, immediately take

the steps necessary for suspending the use of the terminal.

●

If the terminal you purchased is damaged, bring your terminal

to a repair counter specified by DOCOMO after returning to Japan.

Don’t forget your mobile phone・・・or your manners!

٧When using your mobile phone in a public place, don’t forget to show

common courtesy and consideration for others around you.

-81-3-6718-1414* (toll free)

International call access code

for the country you stay

You are charged a call fee to Japan when calling from a land-line phone, etc.

*If you use SO-05D, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1414

(to enter '＋', touch and hold '0').

From land-line phones

Repairs

■From DOCOMO mobile phones (In Japanese only)

(No prefix) 113 (toll free)

*Unavailable from land-line phones, etc.

■From land-line phones (In Japanese only)

0120-800-000 (toll free)

*Unavailable from part of IP phones.

(Business hours: 24 hours (open all year round))

-8005931-8600*

Universal number international

prefix

*You might be charged a domestic call fee according to the

call rate for the country you stay.

*For international call access codes for major countries and

universal number international prefix, refer to DOCOMO

International Services website.

Sales: NTT DOCOMO, INC.

Manufacturer: Sony Mobile

Communications Japan, Inc

’12.02 (1st Edition) 1261-6948.1

We collect old phones, etc. regardless of brands and

manufacturers. Bring them to your nearest docomo Shop.

Items to be collected: mobile phones, PHS, battery

packs, chargers, desktop holders (regardless of brands

and manufacturers)

Li-ion 00

Sony PM-0020 Mobile phone with Bluetooth, WLAN 802.11abgn, GPS/A-GPS, RFID and FM Rx User Manual 08 user guide

Sony Mobile Communications Inc Mobile phone with Bluetooth, WLAN 802.11abgn, GPS/A-GPS, RFID and FM Rx 08 user guide

08 user guide

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation